Instrucciones de Armado Torres Marlyn Eto

SPX Cooling Technologies Literature Package January 18, 2024
Project: Boston Scientific De Costa For: Clima Ideal

Rica Zona Industrial Pavas 10109
2546 Calle Primera SAN JOSE
COYOL
Performance Conditions:
Flow Rate: 4,650.00 GPM Hot Water: 95.00F Cold Water: 81.70F Wet Bulb: 74.60F
Motor Capacity per Cell: 30.00 HP Motor Output per Cell: 30.00 HP
Fan Speed RPM: 241.00 Trial Fan Pitch Degrees: 25.00
Order No: 10243694 Model No: MHF7111SATBNC4SGK PO No: IM0010663

Sales Office Order No:
Please contact your local sales representative if you have any questions:
SPX Cooling Technologies

7401 West 129 Street
Overland Park KS 66213
Phone:
Fax:
Email: william.zavislak@spx.com
Your local sales representative will be happy to quote current parts price and lead time upon request.
Go to http://spxcooling.com for a full list of representatives.
This instruction package will help you get your cooling unit up and running. Each unit (cell) is
individually identified with a serial number located at the top of this page and on the serial number plate
located on each unit's access door (example: NC-000000-A1). Make sure these numbers match.
Each cell will have it's own material list which lists part descriptions along with drawing number,
quantity and find-number. Find-numbers are part references used on the installation instruction manuals -
not all descriptions in the material list will have find-numbers. The drawing called out on the material list
could be an installation manual (identified with a drawing number), fastener kit or a unique drawing for
your installation. These material lists are required to install options that were purchased with the cooling
unit and are located in the Bills of Material section. All installation manuals and drawings are located in
the Install Manuals & Drawings section.
Also included are User (O&M) Manuals located in the User Manuals section. Start with product User
Manual to be sure installation and orientation of the cooling units is correct. If you have any problems
contact your sales representative-information is located above.
This package contains the following drawings:
Drawing Rev Description
50196546 A 7111-13 COPPER COIL I/O DETAILS

50202847 A TAP SCREW INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
50212187 A MHF7111-13 MEPF LDR Cage Ext Fill
Order Number: 10243694 Page 2 of 3
This package contains the following drawings:
Drawing Rev Description
50212853 A MHF7111-13 LFPF Louver face Ldr Ext Fill

50225530 B CONTROL COOLBOOST OPTI FC
50237273 A MHF7111-13 modular clip Manual_Ext Fill
10000006799 A VFD-ABB ACH580 NEMA 3R MCB BP
04-26306 STANDARD AND OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT INSTALL
06-21113 SIDE DRAIN PLUG INSTALLATION FAP
09-1270 B NC8400 Field Install - Field Installed M
09-22250 A FANDECK WALKWAY SUPPORT INSTALLATION FAP
97-156 Drawing 97-156 Rev:
Z0233144 A MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT HOLD-DOWN FASTENER
Z0628389 C NC8400 and MHF7111-13 Field Install - Fa
Z0871655 ACCESS DOOR PLATFORM MHF7111 & MHF7113
Z0871658 A LADDER EXTENSION AND SAFETY CAGE MHF7111
Z0871659 PLENUM WALKWAY MHF7111 & MHF7113
Z0871660 INTERIOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT ACCESS PLA
Z0871663 RECOMMENDED CONDUIT LOCATIONS MHF7111 &
Z0871670 B SWEEPER PIPING MHF7111
Z0871674 B RECIRCULATING WATER PIPING PLAN DETAILS
Z0897996 A SWEEPER SYSTEM INSTALL SIDE INLET MHF711
Z0901712 E MHF7111-13 Shop Assembly Manual - Top Se
Z0915977 Access Door Platform MHF7111-7113
Z0921093 LADDER & GUARDRAIL LVR FACE MHF7111-13
Z0921094 A LADDER & GUARDRAIL CASE FACE NO-LDR MHF7
Z0924034 FAN DECK WALKWAY MHF7111 & MHF7113
Z0955215 SAFETY CAGE 0' FT ELEVATION ADPLTFM MHF7
Z1010136 MECH EQUIP PLTFM BTM MHF7111 & MHF7113
Z1044785 Eliminator Support A MHF7100
Z1052181 A HOISTING DETAILS MHF7111-13
Z1052195 WATER MAKEUP INSTALLATION MHF FAP
Z1057702 MHF 7111-7113 GRILLAGE DETAIL FAP
Z1062939 UW SENSOR CLIP INSTALL
Z1063075 ULTRASONIC WATER LEVEL CONTROL DETAILS S
Z1069733 A LADDER & GUARDRAIL CASE FACE W/LDR MHF71
Z1070874 VIBRATION MOUNTING BLOCK BELT DRIVE MECH
This package contains the following user manuals:
Manual Rev Description

Order Number: 10243694 Page 3 of 3
Z0238848 C DM-MDT-C DOWNTIME MANUAL

Z0490769 C USER MANUAL - 2200 - 2250 - 2400 GRDR
Z0490858 C SERVICE ALERT - LEGIONELLA
Z0560176 A OM-PUMP SCOT MOTORPUMP C56 & JM FRAME
Z0592740 B Marley SofTork Series MC Coupling
Z0920512 E MH Fluid Cooler User Manual
Z1070990 B IMI 686B Engineering Data & User Manual
Z1080817 LLC+u+bms ULTRASONIC USER MANUAL
Z1104005 WARRANTY REGISTRATION INFO BULLETIN
Z1110148 COOLING TOWER STORAGE GUIDELINES
1
S410/S431 Stainless Steel Tap Screws: Generally have no marking on the
head. They do not require the hole in the metal to be pre-tapped before installation.
Tornillos rosca de acero inoxidable S410/S431: Generalmente no tienen

marcas en la cabeza. No quieren que el orificio en el metal esté previamente
roscado antes de la instalación.
S410/S431不锈钢自钻螺钉: 通常螺钉头无材质标示。安装前无须预钻孔。
S316 Stainless Steel Screws: Head is generally marked "316". To help prevent
stripping of S316 tap screw threads, first insert the provided galvanized screw to pre-tap the
hole. The S316 screw can then be installed. Reuse the galvanized screw until the threads
become ineffective.
Tornillo de acero inoxidable S316: La cabeza generalmente esta marcada como

“316”. Para ayudar a evitar que se pelen las roscas de los tornillos de rosca S316, primero
316 inserte el tornillo galvanizado proporcionado para hacer una rosca previa en el orificio.
Luego se puede instalar el tornillo S316. Reutilice el tornillo galvanizado hasta que las
roscas se vuelvan ineficaces.
S316不锈钢螺钉:通常螺钉头标示"316"。为防止S316螺钉丝牙剥离，首先使用镀锌螺钉
预钻孔，然后才能安装S316螺钉。镀锌螺钉可以使用至失效。
Galvanized screws provided to pre-tap holes are generally unmarked

on the head and have a dull gray finish.
Los tornillos galvanizados que se proporcionan para los orificios de

roscado previo generalmente no tienen marcas en la cabeza y tienen
un acabado gris mate.
提供的预钻孔用镀锌螺钉通常螺钉头无标示,通体钝灰色。
CONFIDENTIAL: The contents of this document DRAWN BY DRAWN DATE

are confidential and constitute the exclusive property DJENKINS2 02/12/2021 STAINLESS STEEL TAP SCREW
of SPX Cooling Technologies. This document and its
contents may not be made public in any manner, CHECKED BY CHECKED DATE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
distributed or loaned to others, reproduced or copied,
either in whole or part, without the prior written consent FOR SHEETMETAL
of SPX Cooling Technologies. RELEASED BY RELEASED DATE ECM NUMBER ORDER NUMBER PLOT DOC TYPE/PART/VER DRAWING NUMBER REV.
© As of dates(s) in title block SPX Cooling technologies
Unpublished-All rights reserved under copyright laws DJENKINS2 03/01/2021 500685 PPI#1549 1=1 SED/000/01 50202847 A
2
Reference Fastener Kit: KIT FSTN SAFETY CAGE INSTAL
Safety Cage MHF7100
Mechanical Equpiment Platform Safety Cage (MHF7111##T & MHF7113##K)
Attach post L74 to MEPF guardrail, and intall pipe plug L28, safety cage L72 & L73 as shown.
FIND NO. DESCRIPTION

V11 Bolt M10X65
V22 Bolt M12X65 V22
W23 L28
V25 Bolt M12X100 V22 W23
W02 Washer Lock M10
W03 Washer Lock M12 W03 W23
W22 Washer SC M10 X03
W23 Washer SC M12 W03
X02 NUT M10
X03
X03 NUT M12
L74
X03
W03
V25
L72
L73
X02
W22
W02
W22
V11
CONFIDENTIAL: THE CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND CONSTITUTE THE EXCLUSIVE
50212187 _A PROPERTY OF SPX COOLING TECHNOLOGIES, INC. THIS DOCUMENT AND ITS CONTENTS MAY NOT BE MADE
PUBLIC IN ANY MANNER, DISTRIBUTED OR LOANED TO OTHERS, OR REPRODUCED OR COPIED EITHER IN
Page 1 of 1 WHOLE OR PART WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT OF SPX COOLING TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
3
© 2018 SPX COOLING TECHNOLOGIES, INC. UNPUBLISHED-ALL RIGHTS RESERVED UNDER COPYRIGHT LAWS.
Reference Fastener Kit: KIT FSTN MHF LOUVER PLATFORM LADDER
Louver Face Platform Ladder MHF7111 THRU MHF7113
LOUVER FACE PLATFORM LADDER

(MHF7111##T & MHF7113##K)
1. ATTACH LADDER FLARE L38 & L39 TO PLATFORM GUARDRAIL
AND POST CLIPS, AND LOWER SUPPORTS
L40, L50, L51 TO COLD WATER BASIN AND LOUVER COLUMN.
INSTALL PIPE PLUG L28.
2. MODULAR TOWERS REQUIRE ADDITIONAL MID-LADDER
SUPPORTS L53, L54, L55 BE ATTACHED TO CHANNEL OF TOP
L28
MODULE AND LOUVER COLUMN. L28
3. BOLT LADDER ASSEMBLY L41 & L42 TO FLARE AND SUPPORTS.
THE LADDERS ARE JOINTED BY LADDER SPLICE L98.
A
4. LADDER MAY BE LOCATED AT EITHER END OF PLATFORM,
GUARDRAIL WILL BE PLACED ACCORDINGLY, REFERENCE
GUARDRAIL INSTALLATION DRAWINGS.
B
L38
L28 L41
L39
V22
X03 L98
W03
L98
L55
DETAIL A C
L53
L54
L42
W22 FIND NO. DESCRIPTION

X02
V07 Bolt M10X25
W02 V10 Bolt M10X40
L50
V22 Bolt M12X65
W02 Washer Lock M10
L38
D W03
W22
Washer Lock M12
Washer SC M10
X02 NUT M10
ALUM LDR V10 X03 NUT M12
STL LDR V07 DETAIL B L40
L51
PLATFORM LADDER INSTALLATION
OTHER DETAILS NEXT PAGE
4
Reference Fastener Kit: KIT FSTN MHF LOUVER PLATFORM LADDER
Louver Face Platform Ladder MHF7111 THRU MHF7113
STL LDR V07
ALUM LDR V10 W22
V18 L55 L98
X02
W03
X03 W02
L98
W23 V18
X03
W03
X03 V18
W03
X02
L53
V18 W02
W03
X03 L54
W22
W22
X02 V10 ALUM LDR

DETAIL C W02 V07 STL LDR
W03 V18 FIND NO. DESCRIPTION

X03 V10 Bolt M10X40
V18 Bolt M12x25
W02 Washer Lock M10
W03 Washer Lock M12
W03 W22 Washer SC M10
W23 Washer SC M12
X03 X02 NUT M10
X03 L50
W03 W23 V18 X03 NUT M12
L51
L40 V18 X02
W02
V18
X03
W03
W22
V10 ALUM LDR
DETAIL D X02 W02
V07 STL LDR
5
6
Interior Modular Clip Installation MHF7111 and MHF7113
Attach Interior Modular Clip F15 to Extended Fill Mechanical Column as shown. SS.TWR X12
Refer to order BOM to determine the Interior Modular Clip quantity and location.
GALV.TWR X02
GALV.TWR
V07 Bolt M10X25 W02
W02 Washer Lock M10
X02 NUT M10
X12 NUT S300 SELF-LOCKING M10 EXTENDED FILL
MECHANICAL COLUMN
V07
F15
A F15
DETAIL A
F15
BOTTOM MODULE WITH

EXTENDED FILL
SED_50237273_000_01 Rev. A PROPERTY OF SPX COOLING TECH, LLC. THIS DOCUMENT AND ITS CONTENTS MAY NOT BE MADE PUBLIC IN
ANY MANNER, DISTRIBUTED OR LOANED TO OTHERS, OR REPRODUCED OR COPIED EITHER IN WHOLE OR
Page 1 of 1 PART WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT OF SPX COOLING TECH, LLC.
© 2022 SPX COOLING TECH, LLC. UNPUBLISHED-ALL RIGHTS RESERVED UNDER COPYRIGHT LAWS. 7
ABB ACH580 VFD
data sheet
Specifications:
NEMA 3R indoor enclosure

Main circuit breaker disconnect
Bypass motor starter
Service switch
Data sheet applies to 208-240V, 480V and 575V
Note: A) Select dimension below based on HP and voltage at site
Marley Drawing # 10000006799

8
MCB (Main Circuit Breaker) option, amperage table.
Note: Not all VFD configurations have a circuit breaker type disconnect option. This
data is included to list size of MCB if integrated within the VFD package and to assist
in sizing an upstream field installed feeder breaker. Breaker amp size allows the
cooling tower fan motor to start in bypass mode at full utility voltage.
Voltage 3 phase 60 cycle
HP 208/230 460 575
1 15 15 15
1.5 15 15 15
2 15 15 15
3 15 15 15
5 35 15 15
7.5 35 15 15
10 60 35 15
15 60 35 35
20 100 35 35
25 100 60 35
30 125 60 60
40 225 100 60
50 225 100 70
60 225 100 100
75 400 125 100
100 400 225 125
125 225 225
150 225 225
200 400 Call
250 600 Call
9
—
P RO DUCT OVE RVI EW
ACH580 E-Clipse Bypass

The ACH580 drive sets new standards in both simplicity and reliability, and
ensures smooth, energy-efficient operation of your HVAC systems in
normal and mission-critical situations.
The ACH580 with ABB E-Clipse bypass is an ACH580 HVAC Drive in an integrated UL (NEMA) Type 1, 12 or 3R enclosure
with a bypass motor starter. The ACH580 with ABB E-Clipse bypass provides an input disconnect switch or circuit breaker
with door mounted and interlocked operator (padlockable in the OFF position), a bypass starter, electronic motor overload
protection, a door mounted control panel with graphical display for local control, provisions for external control connections,
and serial communications capability. Configurations with the +F267 option include a drive service switch.
UL (NEMA) Type 1 and 12 E-Clipse units are available from 1 to 100 HP at 208/230V, 1 to 350 HP at 460V, and 2 to 150 HP
at 575V. UL (NEMA) Type 1 and 12 units are wall mounted from 1 to 200 HP.
For outdoor applications, UL (NEMA) Type 3R E-Clipse unit are available from 1 to 100 HP at 208/230V, 1 to 350 HP at
460V and 2 to 150 HP at 575V. Construction is sheet steel with a tough powder coat paint finish for corrosion resistance. A
thermostatically controlled space heater and forced ventilated air cooling system are standard.
The ACH580 with ABB E-Clipse bypass includes two contactors. One contactor is the bypass contactor, used to connect the
motor directly to the incoming power line in the event that the ACH580 is out of service. The other contactor is the ACH580
output contactor that disconnects the ACH580 from the motor when the motor is operating in the Bypass mode. The drive
output contactor and the bypass contactor are electrically interlocked to prevent “back feeding”.
The ACH580 with ABB E-Clipse bypass is a microprocessor-controlled “intelligent” system which features programmable
Class 10, 20, or 30 overload curves, programmable underload (broken belt) and overload trip or indication. Also included as
standard features are single-phase protection in bypass mode, programmable manual or automatic transfer to bypass,
fireman’s override, smoke control, damper control, no contactor chatter on brown-out power conditions and serial
communications. Should a drive problem occur, fast acting fuses exclusive to the ACH580 drive path disconnect the drive
from the line prior to clearing upstream branch circuit protection, maintaining bypass capability.
10
—
Control panel features
The ACH580 Assistant Control Panel features:
- Intuitive to operate
- Primary Setting menu to ease drive commissioning
- Real-time clock
- Diagnostic and maintenance functions
- Full-graphic display, including chart, graph, and meter options
- 21 editable home views
- USB interface for PC and tool connection as standard
- Parameters are alpha-numeric
- North American version supports 14 languages as standard
- Dedicated “Help” key
- 4 user sets
- Parameter are stored in control panel memory for later transfer to other drives or for backup of a particular
system
- Back-up and restore parameters and/or motor data
- Automatic back-up 2 hours after parameter change
- Modified parameter display
- Creates unique short menu
- Shows parameters that differ from the default
- Bluetooth connectivity for use with mobile device (requires +J429 option)
11
—
E-Clipse control panel features
The ACH580 E-Clipse Control Panel features:
- Dedicated programming and operating controls (keys) are logically grouped on the keypad by their function.
o H-O-A, Drive/Bypass Selection keys (Control)
o UP/DOWN arrows, ESC, ENTER keys (Programming)
- LCD display provide:
o Operating Control Status
o Bypass Status
o Fault/Warning annunciation
o Parameter Lists and Values
o Power On indication
- Individual LEDs arranged to provide a logical control path visual:
o System Enabled
o Separate multi colored Drive and Bypass “SELECTED/FAULTED LEDs in separate paths
o Motor Run Indicator
o LEDs that illuminate, change color, and flash to provide visible indication of system status
- Provides System control from one location
54450337
19
12
—
Control connections
The control wiring includes connections to an analog speed command signal and a start/stop relay contact for controlling the
motor in the AUTO mode. There may also be connections to external run permissive interlock contacts and a connection
from the Motor Run contact to an external status indication circuit. For a detailed description of the control circuit functions
and alternate Control Connection diagrams, refer to the ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive manual.
54450337
23
13
Marley note:
Drawing represents most VFD's in this configuration.
Slight variations may occur depending on HP size.
ABB Inc.
14
VOLTAGE HP ABB CATALOG NUMBER DIM REF MARLEY ITEM
208-240 1 ACH580-BCR-04A6-2+B058+F267 Bx3R-1 2719963
208-240 2 ACH580-BCR-07A5-2+B058+F267 Bx3R-1 2719964
208-240 3 ACH580-BCR-10A6-2+B058+F267 Bx3R-1 2719965
208-240 5 ACH580-BCR-017A-2+B058+F267 Bx3R-1 2719966
208-240 7.5 ACH580-BCR-024A-2+B058+F267 Bx3R-1 2719967
208-240 10 ACH580-BCR-031A-2+B058+F267 Bx3R-2 2719968
208-240 15 ACH580-BCR-046A-2+B058+F267 Bx3R-2 2719969
208-240 20 ACH580-BCR-059A-2+B058+F267 Bx3R-2 2719970
208-240 25 ACH580-BCR-075A-2+B058+F267 Bx3R-2 2719971
208-240 30 ACH580-BCR-088A-2+B058+F267 CALL 2719972
208-240 40 ACH580-BCR-114A-2+B058+F267 CALL 2719973
208-240 50 ACH580-BCR-143A-2+B058+F267 CALL 2719974
208-240 60 ACH580-BCR-169A-2+B058+F267 CALL 2719975
208-240 75 ACH580-BCR-211A-2+B058+F267 CALL 2719976
480 1 ACH580-BCR-02A1-4+B058+F267 Bx3R-1 2720015
480 2 ACH580-BCR-03A5-4+B058+F267 Bx3R-1 2720016
480 3 ACH580-BCR-04A8-4+B058+F267 Bx3R-1 2720017
480 5 ACH580-BCR-07A6-4+B058+F267 Bx3R-1 2720018
480 7.5 ACH580-BCR-012A-4+B058+F267 Bx3R-1 2720019
480 10 ACH580-BCR-014A-4+B058+F267 Bx3R-1 2720020
480 15 ACH580-BCR-023A-4+B058+F267 Bx3R-1 2720021
480 20 ACH580-BCR-027A-4+B058+F267 Bx3R-2 2720022
480 25 ACH580-BCR-034A-4+B058+F267 Bx3R-2 2720023
480 30 ACH580-BCR-044A-4+B058+F267 Bx3R-2 2720024
480 40 ACH580-BCR-052A-4+B058+F267 Bx3R-2 2720025
480 50 ACH580-BCR-065A-4+B058+F267 Bx3R-2 2720026
480 60 ACH580-BCR-077A-4+B058+F267 Bx3R-2 2720027
480 75 ACH580-BCR-096A-4+B058+F267 CALL 2720028
480 100 ACH580-BCR-124A-4+B058+F267 CALL 2720029
480 125 ACH580-BCR-156A-4+B058+F267 CALL 2720030
480 150 ACH580-BCR-180A-4+B058+F267 CALL 2720031
480 200 ACH580-BCR-240A-4+B058+F267 CALL 2720032
575 2 ACH580-BCR-02A7-6+B058+F267 Bx3R-1 2720065
575 3 ACH580-BCR-03A3-6+B058+F267 Bx3R-1 2720066
575 5 ACH580-BCR-06A1-6+B058+F267 Bx3R-1 2720067
575 7.5 ACH580-BCR-09A0-6+B058+F267 Bx3R-1 2720068
575 10 ACH580-BCR-011A-6+B058+F267 Bx3R-1 2720069
575 15 ACH580-BCR-017A-6+B058+F267 Bx3R-1 2720070
575 20 ACH580-BCR-022A-6+B058+F267 Bx3R-2 2720071
575 25 ACH580-BCR-027A-6+B058+F267 Bx3R-2 2720072
575 30 ACH580-BCR-032A-6+B058+F267 Bx3R-2 2720073
575 40 ACH580-BCR-041A-6+B058+F267 CALL 2720074
575 50 ACH580-BCR-052A-6+B058+F267 CALL 2720075
575 60 ACH580-BCR-062A-6+B058+F267 CALL 2720076
575 75 ACH580-BCR-077A-6+B058+F267 CALL 2720077
575 100 ACH580-BCR-099A-6+B058+F267 CALL 2720078
575 125 ACH580-BCR-125A-6+B058+F267 CALL 2720079
575 150 ACH580-BCR-144A-6+B058+F267 CALL 2720080
15
218 ACH580 E-Clipse bypass and packaged drive user manual
Dimensions: ACH580-BxR UL (NEMA) Type 3R, R1 through R4 Frame Size

Wall Mount (Bx3R-1 - Bx3R-2)
W D
Drawing is not for engineering purposes.
Height (H) Width (W) Depth (D) Weight Dimensional

Frame
in mm in mm in mm lb kg Drawings
Bx3R-1 33.30 846 17.70 449 14.00 355 83.8 38.0 3AXD50000234622
Bx3R-2 40.60 1032 20.10 511 15.40 391 193.0 88.0 3AXD50000235315
*Keep a minimum of 50 mm (2 in.) of free space on each side and 200 mm (8 in.) of free space above
and below all units from non-heat producing sources. Double these distances from heat producing
sources.
Note: UL (NEMA) Type 3R, Bx3R-1...Bx3R-2 enclosures are designed to be

mounted on a wall. Mounting these 3R enclosures on an open rack system requires
the use of the supplied 3R enclosure back plates to maintain 3R integrity.
Technical data
16
MHx Tower Assembly – Standard/Optional
PARTS
Equipment
All steel parts are tagged for identification, as shown below.
ABOUT THIS MANUAL

To obtain maximum efficiency, it is strongly recommended that this entire
manual be read before starting assembly. This assembly manual illustrates a
typical shop assembly sequence of a typical tower. Some of the most commonly
used options are included in the description. Refer to separate installation
drawings for installation of special options and additional optional equipment.
Review assembly manual, drawings and bills of material prior to assembly.
Contact the Marley engineering should a question arise.
SAFETY Find Number: This is a three-digit alpha/numeric number that ties the bill of
material (BOM) to the drawings. They are identified in the drawings as the
Safety is the first priority at the job site. Cooling towers are constructed of alpha/numeric numbers within the circles. The find numbers on the drawings are
material that could cause injury if not handled properly. It is recommended that used in conjunction with the appropriate BOM to find the correct item numbers
Kevlar gloves and sleeves and eye protection be worn at all time when working needed for installation. For example, the MHx04 Bottom Module assembly
with steel, PVC and fiberglass. Hardhats should be worn when working with drawings must be used with the MHx04 Bottom Module BOM to find the correct
overhead objects. item number.
Steel parts may be heavy and the surfaces may be slick from oil used during
fabrication. Take precautions by placing heavy steel parts near or on the ground THE SAME FIND NUMBERS MAY BE USED FOR DIFFERENT PARTS.
to minimize the risk of dropping. Although all steel parts are de-burred, the
edges of steel can be very sharp and cut easily. Keep a first aid kit handy should Item Number: This number is used by Marley to purchase, manufacture and
the need arise. inventory the components of the modules. Give these item numbers to the
Use the above suggestions as well as common sense to create a safe project manager if an item is missing or a replacement item is required.
working environment. Take steps to prevent tipping or falling hazards. Protection
from thrown or falling objects should be used at all times around a construction Drawing Number: (Reference Only) This is the number of the drawing used
site. Keep the worksite and assembly area clean. Check tools periodically and to fabricate the item. This number DOES NOT reference the drawing number
replace tools that could break or malfunction. Follow instruction manuals for all where the part is used.
powertools and beware of shock hazards that exist.
Description: (Reference Only) This number describes the dimensions of the
NEVER HOLD A PIECE OF STEEL IN PLACE USING ONLY A DRIFT PIN. flat pattern of the item. These dimensions MAY NOT correspond to the overall
Drift pins have smooth surfaces and are designed to slide in and out of holes dimensions of the part.
very easily. Drift pins can not hold themselves in place. Parts WILL fall if
suspended only by a drift pin. The find number, item number, description and quantity of items are all cross
referenced on the bill of material. If a number is missing or hard to read, check
the illustrations in this assembly manual first and then the bill of material to see if
you can find it. As the tower is prepared for assembly, the quantities of each
item should be checked against the bill of material. If anything is missing or
damaged tell your Marley contact as soon as possible.
Solid Edge
CONFIDENTIAL: THE CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT ARE ECO NUMBER
CONFIDENTIAL AND CONSTITUTE THE EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF MARLEY STANDARD AND OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT INSTALL
COOLING TECHNOLOGIES. THIS DOCUMENT AND ITS CONTENTS MAY NOT
BE MADE PUBLIC IN ANY MANNER, DISTRIBUTED OR LOANED TO OTHERS, OR REV. BY CHECKED FAP
REPRODUCED OR COPIED EITHER IN WHOLE OR PART WITHOUT THE PRIOR SHEET 1 OF 3
WRITTEN CONSENT OF MARLEY COOLING TECHNOLOGIES.
REV. DATE DRAWN BY DATE CHECKED APPROVED ORDER NUMBER PLOT DRAWING NUMBER REV.
C AS OF DATE(S) IN TITLE BLOCK MARLEY COOLING TECHNOLOGIES
UNPUBLISHED-ALL RIGHTS RESERVED UNDER COPYRIGHT LAWS. WIEDEMANN 10/14/2004 GSB 1=1 04-26306
17
A FEW WORDS ABOUT FASTENERS
Stainless steel fasteners:
TOOLS AND SUPPLIES Stainless steel fasteners are sensitive to galling. This is when you notice a
• Hoist: 26,000 pound capacity for hoisting coil section for largest model. They sudden increase in the force needed to turn a nut before parts are clamped.
cannot be lifted/moved with a forklift from the bottom. Apply anti-seize compound included with the hardware to the threads of the bolts
before installing the nut. If a nut does not easily spin on a bolt, do not try to force
• Small and large drift pins: (alignment tools) these are extremely important it, chances are it will seize. Some extra hardware is included to replace
to help line up all the holes. problematic hardware, but very little. It will be necessary to cut or break galled
hardware. DO NOT LEAVE LOOSE HARDWARE ON TOWERS.
• Combination wrenches: used to tighten all hardware. May be substituted
for impact wrenches. Torque Requirements: FASTENER TORQUE
The ideal standard fastener torque Fastener Torque (foot-lbs.)
Bolt Diameter
• Impact wrenches (electric or pneumatic) with standard and deep values for galvanized and stainless steel Galvanized *Stainless Steel
sockets: used to tighten all hardware. fasteners are shown in the table to the
3/8" 20 20
right. These values may vary in actual
1/2" 45 27
practice. Note that the values shown for
• Torque wrench: 100 ft lb (136 N-m) capacity. 5/8" 90 44
stainless steel fasteners are based on
3/4" 150 74
the fasteners being lubricated with anti-
• Utility knife, Cutting pliers: used to open boxes and unwrap pallets. *Values based on fasteners lubricated with anti-seize compound.
seize compound.
• Caulking guns: application of sealer to steel and casing.
• Ladders: access to sections of tower. GENERAL DECAL INSTRUCTIONS

Decals are an important part of the tower assembly. Decals provide
• Acetone solvent: use with clean cotton rags to wipe down steel before instructions, identifications, cautions and warnings deemed necessary for proper
applying sealant. safety.
Surface Preparation:
MEASUREMENT SYSTEM Surface must be clean and dry. Oil and dirt may be removed with solvent (such
The manual uses the English System of measurement. All units are in feet – as acetone) or commercial detergent. Finally, wash the area with warm water and
inches. Fasteners are denoted and supplied in conformance with the English dry with a lint-free cloth. Ultimate adhesion will occur 24-48 hours after application
System. Application should not be undertaken if temperature is below 35 degrees
Fahrenheit or if humidity is greater than 95%.
General application instructions:

Peel off backing paper, taking care to avoid dirt contamination of the exposed
adhesive. Carefully apply the decal to the desired location with light pressure to
Loctite: avoid any distortion of vinyl. Once in position, smooth out with a towel. If air
Critical structural and mechanical attachments require extra protection against bubbles occur, puncture with a pin or needle and smooth down with a towel. The
the nuts vibrating loose during tower operation. This is accomplished on finished decal should be completely flat.
galvanized fasteners by applying Loctite Z05 thread locking compound to the
exposed threads of a bolt after the nut has been installed and tightened. Bolts
should be installed with the threaded end up or horizontally. TAP SCREW REPAIR
During installation of tap screws in the sheet metal parts, tap screws may strip,
not allowing the screw to be fully tightened. If this occurs place a 3/8” nut on the
Z05
This symbol is used throughout the manual back side of the tap screw and tighten.
to indicate the locations where Loctite Z05 is
required. Reference details at the right. Solid Edge
Typical bolted attachment with threaded end REPRODUCED OR COPIED EITHER IN WHOLE OR PART WITHOUT THE PRIOR SHEET 2 OF 3
of bolt up or bolt installed horizontally. REV. DATE DRAWN BY DATE CHECKED APPROVED ORDER NUMBER PLOT DRAWING NUMBER REV.
18
Sealing Instructions
WATER SIDE WATER SIDE
OF JOINT OF JOINT
FASTENER
FASTENER
JOINT
JOINT
SEALER 3/8" (10mm)

Z11
DIAMETER BEAD Z11 SEALER 3/8" (10mm)
DIAMETER BEAD
Z11 SEALER 3/8" (10mm)
TYPE A TYPE C DIAMETER BEAD

TYPE B
FASTENER HOLE
FASTENER HOLE
GENERAL NOTES
JOINT SEAL INSTRUCITONS:
Z13 THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION COVERING SURFACE PREPARATION APPLIES TO ALL
Z12 SEALED JOINTS WHETHER SEALER Z01 OR STRIP SEALER Z12 IS BEING USED. YEARS
OF EXPERIENCE HAS SHOWN THE INSTRUCTIONS ON SURFACE PREPARATION AND
SEALING DETAILS DO RESULT IN WATERTIGHT JOINTS. INADEQUATE ATTENTION TO
THE DETAILS WILL RESULT IN JOINTS THAT LEAK.
DO NOT APPLY EITHER SEALER IF TEMPERATURE IS BELOW 40 DEGREES FAHRENHEIT.
ALL FLANGES ARE TO BE STRAIGHT. REWOR K KINKS OR BENDS THAT EXIST. CLEAN
SURFACES BEING SEALED WITH STAR CLEAN #100. IF CLOTH IS USED, IT MUST
ALWAYS BE CLEAN AND DRY. EXERCISE CAUTION IN USING SOLVENTS, ALWAYS READ
LABELS AND INSTRUCTIONS. CARE SHOULD BE TAKEN NOT TO WIPE DIRT OR OIL
ONTO THE CLEANED SURFACE FROM ADJACENT UNCLEANED AREA. MATING
SURFACES TO BE SEALED MUST BE KEPT CLEAN AND DRY PRIOR TO ASSEMBLY. NO
WATER, GREASE OR DIRT SHOULD CONTAMINATE CLEANED AREA. NOTE THAT
STAINLESS STEEL REQUIRES A LARGER AREA TO BE CLEANED BECAUSE OIL WILL
CONTAMINATE SURFACES QUICKLY. OIL WILL MIGRATE THROUGH PUNCHED HOLES
Z12 AND AROUND SHEARED EDGES.
TYPE D TYPE E (TYPE 'D') THIS SYMBOL IS USED TO INDICATE THE LOCATIONS WHERE A SINGLE LAYER OF
STRIP SEALER Z12 IS REQUIRED.
(TYPE 'E') THIS SYMBOL IS USED TO INDICATE THE LOCATIONS WHERE TWO LAYERS OF STRIP
SEALER ARE REQUIRED. ALIGN EDGES OF STRIP SEALER Z12 WITH CENTER OF BOLT
HOLES.
Solid Edge
REPRODUCED OR COPIED EITHER IN WHOLE OR PART WITHOUT THE PRIOR SHEET 3 OF 3
19
20
ADDITIONS TO DESIGN
OPERATING LOADS
TOTAL P1
540 lbs 135 lbs

245 kgs 61 kgs
TO TOP OF THE FANDECK

ACCESS
17'-9 5/16'' DOOR
[5419MM]
GUARDRAIL
A
GENERAL NOTES
GRATING
1. FAN MOTOR MUST BE LOCKED OUT AND INOPERABLE BEFORE ENTERING TOWER. THIS
WARNING HAS BEEN PLACED ON BOTH ACCESS DOORS.
2.PLATFORM IS 16GA[1.5MM] HEAVY MILL GALVANIZED STEEL WALKING SURFACE WITH SLIP
RESISTANT PERFORATIONS, SUPPORTED BY 11GA[3MM] SECTIONS. GUARDRAIL, KNEERAIL AND
POSTS ARE 1.5” [38.1MM] SQUARE TUBE. MATERIAL FOR SQUARE TUBE IS GALVANIZED
STRUCTURAL TUBING.
3. ADD PLATFORM WEIGHT TO TOWER OPERATING WEIGHT SHOWN ON SUGGESTED

SUPPORTING STEEL DRAWING FOR TOTAL LOAD.
TOP OF 4. MAINTENANCE OPTIONS NOT SHOWN, BUT ALSO AVAILABLE:

GRATING
A) SAFETY CAGE TO FAN DECK (RECOMMENDED BY OSHA FOR IN-LINE
LADDERS LONGER THAN 20'-0", BUT LESS THAN 30'-0").
B) LADDER EXTENSION (FOR ELEVATED TOWERS).
C) SECOND FAN DECK LADDER OPTION.
7'- D) FAN DECK EXTENSION ON SIDE OPPOSITE LADDER. AVAILABLE
[235 8 1/2'
1'-5 7/16''
WITH SINGLE LADDER OPTION ONLY.

[444MM]
0MM E) SAFETY GATE AT LADDER OPENING.

] OUT OF F) PLENUM WALKWAY
OUT OF TOWER G) INTERIOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT ACCESS PLATFORM FOR MOTOR
PLATFORM AND DRIVELINE MAINTENANCE.
BASE OF 5. TOLERANCE APPLICABLE TO DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE DEPENDENT UPON FABRICATION,
TOWER
5 / 8'
ASSEMBLY, AND CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES. MARLEY'S FABRICATION TOLERANCE IS
4'-1 60MM]
±1/16"[2MM] AND ASSEMBLY TOLERANCE IS ±1/8"[3MM]. CONSULT SUPPLIERS OF SUPPORTING
STRUCTURE FOR CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES. ALL UNITS ARE IN INCH-POUNDS UNLESS
[12 NOTED.
Solid Edge
DETAIL A CONFIDENTIAL AND CONSTITUTE THE EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF SPX

COOLING TECHNOLOGIES, INC. THIS DOCUMENT AND ITS CONTENTS MAY
NOT BE MADE PUBLIC IN ANY MANNER, DISTRIBUTED OR LOANED TO REV. BY CHECKED
ACCESS DOOR PLATFORM
MHF7111 & MHF7113
ACCESS DOOR PLATFORM OTHERS, OR REPRODUCED OR COPIED EITHER IN WHOLE OR PART WITHOUT
THE PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT OF SPX COOLING TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
C AS OF DATE(S) IN TITLE BLOCK SPX COOLING TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
UNPUBLISHED-ALL RIGHTS RESERVED UNDER COPYRIGHT LAWS. GUI 12/15/13 AMF CGW 1=1 Z0871655
21
22
PLENUM WALKWAY WEIGHT
ADDITIONS TO DESIGN OPERATING LOADS

MODEL TOTAL P1
210 lbs 53 lbs
MHF7111
95 kgf 24 kgf
240 lbs 60 lbs
MHF7113
109 kgf 28 kgf
GENERAL NOTES
1.WALKWAY SUPPORTS ARE 11GA [3MM] HEAVY MILL GALVANIZED STEEL. WALKWAY
PANELS ARE 16GA [1.5MM] HEAVY MILL GALVANIZED STEEL. FOR ALL STAINLESS STEEL
TOWERS THESE COMPONENTS ARE CHANGED TO STAINLESS STEEL.
2. ELEVATION OF PLENUM WALKWAY WALKING SURFACE IS ABOVE OVERFLOW LEVEL.
3. DISTANCE FROM TOP OF PLENUM WALKWAY TO FAN IS 16'-1 7/8” [4924MM].
4. FAN MOTOR MUST BE LOCKED OUT AND INOPERABLE BEFORE ENTERING TOWER.
WARNING HAS BEEN PLACED ON BOTH ACCESS DOORS.
5. ADD WALKWAY WEIGHT TO TOWER OPERATING WEIGHT SHOWN ON SUGGESTED

ACCESS DOOR SUPPORTING STEEL DRAWING FOR TOTAL LOADS.
(BOTH ENDS)
6. MAINTENANCE OPTIONS NOT SHOWN, BUT ALSO AVAILABLE.
WALKWAY
PANELS a. LADDER UP TO AND PERIMETER HANDRAIL AROUND FAN DECK.
b. SAFETY CAGE TO FAN DECK (RECOMMENDED BY OSHA FOR IN-LINE

WALKWAY LADDERS LONGER THAN 20’-0” [6096MM], BUT LESS THAT 30’-0” [9144MM]).
SUPPORT
c. LADDER EXTENSION (FOR ELEVATED TOWERS)
d. ACCESS DOOR PLATFORM (FOR ELEVATED TOWERS)

PUMP
ENCLOSURE e. SECOND FAN DECK LADDER OPTION
f. FAN DECK EXTENSION ON SIDE OPPOSITE LADDER(S). AVAILABLE WITH

SINGLE LADDER OPTION ONLY.
g. INTERIOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT ACCESS PLATFORM FOR MOTOR AND

DRIVETRAIN MAINTAINANCE.
h. SAFETY GATE AT LADDER OPENING.
7. TOLERANCE APPLICABLE TO DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE DEPENDENT UPON

FABRICATION, ASSEMBLY, AND CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES. TOLERANCE IS
±1/16”[2MM] AND ASSEMBLY TOLERANCE IS ±1/8”[3MM]. CONSULT SUPPLIERS OF
SUPPORTING STRUCTURE FOR CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES.
PLENUM WALKWAY OPTION DETAILS Solid Edge

ECO NUMBER
PLENUM WALKWAY
REV. BY CHECKED MHF7111 & MHF7113
C AS OF DATE(S) IN TITLE BLOCK SPX COOLING TECHNOLOGIES, INC. REV. DATE DRAWN BY DATE CHECKED APPROVED ORDER NUMBER PLOT DRAWING NUMBER REV.
UNPUBLISHED-ALL RIGHTS RESERVED UNDER COPYRIGHT LAWS.
GUI 12/15/13 AMF CGW 1=1 Z0871659
23
MEPF WEIGHT
ADDTIONS TO DESIGN OPERATING LOADS
MODULE TOTAL P1
920 lbs 230 lbs
MHF7111
417 kgf 104 kgf
920 lbs 230 lbs
MHF7113
417 kgf 104 kgf
GUARDRAILS
GENERAL NOTES
1. THE INTERIOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT OPTION CONSISTS OF THE PLENUM WALKWAY SHOWN, PLUS AN ELEVATED
PLATFORM FOR ACCESS TO MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT. A LADDER IS INCLUDED FOR ACCESS TO THE MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
PLATFORM FROM THE PLENUM WALKWAY.
LADDER MECHANICAL 2. MATERIALS:
EQUIPMENT
PLATFORM a. WALKWAY SUPPORTS ARE 11GA [3MM] HEAVY MILL GALVANIZED (HMG) STEEL. WALKWAY PANELS ARE 16GA
[1.5MM] HEAVY MILL GALVANIZED STEEL.
LADDER
TOEBOARD b. MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT PLATFORM WALKWAYS ARE FRP BAR GRATING WITH AN HMG SHEET METAL
SUPPORTING STRUCTURE.
c. GUARDRAILS, KNEERAILS AND POSTS ARE 1.5” [38.1MM] SQUARE TUBE ASSEMBLIES WHICH ARE HOT DIP
GALVANIZED (HDG).
d. LADDER IS ALL ALUMINUM CONSTRUCTION CONSISTING OF 3” x 1 1/8” [76 MM x 29 MM] I-BEAM SIDE RAILS AND
1 ¼” [32 MM] DIAMETER SERRATED RUNGS.
e. FOR ALL STAINLESS TOWERS THE HMG PARTS ARE CHANGED TO STAINLESS STEEL. HDG ASSEMBLIES REMAIN HDG.
3. ELEVATION OF PLENUM WALKWAY WALKING SURFACE IS ABOVE OVERFLOW LEVEL.
4. DISTANCE FROM MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT PLATFORM TO FAN IS 7’-1 3/4” [2178MM].
5. FAN MOTORMUST BE LOCKED OUT AND INOPERABLE BEFORE ENTERING TOWER. WARNING HAS BEEN PLACED ON BOTH
ACCESS DOORS.
ACCESS DOOR 6. ADD WALKWAY & PLATFORM WEIGHT TO TOWER OPERATING WEIGHT SHOWN ON SUGGESTED SUPPORTING STEEL
(BOTH ENDS) DRAWING FOR TOTAL LOAD.
PLENUM 7. MAINTENANCE OPTIONS NOT SHOWN, BUT ALSO AVAILABLE.

WALKWAY
a. LADDER UP TO AND PERIMETER HANDRAIL AROUND FAN DECK.
WALKWAY
SUPPORT
b. SAFETY CAGE TO FAN DECK (RECOMMENDED BY OSHA FOR IN-LINE LADDERS LONGER THAN 20’-0” [6096MM],
PUMP BUT LESS THAT 30’-0” [9144MM]).
ENCLOSURE
c. LADDER EXTENSION (FOR ELEVATED TOWERS)
d. ACCESS DOOR PLATFORM (FOR ELEVATED TOWERS)
e. SECOND FAN DECK LADDER OPTION
f. FAN DECK EXTENSION ON SIDE OPPOSITE LADDER(S). AVAILABLE WITH SINGLE LADDER OPTION ONLY.
g. SAFETY GATE AT LADDER OPENING.
8. TOLERANCE APPLICABLE TO DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE DEPENDENT UPON FABRICATION, ASSEMBLY, AND CONSTRUCTION
TOLERANCES. TOLERANCE IS ±1/16”[2MM] AND ASSEMBLY TOLERANCE IS ±1/8”[3MM]. CONSULT SUPPLIERS OF SUPPORTING
STRUCTURE FOR CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES.
Solid Edge
MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT PLATFORM OPTION DETAILS ECO NUMBER

INTERIOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
REV. BY CHECKED ACCESS PLATFORM(MEPF)
MHF7111 & MHF7113
24
RECIRCULATION PUMP
VIBRATION SWITCH
STD. LOCATION
(BEAM SIDE)
2'-5 3/16"
741mm
~[610-1219MM]
~2-4FT
FAN
MOTOR
RECIRCULATION PUMP
VIEW B
BOX BEAM
(AT FAN MOTOR ELEVATION) OPTIONAL MOTOR OUTSIDE
PLAN VIEW AIRSTREAM LOCATION
A
RECOMMENDED LOCATION FOR

CONDUIT TO PASS THROUGH CASING.
MATERIAL IS 16GA. (1/16" [1.5MM] THICK) FAN MOTOR
GENERAL NOTES
1. ALL CONDUIT, CONNECTIONS, SUPPORTING CLIPS, HANGERS,
AND SAFETY SWITCHES ARE SUPPLIED BY OTHERS.
2. ALL CONDUIT, WIRING, SAFETLY SWITCHES AND OTHER

CONTROLS (BY OTHERS) MUST CONFORM TO LOCAL AND
FILL FILL NATIONAL ELECTRIC CODES.
3. CONDUIT MAY BE SUPPORTED ON THE SIDE OF THE INTERIOR

15'-11" MIN. 17'-6 1/2" MAX.
BOX BEAMS, OR SUSPENDED FROM THE BEAMS. SEE SIDE

1 1/8" [29MM] DIA. CONDUIT HOLE ELEVATION FOR LOCATION AT WHICH TO RUN CONDUIT
(HEAT TRACE CABLE)
THROUGH TOWER CASING.
1 3/4" [44MM] DIA. CONDUIT HOLE
(PUMP MOTOR)
4. HOLE(S) CUT IN CASING FOR CONDUIT SHOULD NOT BE
COIL SECTION COIL SECTION FLAME CUT AND SHOULD NOT BE LARGER THAN NECESSARY TO
ACCOMMODATE CONDUIT FITTINGS. SEAL HOLES WITH
CONDUIT MAY BE RUN BENEATH WATERPROOF CAULKING.
TOWER THROUGH PUMP BOTTOM
ACCESS OPENING
5. USE DRAWING IN CONJUCTION WITH APPLICABLE SCHEMATIC
VIEW A AND SUPPORTING STEEL DRAWINGS.
RECIRCULATION PUMP BOX ACCESS DOOR RECIRCULATION PUMP LOCATION 6. ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE IN INCHES UNLESS OTHERWISE
(SEE DETAIL A) VIEW FROM 'C' AND FACE 'A' NOTED.
SIDE ELEVATION ECO NUMBER
Solid Edge
RECOMMENDED CONDUIT LOCATIONS

DO NOT PUNCTURE TOWER MHF7111 & MHF7113
REV. BY CHECKED
IN THE WET SHADED AREAS
25
SWEEPER INLET ‰ TOWER ‰ TOWER
1'-0"
305MM C C
A
SWEEPER OUTLET
4" [102MM] DIA (F) B B
SWEEPER INLET ‰ TOWER
‰ TOWER
840MM
D D
2'-9"
A
836MM
2'-9"
1'-0"
305MM
BOTTOM INLET PLAN VIEW SIDE INLET PLAN VIEW

STANDPIPE DRAIN & (SEE NOTES 4 & 5)
OVERFLOW (IF APPLICABLE)
(SEE NOTES 2, 3, & 4)
4" [102MM] DIA 2 1/2"
TOWER C
L 1'-4 9/16" 64MM
421MM
7 7/8" FLOW
3'' [76MM] OVERFLOW 200MM
E 1 7/16" OVERFLOW 257.6GPM
37MM [16.26 L/S]
SWEEPER PIPE
WEIGHT
1 13/16" SWEEPER INLET
46MM 139 LB
COLD WATER [63 KGF]
DRAIN BASIN FLOOR
1'-3 3/4"
399MM
8 13/16" SECTION D-D
224MM SWEEPER PIPE 3 5/8"
92MM
146MM
SWEEPER OUTLET
E SECTION E-E
5 3/4"
& TOWER DRAIN

3" [76MM] DIA (F) (SEE NOTE 5) General Notes
4'' [102MM] DIAMETER COLD WATER
SIDE INLET ELEVATION VIEW SWEEPER INLET(F)
BASIN FLOOR 1. ANY FILTRATION SYSTEM CONNECTING TO THIS SWEEPER PIPE SYSTEM MUST HAVE 20 PSI OF INLET
(SEE NOTES 4 & 5) PRESSURE.
COLD WATER
3'' [76MM] SUPPLY PIPE BASIN END 2. TOWERS MUST BE INSTALLED ON RAISED SUPPORTING STEEL FOR ACCESS TO UNDER-SIDE OF COLD WATER
SECTION C-C BASIN WITH BOTTOM INLET AND OUTLET LOCATIONS.
3. BOTTOM SWEEPER OUTLET ASSEMBLY IS TO BE FIELD INSTALLED BY OTHERS. INSTALLATION DETAILS ARE
SHOWN WITH THE LITERATURE SHIPPED WITH THE TOWER.
1/2'' [13MM] DIA 4. IF PUMP LOCATED AT FACE A, THEN THE TOWER OVERFLOW, SWEEPER SYSTEM OUTLET AND INLET WILL BE
EXTENSION PIPE OPPOSITE HAND.
5. WHEN TOWER HAS CASED FACE DRAIN & OVERFLOW AND A SIDE CONNECTION SWEEPER, TOWER DRAIN AND
SWEEPER OUTLET SHARE ONE CONNECTION. CUSTOMER IS TO PROVIDE TEE TO SEPARATE THESE FLOWS.
4 1/2'' [114MM] DIA (F) COLLECTION BASIN
70MM
2 3/4"
TOP OF DEPRESSED FLOOR COLD WATER 6. TOWER ASSEMBLY TOLERANCE APPLICABLE TO ALL DIMENSIONS IS + OR - 1/8" (3MM).
SUPPORTING BASIN END
STEEL COLD WATER BASIN FLOOR Solid Edge
ECO NUMBER
23489 SWEEPER PIPING

SECTION B-B MHF7111
22MM
REV. BY CHECKED
7/8"
BEM BEM
5" SECTION A-A REV. DATE DRAWN BY DATE CHECKED APPROVED ORDER NUMBER PLOT DRAWING NUMBER REV.
4" [102MM] DIA (F) C AS OF DATE(S) IN TITLE BLOCK SPX COOLING TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
127MM UNPUBLISHED-ALL RIGHTS RESERVED UNDER COPYRIGHT LAWS. 02/14/2018 GUI 12/15/13 AMF CGW 1=1 Z0871670 B
26
27
MHF71XX Steel Cooling Tower - Model MHF7111-MHF7113
Shop Assembly Manual - Top Section Z0901712_E
28
(This page intentionally left blank)
29
Getting Started MHF7111 and MHF7113 Shop Assembly - Top Section
Note: Optional equipment not listed in the Table of

Getting Started (Section-Page) Contents is installed using separate installation
About This Manual..................................................1-3 drawings and bills of material. These documents
Safety......................................................................1-3 are located within the literature package and should
Part Identification....................................................1-4 be reviewed prior to starting assembly. Optional
Measurement System.............................................1-4
equipment may affect assembly sequence.
Tools & Supplies.....................................................1-4
PVC Fill Storage..................................................... 1-4
A Few Words About Fasteners...............................1-5
Joint Sealing Instructions........................................1-7
General Decal Instructions......................................1-8
Tower Assembly
Fill Cube Assembly..................................................2-1
Hot Water Basin Assembly......................................3-1
Top Deck Assembly.................................................4-1
Skid Assembly.........................................................5-1
Mechanical Equipment Assembly............................6-1
Structure Assembly.................................................7-1
Fill Tube Support.....................................................7-6
Mechanical Equipment Installation..........................7-7
Recirculation Piping.................................................7-9
Casing Assembly.....................................................8-1
Tie Rods..................................................................8-3
Fan Guard...............................................................8-4
Decal Installation.....................................................8-5
Fan Installation........................................................9-1
Optional Equipment
Mechanical Equipment Platform............................10-1
Lubeline.................................................................10-6
Internal Vibration Switch........................................10-7
CONFIDENTIAL: THE CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND CONSTITUTE THE EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF SPX COOLING TECHNOLOGIES, INC. THIS DOCUMENT
Z0901712_D SECTION-1 AND ITS CONTENTS MAY NOT BE MADE PUBLIC IN ANY MANNER, DISTRIBUTED OR LOANED TO OTHERS, OR REPRODUCED OR COPIED EITHER IN WHOLE OR PART WITHOUT THE
Page 1 of 8 PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT OF SPX COOLING TECHNOLOGIES, INC. © 2015 SPX COOLING TECHNOLOGIES, INC. UNPUBLISHED-ALL RIGHTS RESERVED UNDER COPYRIGHT LAWS.
30
31
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
To obtain maximum efficiency, it is strongly recommended that this Safety is the first priority at the job site. Cooling towers are
entire manual be read before starting assembly. This assembly manual constructed of material that could cause injury if not handled
illustrates a typical assembly sequence of a basic tower. Some properly. It is recommended that Kevlar gloves and sleeves and
common options are also included. Refer to separate installation eye protection be worn at all time when working with steel, PVC
drawings for additional optional equipment Review all manuals, and fiberglass. Hardhats should be worn when working with
drawings and bills of material prior to assembly. These documents are overhead objects.
located in a Literature Kit packed with the tower. Contact your SPX Steel parts may be heavy and the surfaces may be slick from oil
Cooling Technologies sales representative should questions arise. used during fabrication. Take precautions by placing heavy steel
parts near or on the ground to minimize the risk of dropping.
SAFETY Although all steel parts are de-burred, the edges of steel can be
The location and orientation of the cooling tower can affect the safety of very sharp and cut easily. Keep a first aid kit handy should the
those responsible for installing, servicing, or repairing the tower. Since need arise.
SPX Cooling Technologies does not dictate the location, or orientation Use the above suggestions as well as common sense to create a
of the tower, SPX Cooling Technologies is not responsible for safe working environment. Take steps to prevent tipping or falling
addressing the safety issues that are affected by the tower's location, or hazards. Protection from thrown or falling objects should be used
orientation. The following safety issues should be considered by those at all times around a construction site. Keep the worksite and
responsible for designing the tower installation. Failure to consider and assembly area clean. Check tools periodically and replace tools
address these issues may result in substantial personal injury, or death that could break or malfunction. Follow instruction manuals for all
to those involved in installing, servicing, or repairing the cooling tower. powertools and beware of shock hazards that exist.
* Access to and from maintenance access doors NEVER HOLD A PIECE OF STEEL IN PLACE USING ONLY A
* Access for cleaning and other service DRIFT PIN. Drift pins have smooth surfaces and are designed to
* Potential access problems due to obstructions surrounding the slide in and out of holes very easily. Drift pins can not hold
tower themselves in place. Parts WILL fall if suspended only by a drift
* The possible need for ladders (either portable or permanent) to pin.
gain access to the
maintenance access doors
* The possible need for safety cages around ladders.
These are only some of the safety issues that may arise in the design
process. SPX Cooling Technologies strongly recommends that you
consult a safety engineer to be sure all safety considerations have been
addressed.
SPX Cooling Technologies offers optional equipment that may assist

you in addressing some of these safety issues. Consult your sales
representative for information on these optional items.
32
MEASUREMENT SYSTEM
The manual uses both, the English System and Metric System of measurement.
All units are in millimeters. Fasteners are denoted in both the English and metric
systems. Fasteners are supplied in conformance with the metric system standard
unless otherwise noted in the tower bills of material.
TOOLS AND SUPPLIES
* Hoist: 2,000 pound capacity for hoisting.
* Small and large drift pins: (alignment tools) these are extremely important to help
PARTS line up all the holes.
All steel parts are tagged for identification, as shown above. * Combination wrenches: mainly 13mm up to 30mm. May be substituted for
impact wrenches.
Find Number: This is a three-digit alpha/numeric number that ties * Socket wrench set: Tower mainly uses 13mm, 19mm & 30mm sockets. have
the bill of material (BOM) to the drawings. They are identified in more than one if possible.
the drawings as the alpha/numeric numbers within the circles. * Impact wrenches (electric or pneumatic) with standard and deep sockets: used
The find numbers on the drawings are used in conjunction with to tighten all hardware.
the appropriate BOM to find the correct item numbers needed for * Pipe wrenches
installation. * Allen wrenches
* Torque wrench: 100 ft lb (136 N-m) capacity.
THE SAME FIND NUMBERS MAY BE USED FOR DIFFERENT * Utility knife, Cutting pliers: used to open boxes and unwrap pallets.
PARTS ON DIFFERENT TOWER CELLS. * Caulking guns: application of sealer to steel and casing.
* Acetone solvent: use with clean cotton rags to wipe down steel before applying
Item Number: This number is used by SPX Cooling Technologies sealant.
to purchase, manufacture and inventory the components of the * Protractor level: For setting fan blade pitch
modules. Give these item numbers to the project manager if an * Dial Indicator kit: Marley item No. 115311. For drive shaft alignment. Needed
item is missing or a replacement item is required. for motor outside airstream option only.
* Scoffolding, portable stairs, ladders or other means of temporary access and
Drawing Number: (Reference Only) This is the number of the support
drawing used to fabricate the item. This number DOES NOT
reference the drawing number where the part is used. Wear protective clothing, gloves, nonslip footwear, hard hat and safety glasses.
Fluid Coolers are constructed of steel and could have burrs that can cause cuts.
Description: (Reference Only) This number describes the The surface of the steel could be slick. Protection from thrown, or falling objects
dimensions of the flat pattern of the item. These dimensions should be used at all times around a construction site.
MAY NOT correspond to the overall dimensions of the part.
PVC FILL STORAGE
The find number, item number, description and quantity of items Stacked and nested fill sheets can be stored uncovered outdoors in winter, spring,
are all cross referenced on the bill of material. If a number is or fall for up to 4 weeks. In hot summer conditions it should not be left out
missing or hard to read, check the illustrations in this assembly uncovered.
manual first and then the bill of material to see if you can find it.
As the tower is prepared for assembly, the quantities of each item
should be checked against the bill of material.
33
A FEW WORDS ABOUT FASTENERS

Stainless Steel Fasteners:
Stainless steel fasteners are prone to galling. This is when you notice a sudden increase in the force needed to turn a nut before parts are
clamped. Apply anti-seize compound to the threads of the bolt before installing the nut. If a nut does not easily spin on a bolt, do not try to force
it. Chances are it will seize. Some extra hardware is included to replace problem hardware.
This manual depicts flanged-head fasteners. On stainless steel towers these connection points will consist of a regular hex-head bolt and two
washers in place of the flange-head bolt.
Tap Screw Repair:

During installation of tap screws in sheet metal parts, tap screws may strip, not allowing the screw to be fully tightened. if this occurs, place a 3/8"
[10mm] nut on the back side of the tap screw and tighten.
Torque requirements:
The idealized standard fastener torque values for galvanized and stainless steel fasteners are shown in the table below. These values may vary
in actual practice. Note that the values shown for stainless steel fasteners are based on the fasteners being lubricated with anti-seize compound.
FASTENER TORQUE
FASTENER TORQUE
BOLT
FOOT-LBS. (NEWTON-METERS)
DIAMETER
GALVANIZED * STAINLESS STEEL
8mm 20 (27.1) 20 (27.1)
10mm 20 (27.1) 20 (27.1)
12mm 45 (61) 27 (37)
16mm 90 (122) 44 (60)
20mm 150 (203) 74 (100)
Z05 Z05 Loctite®

Critical structural and mechanical attachments require extra protection against the
nuts vibrating loose during tower operation. This is accomplished on galvanized
fasteners by applying Loctite, Find# Z05, thread locking compound to the exposed
threads of a bolt after the nut has been installed and tightened. Bolts should be
Typical bolted attachment with threaded installed with the threaded end up or horizontally. Reference details below. On
end of bolt up, or installed horizontally stainless steel fasteners the use of anti-seize compound makes the use of loctite
ineffective. Therefore in these critical areas with stainless steel fasteners,
self-locking nuts have been substituted for the standard nuts and loctite will not be
used.
34
FASTENER SUBSTITUTION
The find numbers in this manual refer to flange head bolts and nuts. If your tower is not supplied with these, or you need replacement hardware
for your tower, the following non-flanged hardware may be substituted.
E F
D
G
A B
C
Flanged Hardware Standard Hardware

FIND NO. DESCRIPTION FIND NO. DESCRIPTION FIND NO. DESCRIPTION FIND NO. DESCRIPTION
C VM1 M8 X 25 BOLT C V28 5/8" X 1 1/2" BOLT
VP0 M8 X 25 FLANGED BOLT D W48 M8 SPRING WASHER VPF M16 X 40 FLANGED BOLT D W04 5/8" LOCK WASHER
E W24 M8 FLAT WASHER E W29 5/8" FLAT WASHER
C VM1 M8 X 40 BOLT C VB1 5/8" X 2 1/2" BOLT
VP1 M8 X 40 FLANGED BOLT D W48 M8 SPRING WASHER VPG M16 X 65 FLANGED BOLT D W04 5/8" LOCK WASHER
E W24 M8 FLAT WASHER E W29 5/8" FLAT WASHER
C VM1 M8 X 70 BOLT C VB2 M16 X 80 BOLT
VP2 M8 X 70 FLANGED BOLT D W48 M8 SPRING WASHER VPH M16 X 80 FLANGED BOLT D W04 M16 SPRING WASHER
E W24 M8 FLAT WASHER E W29 M16 FLAT WASHER
C V07 3/8" X 1" BOLT C VB3 5/8" X 3 1/2" BOLT
VP3 M10 X 25 FLANGED BOLT D W02 3/8" LOCK WASHER VPJ M16 X 90 FLANGED BOLT D W04 5/8" LOCK WASHER
E W22 3/8" FLAT WASHER A E W29 5/8" FLAT WASHER
C V10 3/8" X 1 1/2" BOLT C V32 3/4" X 2" BOLT
VPK M20 X 45 FLANGED BOLT
VP4 M10 X 40 FLANGED BOLT D W02 3/8" LOCK WASHER D W05 3/4" LOCK WASHER
E W22 3/8" FLAT WASHER C VC4 3/4" X 2 1/2" BOLT
C V11 3/8" X 2 1/2" BOLT VPL M20 X 65 FLANGED BOLT D W05 3/4" LOCK WASHER
VP6 M10 X 65 FLANGED BOLT D W02 3/8" LOCK WASHER E W30 3/4" FLAT WASHER
A E W22 3/8" FLAT WASHER C V35 3/4" X 3" BOLT
C V18 1/2" X 1" BOLT VPM M20 X 80 FLANGED BOLT D W05 3/4" LOCK WASHER
E W23 1/2" FLAT WASHER C V39 3/4" X 3 1/2" BOLT
C V18 1/2" X 1 1/2" BOLT VPN M20 X 90 FLANGED BOLT D W05 3/4" LOCK WASHER
E W23 1/2" FLAT WASHER
C V8Q 1/2" X 2 1/2" BOLT F W24 M8 FLAT WASHER
VPA M12 X 55 FLANGED BOLT X60 M8 FLANGED NUT
E W23 1/2" FLAT WASHER G X47 M8 HEX NUT
C V22 1/2" X 2 1/2" BOLT F W22 3/8" FLAT WASHER
X61 M10 FLANGED NUT
VPC M12 X 65 FLANGED BOLT D W03 1/2" LOCK WASHER G X02 3/8" HEX NUT
E W23 1/2" FLAT WASHER B F W23 1/2" FLAT WASHER
X62 M12 FLANGED NUT
C V25 1/2" X 4" BOLT G X03 1/2" HEX NUT
VPD M12 X 100 FLANGED BOLT D W03 1/2" LOCK WASHER F W29 5/8" FLAT WASHER
X63 M16 FLANGED NUT
E W23 1/2" FLAT WASHER G X05 5/8" HEX NUT
C V8Y 1/2" X 4 1/2" BOLT X64 M20 FLANGED NUT F X04 3/4" NUT
VPE M12 X 120 FLANGED BOLT D W03 1/2" LOCK WASHER
E W23 1/2" FLAT WASHER
35
JOINT SEAL INSTRUCTIONS
The following information covering surface preparation applies to all sealed joints whether sealer Z11 or strip sealer Z12 and/or Z13 is being used. The typical joint sealing
details shown on this page are referenced throughout this manual. Years of experience has shown the instructions on surface preparation and sealing details do result in
watertight joints. Inadequate attention to the details will result in joints that leak.
Do not apply either sealer if temperature is below 40 degrees Fahrenheit (5 degrees Celsius).
All flanges are to be straight. Rework kinks or bends that exist. Clean surfaces being sealed solvent. If cloth is used, it must always be clean and dry. Exercise caution in using
solvents, always read labels and instructions. Care should be taken not to wipe dirt or oil onto the cleaned surface from adjacent uncleaned area. Mating surfaces to be sealed
must be kept clean and dry prior to assembly. No water, grease or dirt should contaminate cleaned area. Note that stainless steel requires a larger area to be cleaned
because oil will contaminate surfaces quickly. Oil will migrate through punched holes and around sheared edges.
Application instructions for Tube Sealer Z11 (Type A, B, & C seals):

Tube sealer, Find# Z11, cones in a 1/12 gallon (315ml) cartridge and is applied using a standard caulking gun. Apply sealer to unassembled parts. Care should be taken to
fill voids and gaps at joints. After parts have been assembled, trowel excess sealant over joint, taking care to force sealant back into joint, not out of joint. Do not use solvent
to aid in applying sealer. Solvent adversely affects bonding of sealant to metal. Care should be taken to avoid leaving holes, or bubbles in sealant. Do not subject sealed
joints to waterloading for 48 hours at temperatures of 70 degrees Fahrenheit (21 degrees Celsius) and above. Lower temperatures will require a longer cure time.
Application Instructions for Strip Sealer Z12 & Z13 (Type D, E, F & G seals):
Strip sealer is supplied an 1/2" (13mm) Z13 and 1" (25mm) Z12 widths. It is intended that the 1/2" (13mm) wide sealer be used unless otherwise noted. Apply continuous
pieces of strip sealer to the unassembled parts. Do not splice pieces except when turning a corner. Cut with a sharp knife, do not stretch, or tear. Gaps at joints and corners
can be filled by spanning a piece of strip sealer to gain the proper thickness. Then work it into the joint to fill gaps and greate an even surface. After parts are set together,
use a drift pin, or other pointed object, to puncture sealer at each fastener hole where required.
WATER SIDE FASTENER

OF JOINT HOLE
FASTENER FASTENER
HOLE HOLE
TUBE SEALER Z11 TUBE SEALER Z11 TUBE SEALER Z11
3/8" [10mm] BEAD 3/8" [10mm] BEAD 3/8" [10mm] BEAD
TYPE A TYPE B TYPE C

TYPE 'A' Z11 TYPE 'B' Z11 TYPE 'C' Z11
This is the symbol used This is the symbol used This is the symbol used
throughout the manual to throughout the manual to throughout the manual to
indicate the locations where a indicate the locations where a indicate the locations where
type A seal is required. type B seal is required. a type C seal is required.
36
FASTENER HOLE FASTENER HOLE FASTENER HOLE

FASTENER
WATER SIDE HOLE
OF JOINT OVERLAP HOLE
SLIGHTLY
Z13
Z13
Z13
Z12 or Z13
Z12 Z13
TYPE D Z12
TYPE E TYPE F TYPE G
TYPE 'D' Z13 Z12 (TYPE 'E') Z13 Z12
Z13 Z12 Z13 (TYPE 'F') (TYPE 'G') Z13 Z13
These are the symbols This is the symbol used
used throughout the throughout the manual This is the symbol used This is the symbol used
manual to indicate the to indicate the locations throughout the manual throughout the manual
locations where a type D where a type E seal is to indicate the locations to indicate the locations
seal is required. required. where a type F seal is where a type G seal is
required. required.
GENERAL DECAL INSTRUCTIONS

Decals are an important part of the tower assembly. Decals provide instructions, identifications, cautions and warnings deemed necessary for
proper operation and safety.
Surface Preparation
Surface must be clean and dry. Oil and dirt may be removed with solvent (such as acetone) or commercial detergent. Wash the area with warm water
and dry with a lint-free cloth. Ultimate adhesion will occur 24-28 hours after application should not be undertaken if temperature is below 35 degrees
Fahrenheit, or if humidity is greater than 95%.
General Application Instructions

Peel off backing paper, taking care to avoid dirt contamination of the exposed adhesive. Carefully apply decal to the desired location with light
pressure to avoid distortion of the vinyl. Once in position, smooth out with a towel. If air bubbles occur, puncture with a pin and smooth down with a
towel. The finished decal should be completely flat.
37
Fill Cube Assembly MHF7111 and MHF7113 Shop Assembly - Top Section
FILL CUBE ASSEMBLY
Step One (MHF7111 & MHF7113 top sections)
T07 3/8 X 1 TAP SCREW
Clean parts where sealer will be applied with Star Clean
H01 #100. Apply strip sealer Z13 to casing sheet flange and
attach casing sheets H01 to H02 and H03 to H04 as
shown.
H02
H04
H03
T07 Galvanized
tower
or
VP0 & X60 Stainless
Steel tower
38
FILL CUBE ASSEMBLY
VP0 Step One (MHF7111 & MHF7113 top section)
Apply strip sealer Z12 to fill tube support B07 and attach
X60 to casing as shown. Apply strip sealer Z12 to diverter H13
and attach to casing as shown.
Type D seal
VP0 BOLT, HF 8MM X 25MM
W32 3/8 SEALING WASHER
X60 NUT, HF M8
H13 T07
W32
Type D seal
B07
Z12
Casing Assembly
39
FILL CUBE ASSEMBLY
Step Two (MHF7111 & MHF7113 top sections)
V06 1/4" X 4" BOLT
Insert fill tubes B10 into top tube support and retain with
bolts. Lube tube and install one sheet B11 or B12 and
tube supports B13. Install fill sheets.
V06
H10
H10
Fill Sheets u2
H08
FILL SHEET QTY.

MODEL TOTAL
MHF7111 184
MHF7113 216
Louver face Additional fill sheets
provided are to be
used, if required, to
ensure a tight fill pack.
H11 & H12

Alternating
fill sheets
40
T07 3/8 X 1 TAP SCREW Type D seal V06
V06 1/4 X 4" BOLT
W32 3/8 SEALING WASHER Z12 B07
B07
H08
H11 or H12
W32
T07
Louver face
FILL CUBE ASSEMBLY

Step Three (MHF7111 & MHF7113 top sections) When lower tube is
H10 or H17 not the same material
Install fill tube support B07 onto fill tubes and retain with as upper tube
bolts. Clean parts where sealer will be applied with Star
Clean #100. Apply strip sealer Z12 to fill tube support as
shown. Attach tube support to casing. Insert bottom fill tubes B16 Both ends of tubes
B10 or B17 into fill cube and plug both ends with cap B16.
41
Hot Water Basin Assembly MHF7111 and MHF7113 Shop Assembly - Top Section
HOT WATER BASIN ASSEMBLY FIND NO. DESCRIPTION
Step One (MHF7111 & MHF7113) T07 3/8 X 1 TAP SCREW
Attach C01 and C04 as shown.
C01
C04
T07
42
Step Two (MHF7111 & MHF7113) VM1 BOLT, 8MM X 25MM
Attach fill support C06 and floor stiffeners C07 as shown. X47 NUT, M8
Note: Ensure C06 holes line up with holes in hot water C07
basin floor for U-bolts.
C06
C07
X47
X47
C07
VM1
X47
VM1
43
HOT WATER BASIN ASSEMBLY
Step Three (MHF7111 & MHF7113)
#100. Apply sealer Z11. Attach tie rod clips C16 and C16
handrail post clips E30 to inlet end C03.
Type C seal
V18 BOLT, 12MM X 25MM
W33 SEALING WASHER - 12MM
X03 NUT, M12
E30 Type C seal
V18
V18 Type C seal X03
C16 X03
W33
C03
44
Step Four (MHF7111 & MHF7113) VM1 BOLT, 8MM X 25MM
Clean parts where sealer will be applied with Star Clean V18 BOLT, 12MM X 25MM
#100. Apply strip sealer Z12 and Z13 to floor and attach W33 SEALING WASHER - 12MM
inlet end. W37 SEALING WASHER - 5/16"
X47 NUT, M8
X03 NUT, M12
Type E seal
V18 W33
VM1
W37
X03
X47
45
DISTRIBUTION BASIN ASSEMBLY To avoid damaging sealing
Step Five (MHF7111 & MHF7113) washers use the impact wrench
Clean parts where sealer will be applied with Star Clean on the side opposite the sealing
#100. Apply strip sealer Z12 and Z13 to floor and attach washer wherever possible.
basin end C02 and deflectors C05. Deflectors are not C05 Angled flange faces toward inside of floor
fastened with hardware at this time. Attach basin cover VM1
X47
support C18 to basin end. Note variation between models.
FIND NO. DESCRIPTION W37
VM1 BOLT, 8MM X 25MM Type E seal
W32 SEALING WASHER - 3/8"
X47 NUT, M8
X02 NUT, M10
X03 NUT, M12
X03
Angled flange X47
faces toward
inside of floor
C05
X03
W33
VM1
W37
X47 C02
VM1
W37
46
HOT WATER BASIN ASSEMBLY

Step Six (MHF7111 & MHF7113)
Assemble hot water basin flumes by attaching flume
supports C09 to center flume C10 and end flume sections VM1
C11 as shown.
C11
C10
C09
X47
C11 VM1
C09

VM1 BOLT, 8MM X 25MM
X47
C09 X47 NUT, M8
47
Step Seven (MHF7111 & MHF7113) T07 3/8" X 1 TAP SCREW
Install nozzles in floor. Attach basin flumes C10 & C11 VM1 BOLT, 8MM X 25MM
which were previously assembled. Install support C13 W37 SEALING WASHER - 5/16"
and decals C14 and C15 at locations shown. X47 NUT, M8
Note: If Tower has nozzle cups, place on eliminator side
of hot water basin and work back toward inlet side.
X47 Nozzle
W37
1"
VM1
C14
12" CA
UT
ION
C13
T07
C15
24"
C11
3"
C10
C11
48
Top Deck Assembly MHF7111 and MHF7113 Shop Assembly - Top Section
TOP DECK ASSEMBLY FIND NO. DESCRIPTION
Step One (MHF7111 & MHF7113) VN3 BOLT, 20MM X 45MM
Assemble girt segments E26, E27, and E01 with X04 NUT, M20
splices E31 as shown.
E26
X04
E27
VN3
E31
E31
E01
49
Step Two (MHF7111 & MHF7113) VM1 BOLT, 8MM X 25MM
Clean parts where sealer will be applied with Star Clean #100. V07 BOLT, 10MM X 25MM
Apply strip sealer Z12. Attach girt assemblies to hot water W32 SEALING WASHER - 3/8"
basins as shown. After assembly, seal corners where water W37 SEALING WASHER - 5/16"
deflectors meet with sealer Z12 on both sides of the corner. X47 NUT, M8
If tower is galvanized with stainless steel basins, install basin X02 NUT, M10
liners E11 and E12 as shown.
Not required on
stainless steel towers E12
Girt Assembly
X02
Type D seal
X61
W32
E11 Not required on
V07 X47 stainless steel towers
W37
VM1
Not required on
W32 E11 stainless steel towers
V07
50
TOP DECK ASSEMBLY E17
V07
Step Three (MHF7111)
Install stiffener E14 between E13 and HWB. Install fan deck E17 W02
E13
beam E13 between girts. Attach diagonal channels E17 and E19 V07
between girt and beams. Attach hoisting clips E03 as shown.
FIND NO. DESCRIPTION X02
E03 X02
V07 BOLT, 10MM X 25MM W02
VN3 BOLT, 20MM X 45MM
X02 NUT, M10
E17
E13
E03
E13 E19
E14 E13
X02
E17 E14
W02 E19
E14
W02 X02
X04
E19 X02
W02 E03
VN3 V07 E14

E03
V07
V07 W32
X02
V07
51
TOP DECK ASSEMBLY Step Three (MHF7113) X02
Install fan deck beam E14 between HWB channels C02. Attach diagonal channels E17
E17 & E19 between beams E14 & channel C02 as shown. Attach small diagonals E18 W02
as shown. Attach hoisting clips E03. V07
FIND NO. DESCRIPTION E18
V07 BOLT, 10MM X 25MM E13 W02
VN3 BOLT, 20MM X 45MM X02 V07
W32 SEALING WASHER - 10MM E18 DETAIL C
X02 NUT, M10 X02
X04 NUT, M20 E13
W02
E14
C DETAIL D
E17
E18 W32
E14 V07
E19
E19
E18 X02
B E13
X02 E17
A E14 V07
W02
W02
E18 E19
E18
D
E13
X02 E14
E03
W02
E19
X64
V07
VPK
V07
DETAIL B DETAIL A
52
TOP DECK ASSEMBLY VM1
SS
Step Three (MHF7111 & MHF7113) TWR
or
Clean parts where sealer will be applied with Star Clean #100. Apply strip sealer Z13.
Attach fan deck sheets E09, E15, and E16 as shown. Use fixture to square top section T07
before tightening fan deck fasteners. Cover lubeline access holes with cover plate E10. GALV
Plug holes for walkways in girt top flange. TWR
E16 E E15 E15
X47
DETAIL E
E09 E09
F E16
E15
Apply strip sealer Z13

to mating surfaces
under fan sheet. Do not
remove paper backing.
T07
E10

DETAIL F T07 3/8" TAP SCREW
X47 NUT, M8
53
Step Six (MHF7111 & MHF7113) VM1 BOLT, 8MM X 25MM
Attach lower fan cylinder segments E20 and E21 to fan deck. VM4 BOLT, 8MM X 40MM
Using existing holes in cylinder as template, drill 7/16" diameter W24 8MM FLAT WASHER
holes through cylinder splice and install fasteners as shown. E20 X47 NUT, M8
E21
X47 W24
VM4
X47 VM1
E20 E21
VM4
54
TOP DECK ASSEMBLY Basin Cover Key Plans

Step Seven (MHF7111 & MHF7113)
Install hot water basin covers E22 as shown. See Basin Cover
Key Plans for arrangement.
E22 E22
Apply a small amount of

sealer to threads of bolt
after installing wing nut.
X40
Y62
W48
W24
X47
W48
VM4

VM4 BOLT, HF 8MM X 40MM
W24 FLAT WASHER - 8MM
W48 LOCK WASHER - 8MM
X40 WING NUT - M8
X47 NUT, M8
Y62 SPACER, SHEPHERD
Stainless steel fasteners used on all towers
55
TOP DECK ASSEMBLY
(MHF7111 & MHF7113)
If the tower has a fan deck walkway, the supporting brackets and
hardware should be installed now. Bracket quantity and type will Fandeck
vary based on tower model. For more information, refer to
Maintenance Option Manual. X02
Install L05 to girt as shown.

Install L04 to girt as shown.
L05
X02 NUT, M10
X03 NUT, M12
V07
Girt
V18
X03
L04
56
Skid Assembly MHF7111 and MHF7113 Shop Assembly - Top Section
SKID ASSEMBLY FIND NO. DESCRIPTION
Fork Beam Assembly (MHF7113 only) VM1 BOLT, 8MM X 25MM
Attach Fork Beam Stiffeners G04 to Fork Beams G02. X47 NUT, M8
G04
G04
X47
G02
VM1
G04
DETAIL A
57
SKID ASSEMBLY FIND NO. DESCRIPTION
Step One (MHF7111 & MHF7113) T07 3/8" X 1" TAP SCREW
Assemble skid segments G01 and G17 with splices G16. Attach V07 BOLT, 10MM X 25MM
forklift beams G02 and eliminator face beams G07 to skids as V18 BOLT, 12MM X 25MM
shown. Note that the end of the forklift beam with more holes VN3 BOLT, 20MM X 25MM
should be on motor side of tower and that the orientation of the
X02 NUT, M10
slope on the eliminator beam is towards the fill. Connect braces
X03 NUT, M12
G11 to louver face beams G07 and attach both to skids.
G01 X04 NUT, M20
G11
V07
X03 X02
G07
G16
V07
G11 G07
G17
G16
V18 G17 G02
G02
G11
G16
G07
X02
G07
X04 G11
T07 G16
V07
Run tap
screw in
halfway G01
VN3
58
TOP FRAME ASSEMBLY FIND NO. DESCRIPTION
Step Two (MHF7111 & MHF7113) T07 3/8 X 1 TAP SCREW
Attach water diverters G08 and G09 to louver face beams VM1 BOLT, 8MM X 25MM
as shown. Attach skid stiffeners G20 as shown. V07 BOLT, 10MM X 25MM
G20 W32 3/8" SEALING WASHER
W37 5/16" SEALING WASHER
X47 NUT, M8
X02 NUT, M10
G20
G20
X47
W37 G09
VM1 G08
Type B seal
G09
W37
G20
X02
T07 VM1
W32 X47
W32
V07
59
TOP FRAME ASSEMBLY
Clean parts where sealer will be applied with Star Clean #100. VM1
Apply sealer Z11 as shown. Connect fill supports G05 to G10
eliminator and louver beams. Apply decals G19 to wind guards
G14 and G15 and attach to bottom of eliminator and louver G14
X47
face beams and skid sides. Attach diverters to skids. W37
G10
G05
Type B seal
G15
G05
X02
G05 G15
V07
W37 VM1
G14
G19
T07 V07 BOLT, 10MM X 25MM
X47 W37 5/16" SEALING WASHER
X47 NUT, M8
X02 NUT, M10
60
TOP FRAME ASSEMBLY FIND NO. DESCRIPTION
Step Four (MHF7111 & MHF7113) T07 3/8 X 1 TAP SCREW
Attach tierod clip G21 to louver face beam. Plug ladder bracket VN3 BOLT, 20MM X 25MM
holes in skids. For MHF7111 attach intermediate basin cover
F09 with forklift beams G02 and louber face beams G07 as
shown. X04 NUT, M20
T07
G21
W32
VN3
T07
F09 W32
F09 X04 T07

F09
G21
F09
F09 MHF7111 (TYP)
F09
G21
61
Mechanical Equipment MHF7111 and MHF7113 Shop Assembly - Top Section
MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
On towers with the motor in the standard location, review
tower model and motor frame on the tower being
assembled and refer to the table on this page for PAGE NUMBERS
TOWER MODEL MOTOR FRAME
corresponding page numbers to use in this manual. STANDARD MOTOR LOCATION
284T, 286T 8-2, 8-20, 8-22
324T, 326T 8-3, 8-20, 8-22
MHF7111 & 7113 WITH
364T 8-4, 8-20, 8-22
SERIES 22XX
365T 8-5, 8-20, 8-22
GEAREDUCER
404T, 405T 8-6, 8-20, 8-22
444T, 445T 8-7, 8-20, 8-22
365T,225M 8-13, 8-20, 8-22
404T,250M 8-14, 8-20, 8-22
MHF7111 & 7113 WITH 405T 8-15, 8-20, 8-22
SERIES 2800 444T 8-16, 8-20, 8-22
GEAREDUCER 445T 8-17, 8-20, 8-22
447T 8-18, 8-20, 8-22
280S-M 8-19, 8-20, 8-22
Note that the standard motor
location is on the side
opposite of the 6" (152mm)
diamter hole in the collection
basin floor.
INTERIOR MECHANICAL SUPPORT

If the motor is to be installed in the standard location,
attach Geareducer support(s) M32 and motor supports
M25 and/or M26 to rails M63 and M64 as shown. Attach
supports to the rails using the top row of bolts in the rails
only. Fasteners for the bottom row will be installed later in
this section. If your tower has been equipped with the
Motor Outside Airstream (MOA) option, omit the installation
of the motor supports.
62
MHF7111-7113 - 284T & 286T Motor Frame VP8 BOLT HF - M12 X 40
Series 2200 - 2400 Geareducer X62 NUT HF - M12
VP8
M32
M64 X62
M25
X62
VP8
M63
63
VP8
M32
M64 X62
M25
X62
VP8
M63
64
MHF7111-71134 - 364T Motor Frame VP8 BOLT HF - M12 X 40
VP8
M32
M64 X62
M25
X62
VP8
M63
65
MHF7111-7113 - 365T Motor Frame VP8 BOLT HF - M12 X 40
VP8
M32
M64 X62
M25
X62
VP8
M63
66
VP8
M32
M64
X62
M25
X62 VP8
M63
67
VP8
M32
M64
X62
M25 VP8
X62
M63
68
MHF7111-7113 - 365T Motor Frame
- 225M IEC Motor Frame FIND NO. DESCRIPTION
Series 2800 Geareducer V8K BOLT - M12 X 40
W03 LOCK WASHER M12
W23 FLAT WASHER M12
X03 NUT - M12
V8K
W23
M32
M64 GALV.TWR W03
X03 M25
W23
X03
V8K
GALV.TWR W03
M63
69
- 250M IEC Motor Frame FIND NO. DESCRIPTION
W03 LOCK WASHER M12
W23 FLAT WASHER M12
X03 NUT - M12
V8K
W23
M32
M64 GALV.TWR W03
X03 M25
X03 W23
V8K
GALV.TWR W03
M63
70
MHF7111-7113- 405T Motor Frame
Series 2800 Geareducer FIND NO. DESCRIPTION
V8K BOLT - M12 X 40
W03 LOCK WASHER M12
W23 FLAT WASHER M12
X03 NUT - M12
V8K
W23
M32
M64 GALV.TWR W03
X03 M25
X03 W23
V8K
GALV.TWR W03
M63
71

Series 2800 Geareducer
V8K BOLT - M12 X 40
W03 LOCK WASHER M12
W23 FLAT WASHER M12
X03 NUT - M12
V8K
W23
M32
M64
GALV.TWR W03
X03
M25
W23
X03 V8K
GALV.TWR W03
M63
72

V8K BOLT - M12 X 40
W03 LOCK WASHER M12
W23 FLAT WASHER M12
X03 NUT - M12
V8K
W23
M32
M64
GALV.TWR W03
X03
W23
M25
X03 V8K
GALV.TWR W03
M63
73

V8K BOLT - M12 X 40
W03 LOCK WASHER M12
W23 FLAT WASHER M12
X03 NUT - M12
V8K
W23
M32
M64
GALV.TWR W03
X03 W23
M25
V8K
X03
GALV.TWR W03 M63
74
MHF7111-7113 - 280S-M IEC Motor Frame FIND NO. DESCRIPTION

W03 LOCK WASHER M12
W23 FLAT WASHER M12
X03 NUT - M12
V8K
W23
M32
M64
GALV.TWR W03
X03
M25 W23
X03
V8K
GALV.TWR W03
M63
75
MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT ASSEMBLY
Step Two (Series 2250 & 2800 Geareducers)
Attach Geareducer M20 to supports as shown, using
shims Y56 as required.
M20
Geareducers Attachment Hardware
Find Numbers
Series Geareducers
A B C D
D
2250 VB1 W29 W04 X05
2800 VC4 W30 W05 X04
C D
VB1 BOLT - M16 X 65 B C
VC4 BOLT - M20 X 65
W04 LOCK WASHER M16 B
W05 LOCK WASHER M20
W29 FLAT WASHER M16 Y56 As required
W30 FLAT WASHER M20
X04 NUT - M20
X05 NUT - M16
B
A
A
76
MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT ASSEMBLY
Caution: Excessive force when
Step Three (MHF7111 & MHF7113) installing the drive coupling could
Install motort to the mechanical support as shown. The damage the Geareducer seal. See
shafts of the motor and geareducer shoudl be approx. M28 service manual for installation
1/2" to 1" apart. Install drive coupling M28 using shims instructions. Clean motor and geareducer
Y56, as required, to align drive coupling. Refer to Close shafts and apply anti-seize
Coupling Service Manual for installation instructions. compound. After coupling is
installed, clean exposed shafts
and coat with rust-inhibiting paint.
Do not apply anti-seize compound to
stainless steel motor hold down bolts.
Loctite will be applied to these MTR
attachments later.
Y56
As required
MOTOR ATTACHMENT HARDWARE

FIND NO. FIND NO.
MOTOR FRAME PARTS LIST DESCRIPTION PARTS LIST DESCRIPTION
A B
V10 BOLT, M10X 40MM X02 * NUT, M10
182T THRU 215T VP4 W02 ** LOCK WASHER, M10 X61 W22 FLAT WASHER, M10
W22 FLAT WASHER, M10 - -
VMP BOLT, M12 X 55MM X03 * NUT, M12
254T THRU 286T VPA W03 ** LOCK WASHER, M12 X62 W23 FLAT WASHER, M12
BOLT, M16 X 65MM NUT, M16
VB1 X05 * A
324T THRU 365T VPG W04 ** LOCK WASHER, M16 X63 W29 FLAT WASHER, M16
404T THRU 449T VPN V39 BOLT, M20 X 90MM X64 X04 * NUT, M20
* Use Nyloc Nut for SS fastener
** Lock Washer only required for GALV fastener
77
Structure Assembly MHF7111 and MHF7113 Shop Assembly - Top Section
STRUCTURE ASSEMBLY
Step One (MHF7111 & MHF7113)
Lower assembled fill cubes into collection basin, making
sure fill tubes are set in notches of fill support angles. Fill cube assembly
Attach casing sheets to collection basin as shown.
T07 3/8" X 1" TAP SCREW
Fill support angle
Skid assembly
Tube must set in

notch of fill
support angles.
78
STRUCTURE ASSEMBLY
Step Two (MHF7111 & MHF7113)
#100. Apply sealer Z11 and attach columns J01 as
shown.
VN3 BOLT - M20 X 45
X04 NUT - M20
J01
X04
Type C Seal
VN3
79
STRUCTURE ASSEMBLY FIND NO. DESCRIPTION
Step Three (MHF7111 & MHF7113) V18 BOLT, 12MM X 25MM
Attach mechanical equpiment beams J36 to columns as X03 NUT, M12
shown.
NOTE: Attach the mechanical

equipment beam flush to the inside
face of the column toward centerline
first. This ensures that no gap exists
between the column and beams at
this location and will prevent
misalignment of the mechanical
equpiment.
V18
X03
V18
J36
X03
80
STRUCTURE ASSEMBLY
Step Four (MHF7111 & MHF7113)
Attach bracing channels J05 to the mechanical
equipment beams and to the bottom of the columns as
shown.
X62
VP7
J05
J05
X62
VP7
X03 NUT, M12
81
STRUCTURE ASSEMBLY FIND NO. DESCRIPTION
Step Five (MHF7111 & MHF7113) VM1 BOLT, 8MM X 25MM
Clean parts where sealer will be applied with Star Clean VN3 BOLT, 20MM X 25MM
#100. Apply strip sealer Z12 and lower top section onto X47 NUT, M8
shell. Connect to columns and attach to casing retainer X04 NUT, M20
angles as shown.
Top Section Assembly
VN3
X04
Apply strip sealer by

placingedge of sealer
against inside edge of holes.
Galvanized Fold the sealeraround the corner
T07 tower
onto the vertical face of the casing sheet.
or
Stainless
VM1 & X47
Steel tower
82
Fill Tube Support FIND NO. DESCRIPTION
Install U-bolt support N98 and plate N25 on top fill support tubes as shown. W21 1/4" FLAT WASHER
X11 1/4" SELF-LOCKING NUT
B Top of tightened U-bolt

A B
X11 8 1/16" (205mm) 1 7/8" (48mm)
W21
N25
A
N98
83
Mechanical Equipment Installation
In order to have proper vibration performance, it is
important that the top section, columns, k-braces, and
beams must be installed and tightened prior to the
mechanical equipment assembly installation inside the
tower.
Attach mechanical equipment assembly to the
mechanical equipment beams as shown. Install fasteners
thru each Geareducer and motor support into the beams
at this time. If motor is to be field installed in the standard
location, apply decal M39 to the mechanical equipment
beams centered between the motor and geareducer.
V18
X62
V8K
Install when the motor

is field installed in the
M39 standard location
X03

V8K BOLT, 12MM X 40MM
X03 NUT, M12
84
Mechanical Equipment Installation - MOA Option FIND NO. DESCRIPTION
On towers with MOA option install support gussets M37 V8K BOLT - M12 X 40
and, if required, spacers M42 between the columns and X03 NUT - M12
mechanical equipment beam on the motor side of the tower
as shown.
Column
V8K X03
V8K
X03 MHF7111 AND MHF7113 Mechanical Equipment Beam

M37
85
Recirculation Piping W03 X03 Q75
Attach recirculation piping supports Q73,
Q80 and Q81 as shown. Next install
piping assembly as shown and fasten with
u-bolts (Q69). C
V18 Q81 W22 Q69

X12
QC8 DETAIL B
DETAIL C
3068mm.
B
388mm.
QC7 QB3
QB3 QC6
MHF7113 1260mm.
MHF7111 918mm
Q69
Q80 D
W22
V18
W03
X12
X03
Q73 Q80
Q69
V18 X12
X03 W22
W03
A Q73
DETAIL A DETAIL D
86
Casing Assembly MHF7111 and MHF7113 Shop Assembly - Top Section
CASING ASSEMBLY FIND NO. DESCRIPTION
Step One (MHF7111 & MHF7113) T07 3/8" X 1" TAP SCREW
Clean parts where sealer will be applied with Star Clean VM1 BOLT, 8MM X 25MM
#100. Apply strip sealer Z13 to columns and attach casing X47 NUT, M8
sheets J07, J08 and J09 (or J10, J11 & J50 for MOA) as
shown. Connect to top deck, collection basin and Type G Seal
columns. After casing is in place, apply a bead of sealer
Z11 on inside of tower to all seams where casing meets Apply strip sealer Z13 to columns
before installing casing. After
casing or top deck. installing casing run a bead of Z13
J09 or J50 Motor side with sealer Z11 at all casing seams.
MOA option
Motor side with
J07 or J10
MOA option
Where fill falls

behind joint only
J08 or J11 Motor side with

MOA option
T07 Galvanized
tower
or
Stainless
VM1 & X47
Steel tower
sed_z0901712 section-8_000_05 CONFIDENTIAL: THE CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND CONSTITUTE THE EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF SPX COOLING TECH, LLC. THIS DOCUMENT AND ITS
CONTENTS MAY NOT BE MADE PUBLIC IN ANY MANNER, DISTRIBUTED OR LOANED TO OTHERS, OR REPRODUCED OR COPIED EITHER IN WHOLE OR PART WITHOUT THE PRIOR
Page 1 of 6 WRITTEN CONSENT OF SPX COOLING TECH, LLC. © 2023 SPX COOLING TECH, LLC. UNPUBLISHED-ALL RIGHTS RESERVED UNDER COPYRIGHT LAWS.
87
CASING ASSEMBLY
Attach louver columns D24 and D25 to collection basin,
girt, and casing as shown.
X03
J25
V18
T07 Galvanized
tower
or
Stainless
VM1 & X47
Steel tower
X03
W33

J24 VM1 BOLT, 8MM X 25MM
X47 NUT, M8
V18 X03 NUT, M12
88
CASING ASSEMBLY
#100. Apply sealer Z11 and attach tierod D27 (bottom
X04 D27 or J27
module) or J27 (top module) to collection basin/skid and
top tierod clip as shown. Secure tierods where they cross
with cable tie Y80.
VN3 BOLT, 20MM X 45MM VN3
X04 NUT, M20
X04
W35
VN3
Y80
Type C seal
89
CASING ASSEMBLY
Step Four (MHF7111 & MHF7113)
Tie fan guard(s) D34 or N34 and/or D96 or N32 to louver
face tierods with wire as shown.
D34 and/or D96

Wire to tierods a minimum
of 4 places.
90
CASING ASSEMBLY
Step Six
Because the logo decal MLY is a vinyl-cut design it is applied differently from the other decals. A vinyl-cut decal has a
liner. Use small pieces of masking tape to position decal as shown. Next, apply a horizontal masking tape hinge at the
top of the decal. Remove liner (between decal and tower) in a continuous motion at 180° angle and allow decal to
drape.
Using firm initial squeegee pressure, begin at top center and work down and outward to edge of mask. Remove tape at
180°(pull back on itself). Resqueegee entire decal.
21 3/4"
[552mm]
MLY
Center on
casing panel
FOR SPX - MARLEY TOWERS
91
CASING ASSEMBLY
Step Six
Because the logo decal D29 is a vinyl-cut design it is applied differently from the other decals. A vinyl-cut decal has a
liner and premask. Use small pieces of masking tape to position decal as shown. Next, apply a horizontal masking tape
hinge at the top of the decal. Remove liner (between decal and tower) in a continuous motion at 180°angle and allow
decal to drape.
Using firm initial squeegee pressure, begin at top center and work down and outward to edge of mask. Remove tape
and premask (top) at 180°(pull back on itself). Resqueegee entire decal.
37 1/2"
[952mm]
TRANE
D29
Center on
casing panel
FOR BRANDED TOWERS
92
Fan Installation MHF7111 and MHF7113 Shop Assembly - Top Section
Any single blade must be same distance from All blades when rotated past the same
fan deck to fan blade around perimeter of location on the cylinder must be same
cylinder within a range of one inch (25mm) distance from fan deck within ±A" Tower Model A
MHF7111 5/8" (16mm)
MHF7113 11/16" (17mm)
Fan blade Fan blade
Fan cylinder Fan cylinder
Fan Tilt Check

Adjust by shimming Tip Track Check
Geareducer while If not within tolerance,
maintaining alignment recheck blade, blade To attach Fan to Geareducer, Clean geareducer shaft and apply
with motor. attachment and fan use cap screw and lock washer anti-seize compound. After fan is
pitch. provided with Geareducer. installed, clean exposed shaft and
coat with rust inhibiting paint.
M21 Fan
Inside of A u1/8" (u3mm)
cylinder
Bevel protractor
Fan blade
pitch angle Fan rotation
u1/4v
Fan Blade Pitch Detail
FAN INSTALLATION (Cofimco Fans)
Step One (MHF7111 & MHF7113)
Set fan M21 in place and use hardware provided with Geareducer to attach. On models with
Blade Tip Clearance Check Cofimco fans, set fan blad pitch to contract requirements by positioning bevel protractor 1/4" away
Adjust by repositioning Geareducer
within cylinder or by adjusting fan from tip of blade, resting on the trailing edge and the highest point of the cambered surface. Adjust
cylinder. fan blade tip clearance, tip track and fan tilt as shown.
93
FAN INSTALLATION
After all drive coupling and fan adjustments have been made, tighten all
motor and Geareducer bolts to specified torque and apply thread locking
compund to threads. On models with series 2200, 2400, or 3000
Geareducers, using pilot holes in Geareducer feet, drill two 23/64" (9mm)
diameter holes through support and install drive pins Y55. On models with
series 2200, or 2400 Geareducers, using pilot holes in the mechanical
support rail, drill 3/8" (10mm) diameter holes through the beam and drive V07
four 10mm bolts VP3 through the rail and into the support. After rechecking alignment,
drill thru beam and drive bolt
thru the rail and beam.
FASTENER TORQUE @ (Typ. 4 places).
MOTOR AND GEAREDUCER HOLD-
DOWN FASTENERS ONLY
FASTENER TORQUE
BOLT FOOT-LBS. (NEWTON-METERS)
DIAMETER GALVANIZED STAINLESS STEEL
(UNLUBRICATED) (UNLUBRICATED)
10MM 30-32 (42-43) 34-36 (46-48)
12MM 64-66 (87-90) 85-90 (115-122)
5/8" 135-140 (183-190) 125-130 (169-176)
3/4" 220-230 (298-312) 195-205 (264-278)
Y55
After rechecking alignment,
drill thru support and drive
pin to project an equal
distance above
Geareducer foot and below
support.

Y55 3/8" X 1 1/2" SPIROL PIN
94
FAN INSTALLATION FIND NO. DESCRIPTION
Y51 3/16" POP RIVET
After making fan adjustments, secure fan cylinder in position by drilling (2)
3/16" diameter holes approximately 22 1/2 degrees off tower centerline in
each quadrant, and install pop rivet Y51 in each hole.
2
(TY 2 1/
P. 2 °
)
CT 22 1
/
OW (TYP 2 °
ER .)
Y51
Drill 3/16" diameter hole
thru fan deck in fan cylinder
and install fastener.
95
Optional Equipment MHF7111 and MHF7113 Shop Assembly - Top Section
Mechanical Equipment Platform
Step 1 (MHF7111 & MHF7113 Top Module) W03 Washer, Lock M12
The Mechanical Equipment Platform has V18 X03 NUT, M12
sections in both the top and bottom modules.
Install MEPF support columns L07 and MEPF W03
support beam L08,L75. Attach the MEPF
suppot stifferner L11,L19,L20. X03
W03
V18
L20
X03
L19
L07
L11
L19
L07
L08
X03
W03
L75 L20
L75
L75
L07
L19
L07
V18
96

Step 2 (MHF7111 & MHF7113 Top Module)
Install guardrail post clips E29,E30 as shown. X03
FIND NO. DESCRIPTION W03
E29
W03 Washer, Lock M12
E30
X03 NUT, M12
E30 V18
W03
X03
V18
E30
E30
X03
W03
E30
V18
E30
E30 E30
97
Step 3 (MHF7111 & MHF7113 Top Module)(2200 &2400 GRDR)
Install grating L17, L27, and L57 and fasten down with clips Y20. L17 T06
Y20

T06 1/4" x 3/4" TAP SCREW
L17
L27
L57
L17
Grating arrangement for 3000GRDR

PLAN VIEW
98
Mechanical Equipment Platform V25

W03
Step 4 (MHF7111 & MHF7113 Top Module)
Install Handrails L15,L92,K63,K64 as shown. Install handrail post X03
plugs L28 into end of posts.
W03 Washer Lock M12
L28
X03 NUT, M12
K64
X03 V22
W03
V25 K63
L15
X03
W03
L92
V22
W03
X03
99
Step 5 (MHF7111 & MHF7113 Top Module with Series 2200 or 2400
X02
Geareducer)
W02
Complete installation in the top module by attaching ladder bracket L50 to the
mechanical equipment beam, and lower ladder bracket L18 to the skid beam as
shown. Finally, attach ladder L52 to the brackets as shown.Install L47 to the
plenum walkway. then install ladder L49.
FIND NO. DESCRIPTION V07
V07 BOLT, 10MM X 25MM L50
W02 Washer Lock M10 V10
X02 NUT, M10
W02 L50
X02
L52
V07
X02 L50
W02
L52
L49
W02 V10
X02 W22 L18
X02
V10
T07
L47
PLENUM WALKWAY
100
LUBELINE
Begin installation of lubeline by installing standpipe M01 thru cutout in
fan deck. Using pipe joint compound Z04 on all pipe connections,
T07
connect tee M04, ball valve M14, drain plug M10. At the Geareducer, M12
remove drain plug and install bushing M03, close nipple M07. Connect
hose M08 between Geareducer and standpipe with close nipple M07,
M01
bushing M03 and ball valve M14 . Secure hose to beam with clamps
M11. The hose must be level, or pitched toward the drain. The drain M16
must be the lowest point of the lubeline. There must not be any low
points in the hose. After completion of line, coat all exposed threads
with rust inhibiting paint.
Fill Geareducer with oil Y57 and allow time for it to stabilize in standpipe.
Adjust dipstick M12 full mark to the same level as the oil in the
standpipe.

T07 3/8" X 1" TAP SCREW X60
VP0 BOLT, HF 8MM X 25MM
X60 NUT, HF M8 VP0
M03
M07
M04
M14
X60
M11 M10
M07 M03
M14
M08
VP0
101
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
Internal Vibration Switch
Install switches inside the tower on the
mechanical equipment beam as shown, or
outside on the fan deck, refer to field install
drawing.
Install switch M99,M98 to the mechanical
equipment beam near the Geareducer as
shown. ME BEAM
W48 X47 GALV.TWR
VM1 BOLT M8 X 25MM
V02 BOLT M6 X 25MM X19 SS. TWR
W21 WASHER SC M6
W48 WASHER Lock M8
W01 WASHER Lock M6
X19 NUT S300 SELF-LOCKING M8
X47 NUT, M8
X01 NUT, M6 M98
M99
X11 SS. TWR
X01 W01 GALV. TWR
VM1
W21
V02
102
103
7401 WEST 129 STREET | OVERLAND PARK, KANSAS 66213 UNITED STATES | 913 664 7400 | spxcooling@spx.com | spxcooling.com
In the interest of technological progress, all products are subject to design and/or material change without notice.
©2015 SPX Cooling Technologies, Inc. | Printed in USA
104
105
2 1/2"[63MM] A COLLECTION BASIN
106
CONCRETE 1 1/4"[31MM] STUD
SUPPORT STUD
8 7/8"[225MM] (BY OTHERS)
6 1/8"[155MM]
2 3/4" [70MM]
1 1/2"[38MM]
CL BOLT CL BOLT
STUD
CONCRETE SUPPORT
1/8"[3MM] (BY OTHERS)
(BY OTHERS)
A
SUPPORT DETAIL SECTION A-A
(PARTIAL FACE B OR D ELEVATION) (CONCRETE SUPPORT)
COLLECTION BASIN
6 1/4"[159MM]
3 1/2"[89MM]
CL BOLT CL BOLT 1. TOLERANCE APPLICABLE TO DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE
DEPENDENT UPON FABRICATION, ASSEMBLY AND
CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES. FABRICATION TOLERANCE IS
±1/16" [2] & ASSEMBLY TOLERANCE IS ±1/8" [3]. CONSULT
STEEL SUPPORT
SUPPLIERS OF SUPPORTING STRUCTURE FOR CONSTRUCTION
(BY OTHERS) TOLERANCE. ALL OF THE DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE IN INCHES
UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
2. ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN INSIDE OF BRACKETS[ ] ARE IN
MILLIMETERS UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
SECTION A-A
(STEEL SUPPORT)
107
FIELD SPX Cooling Technologies Requested By BC_BATCH_NA
Literature Package Field BOM 01/18/2024 05:18:08
Page 1
Order No. 10243694 Matl No. HF10243694A1LOW Description MHF7111SATBNC4SGK A1 LOW

Serial Number HF10243694A1LOW
Sub-Matl No.
Description MHF7111SATBNC4SGK A1 LOW Lit Pac Indicator F
Find # Item Number Qty Per Total Qty UM Description Drawing / Rev
F F 2803002 1 1 EA CONTROL COOLBOOST OPTI FC DIM A

F F 2773993 4 4 EA CONTROL PANEL COOLBOOST OPTI FC E1
F F 2773498 4 4 EA CONTROL COOLBOOST OPTI FC MCB
F F 2720024 4 4 EA VFD 30 HP 3/50/60 480 NEMA 3R
F E 2296189 1 1 EA FLOAT VALVE HOLE PLUG (1 FACE) M SEE TWR
MANUAL
F F 2318069 2 2 EA KIT FSTN COIL MHF71XX SS 1 COIL FSTN KIT
F E 2362168 1 1 EA CW BASIN-BOLT-COMMON PARTS-KD MHF7111-S SEE TWR
S304 MANUAL
F E 2362214 1 1 EA CW BASIN-BOLT-SIDE-KD MHF7111-SCB S30 SEE TWR
MANUAL
F E 2362230 1 1 EA CW BASIN-BOLT-SIDE-D&OF-KD MHF7111-SCB S30 SEE TWR
MANUAL
F E 2362295 1 1 EA CW BASIN-BOLT-DEP FLR -KD MHF7111-SCB S30 SEE TWR
MANUAL
F E 2362391 1 1 EA CASING CMPTS BOT MHF7111 S300-KD SEE TWR
MANUAL
F E 2362537 2 2 EA COIL HEADER 88C12R HIGH FLOW MHF7111 SEE TWR
S300-KD MANUAL
F E 2362694 2 2 EA RECIRC PIPING TOP FIELD MHF7111 S S300 SEE TWR
MANUAL
F F 2362702 2 2 EA KIT FSTN RECIRC PIPING TOP FIELD MHF7111 S FSTN KIT
S300,
F E 2368612 1 1 EA LOUVER COLUMN&END BRACE-ATT-KD MHF7111 SEE TWR
BTM S30 MANUAL
F E 2368637 1 1 EA PUMP BOX 60Hz MHF7111-13 SBC SEE TWR
MANUAL
F E 2368743 1 1 EA BLOWDOWN W/CASE FACE OVERFLOW SEE TWR
MHF7111-13 S300 MANUAL
F F 2368839 1 1 EA KIT FSTN FLD INSTALL MHF7111 S300,30 FSTN KIT
F E 2368855 1 1 EA LAKOS SWEEPER SYSTEM - KD MHF7111 S304 INZ0897996 A
F E 2368931 1 1 EA LOUVER FACE PLATFORM MHF7111 MULTI C SEE TWR
MANUAL
MANUAL
F E 2368965 1 1 EA ACCESS DOOR PLATFORM -PAC MHF7111-13 Z0915977
GALV
F E 2368975 1 1 EA PLENUM WALKWAY - KD MHF7111 S300 SEE TWR
MANUAL
F E 2369063 1 1 EA SENSOR CLIP MHF7111-13 S300 SEE TWR
MANUAL
F F 2369168 1 1 EA KIT FSTN LDR&GR CASE FC W/LDR W/O FDEXT FSTN KIT
MHF7111-13
108
Page 2
Continue from page 1 ...
F E 2369185 1 1 EA LDR&GR LVR FACE W/O LDR MHF7111 Z0921093

F F 2369191 2 2 EA KIT FSTN LDR&GR LVR FACE W/O LDR FSTN KIT
MHF7111-13
F E 2369699 1 1 EA CWB COIL SUPPORTS STD COIL MHF7111SCB SEE TWR
S304 MANUAL
F F 2372613 1 1 EA KIT FSTN FAN GUARD MHF7111-13 S300 FSTN KIT
F E 2393788 1 1 EA SAFETY CAGE W/NO EXT&ADPF MHF7111-13 Z0955215
F E 2409191 1 1 EA DECAL FACTORY MUTUAL CERTIFICATION SEE TWR
MANUAL
F E 2409194 1 1 EA NAMEPLATE FLUID COOLER-SPX \ MARLEY SEE TWR
MANUAL
F E 2409196 1 1 EA DECAL LOGO-SPX \ MARLEY-LARGE SEE TWR
MANUAL
F E 2409232 1 1 EA DECAL CTI CERTIFICATION MHF SERIES SEE TWR
MANUAL
F E 2588620 1 1 EA CONTROL ENH Ultra SENSOR K/D PROBE Z1062939
ASSYMHF71
F F 2600177 1 1 EA CONTROL IB1 INTERFACE BOX 120/1/50/60 VER
1.0 NEMA 4X
F E 2601457 1 1 EA GUARDRAIL CASE FC AorC W/ LDR NO FDEXT Z1069733 A
MHF7111 (WELD F
F F 2602769 1 1 EA KIT FSTN SAFETY CAGE W/O ADPF&MOAPF FSTN KIT
MHF7111-13(WELD
F E 2627928 1 1 EA DECAL GEAR DRIVE MHF7111-7113-LOW SEE TWR
MANUAL
F E 2678217 1 1 EA STRUCTURE BTM MOD - KD-REVA MHF7111 S SEE TWR
S300 MANUAL
F E 2727372 1 1 EA CASING CMPTS BOT COPPER COIL 12 ROW SEE
MHF7111 S300-KD TOWER
MANUAL
F E 2746701 2 2 EA COIL INLET/OUTLET RUBBER BOOT SEAL S300 SEE
MHF71XX (2)-6DI TOWER
MANUAL
F E 2749286 1 1 EA INTERM BASIN S TWR T - KD MHF7111S S300 SEE TWR
MANUAL
F E 2749340 2 2 EA FILL 7111 - ADDITIONAL FILL HT 12 MIL PVC - SEE TWR
KD MANUAL
F E 2749380 1 1 EA RECIRC PIPING BTM TWR T & K-KD MHF7111-13 SEE TWR
S S3 MANUAL
F E 2749392 1 1 EA MECH EQUIP PLTFRM BOT TWR T & K Z1010136
MHF7111-13 S300
F E 2749405 1 1 EA GUARDRAIL LDR ALUM-CASE FACE MHF7111-13 Z1069733 A
TWR
F E 2749423 2 2 EA LFPF LADDER ALUM - LVR FACE MHF7111-13 50212853 A
TWR
F E 2772756 1 1 EA MODULAR CONN BTM MHF7111-13 Ext Fill S300 50237273 A
FACE A -
109
Page 3
Order No. 10243694 Matl No. HF10243694A1LOW Description MHF7111SATBNC4SGK A1 LOW Sequence 9800
Sub-Matl No.
Description Lit Pac Indicator F
F F 2802714 1 1 EA BD CONTROLLER W/ COND, NANO-C-E W/ TE-4A

USED W/ MOTORIZ
F E 2819093 1 1 EA WATER MAKEUP 01DIA - NPT MHF7111-13 S300 SEE TWR
MANUAL
Z1052195
F F 122986X 1 1 EA KIT CUSTOMER LITERATURE PACKAGE
F E C01515 2 2 EA OBSTRUCTION EXISTS ON WW DE 97-156
F DMS DOCUMENT 1 1 PC HOISTING DETAILS MHF7111-13 Z1052181 A
F DMS DOCUMENT 1 1 PC MHF 7111-7113 GRILLAGE DETAIL FAP Z1057702
F DMS DOCUMENT 1 1 PC RECIRCULATING WATER PIPING PLAN DETAILS Z0871674 B
F DMS DOCUMENT 1 1 PC LADDER EXTENSION AND SAFETY CAGE MHF7111 Z0871658 A
F DMS DOCUMENT 1 1 PC CONTROL COOLBOOST OPTI FC 50225530 B
F DMS DOCUMENT 1 1 PC 7111-13 COPPER COIL I/O DETAILS 50196546 A
F DMS DOCUMENT 1 1 PC ULTRASONIC WATER LEVEL CONTROL DETAILS S Z1063075
F DMS DOCUMENT 1 1 PC STANDARD AND OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT INSTALL 04-26306
F DMS DOCUMENT 1 1 PC ACCESS DOOR PLATFORM MHF7111 & MHF7113 Z0871655
F DMS DOCUMENT 1 1 PC PLENUM WALKWAY MHF7111 & MHF7113 Z0871659
F DMS DOCUMENT 1 1 PC INTERIOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT ACCESS PLA Z0871660
F DMS DOCUMENT 1 1 PC RECOMMENDED CONDUIT LOCATIONS MHF7111 & Z0871663
F DMS DOCUMENT 1 1 PC SWEEPER PIPING MHF7111 Z0871670 B
F DMS DOCUMENT 1 1 PC VFD-ABB ACH580 NEMA 3R MCB BP 10000006 A
799
F DMS DOCUMENT 1 1 PC MHF7111-13 Shop Assembly Manual - Bottom Z0901711
F DMS DOCUMENT 1 1 PC MHF7111-13 Shop Assembly Manual - Top Se Z0901712 E
F DMS DOCUMENT 1 1 PC DM-MDT-C DOWNTIME MANUAL Z0238848 C
F DMS DOCUMENT 1 1 PC SERVICE ALERT - LEGIONELLA Z0490858 C
F DMS DOCUMENT 1 1 PC OM-PUMP SCOT MOTORPUMP C56 & JM FRAME Z0560176 A
F DMS DOCUMENT 1 1 PC COOLING TOWER STORAGE GUIDELINES Z1110148
F DMS DOCUMENT 1 1 PC WARRANTY REGISTRATION INFO BULLETIN Z1104005
F DMS DOCUMENT 2 2 PC LLC+u+bms ULTRASONIC USER MANUAL Z1080817
F DMS DOCUMENT 1 1 PC IMI 686B Engineering Data & User Manual Z1070990 B
F DMS DOCUMENT 1 1 PC MH Fluid Cooler User Manual Z0920512 E
F E E22592 1 1 EA SIDE DRAIN PLUG MHF702-705 SS 06-21113
F F E82235SS 1 1 EA KIT FSTN MOTOR 254T-286T -SS METRIC 09-1270 B
FSTN KIT
F F 999 2481433 1 1 EA KIT FSTN Side Overflow MH7111-13 S300- FSTN KIT
F E A17 2479473 1 1 EA ASSEMBLY S300 OVERFLOW PLATE MH7111-13 Z1012342
3DIA
F F BDV 2605527 4 4 EA VALVE 1" MOTORIZED ABV ELEC SPRING
F F COIL 2725683 2 2 EA ASSEMBLY COIL COPPER MHF7111 - COIL 50196673 C
F F IMB_NO D44541 351 351 EA NOZZLE PLAS METERING -042 WHITE ORIF 68-3738 I
110
Page 4
Z SPIRAL TAR
F F MTR A82542 1 1 EA MOTOR 30HP 3/60/230/460/ 1800 286T NP TE
F F MUV 2605527 1 1 EA VALVE 1" MOTORIZED ABV ELEC SPRING
F F P86 2599330 1 1 EA CONTROL ULTRASONIC DL10 SENSOR 3 INCH
NPT GRP
F F PUMP 2530695 2 2 EA PUMP SCOT MODEL 59 6.5IMP 7.5HP 3/60/208- 05-25970
F E Q01 2306262 1 1 EA ASSEMBLY S304 CASE FACE DRAIN & OF NPT 2012- A
26818
F F Z11 012450X 1 1 EA SEALER POLYURETHANE TEXT 24/BOX
111
Page 76
F E F74 2749019 2 2 EA SHEET S300 3MMX342.9X790.0 MHF7113 EXT 50210272 A

FIL
F E F75 2749197 2 2 EA SHEET S300 3MMX803.0X3633.9 7111 EXT FILL 50210322 A
C
FIL
F E F80 2749027 4 4 EA SHEET S300 3MMX376.0X641.3 MHF7113 MECH 50210274 A
CO
F E G15 2417727 8 8 EA SHEET S300 3MMX181.9X181.9 MH7109 TM Z0897678
TIERO
F E G40 2296231 8 8 EA SHEET S300 1.5MMX114.3X114.3 MH71XX TM 2012-
CHAIN 25418
F F Y40 A87365 48 48 ZLF PAD NEOP SPONGE 2X1/4XLF
F F Z12 B60767 108 108 LF SEALER SIKALASTOMER 68 1/8X1 BLACK
F F Z13 B60768 33 33 LF SEALER SIKALASTOMER 68 1/8X1/2 BLACK
112
Page 80
F E N84 2362049 1 1 EA SHEET S304 1.5MMX117.5X892.7 MH7111 PIPE 2013-

SUP 26253
F F N85 E75313 12 12 EA FITTING PVC ELBOW 45DG 1/2DIA THDXTHD
SCH 80
F F N86 D33528 12 12 EA FITTING PVC NIPPLE SHORT 1/2DIA SCH 80
F E Q47 2026455 1 1 EA ASSEMBLY S304 OVERFLOW 4" DIA NPT 09-2586
F F Q49 B10469 2 2 EA FITTING PVC ELBOW 90DG 4DIA SCH 40
SOCKET T
F F Z22 126896X 2 2 QT CHEMICAL FILL CEMENT PVC CLEAR
113
Page 90
Order No. 10243694 Matl No. HF10243694A1TOP Description MHF7111SATBNC4SGK A1 TOP

Serial Number HF10243694A1TOP
Sub-Matl No.
Description MHF7111SATBNC4SGK A1 TOP Lit Pac Indicator F
F E 2022347 1 1 EA ME COMPONENTS MIA 22&2400GR 284T-286T-KD SEE TWR

NC8407-14 S300 MANUAL
F E 2022857 1 1 EA FORKLIFT COVERPLATE-KD NC8411-14-S S30 SEE TWR
MANUAL
F E 2022871 1 1 EA FAN GUARD-GALV-PAC NC8410-LOW MODULE SEE TWR
NC8411&13-LOW M MANUAL
Z0628389 C
F E 2033903 1 1 EA WALKWAY SUPPORT 5 1/2",3'&4'-6" AB TO AB 09-22250 A
NC8411&13S FACE
F E 2317835 1 1 EA GRDR 2250 7.33/1 CC2 K/D SEE TWR
MANUAL
F E 2360242 2 2 EA HW BASIN MHF7111S S300 - KD SEE TWR
MANUAL
F E 2360268 1 1 EA TOP DECK - KD MHF7111 S300 SEE TWR
MANUAL
F E 2360298 1 1 EA SKID-KD MHF7111 S300 SEE TWR
MANUAL
F E 2360311 1 1 EA STRUCTURE TOP MOD - KD MHF7111 S300 SEE TWR
MANUAL
F E 2360328 1 1 EA CASING CMPTS TOP MOD-GRDR MHF7111&13S SEE TWR
S30 MANUAL
S30 MANUAL
F E 2360348 1 1 EA CASING-MTRSIDE-MIA-KD MHF7111&13S S30 SEE TWR
MANUAL
MANUAL
F E 2360360 1 1 EA LOUVER COLUMN&END BRACE-STD-KD MHF7111 SEE TWR
TOP S30 MANUAL
F E 2360388 2 2 EA RECIRC PIPING TOP-KD MHF7111 S S300 SEE TWR
MANUAL
F E 2360402 1 1 EA FILL SUPPORT - KD MHF7111-7113 S3 SEE TWR
MANUAL
F E 2360421 2 2 EA FILL STRUCT TOP - KD W/TUBE HOLES MHF7111 SEE TWR
S300 MANUAL
F E 2369003 1 1 EA MECH EQUIP PLTFRM TOP MHF7111 S300 - SEE TWR
MANUAL
F E 2369206 1 1 EA LDR&GR POST CLIP FACE C-KD MHF7111-13 SHB SEE TWR
MANUAL
F E 2467977 2 2 EA FILL MHF7111 MX75P60-12 MIL SEE TWR
MANUAL
F E 2603913 1 1 EA KIT TRANSDUCER Mtg BLOCK AND HDWE Z1070874
1/4-28-UNF THD.
F E 2627924 1 1 EA DECAL MHF7111-7113-TOP SEE TWR
114
Page 91
MANUAL
F E 2749403 1 1 EA MEPF SAFETY CAGE TWR T & K-ALUM 50212187 A
MHF7111,13 S300
F E E63637 1 1 EA KIT CMNPTS & INSTR CPLG MC07 K/D SEE TWR
MANUAL
F E PITCH25 1 1 EA FAN PITCH 25 DEGREES FAN PITCH
F F CPLG E48572 1 1 EA FLANGE EG MC07 1 3/8 BORE 3/8X3/16 KYWY 07-2348
Z0596069 A
Z0596069 A
F E FAN 2097540 1 1 EA FAN X72-132-05 ASM 2200 SEE
SERVICE
MANUAL
F F NOZ D44541 328 328 EA NOZZLE PLAS METERING -042 WHITE ORIF 68-3738 I
SPIRAL TAR
F F VIB 2598732 1 1 EA SWITCH VIBRATION IMI SENSORS 686B1X/030BZ
115
Page 139

Sub-Matl No.

MANUAL
S304 MANUAL
MANUAL
MANUAL
MANUAL
MANUAL
S300-KD MANUAL
MANUAL
S300,
BTM S30 MANUAL
MANUAL
MANUAL
MANUAL
MANUAL
MANUAL
F E 2369118 1 1 EA FAN DECK WALKWAY 5.5" MHF7111-S300 Z0924034
F F 2369142 1 1 EA KIT FSTN FANDECK 5.5 SPACE MHF7113 SHB FSTN KIT
S30
F E 2369161 1 1 EA LDR&GR CASE FC AorC W/O LDR W/O FDEXT Z0921094 A
MHF7111
F F 2369167 1 1 EA KIT FSTN LDR&GR CASE FC W/O LDR FSTN KIT
MHF7111-13
116
Page 140

MHF7111-13
S304 MANUAL
MANUAL
MANUAL
MANUAL
MANUAL
ASSYMHF71
1.0 NEMA 4X
MANUAL
S300 MANUAL
MANUAL
MANUAL
MANUAL
KD MANUAL
S S3 MANUAL
MHF7111-13 S300
FACE A -
FACE C - K
USED W/ MOTORIZ
MANUAL
Z1052195
117
Page 213

FIL
C
FIL
CO
TIERO
CHAIN 25418
118
Page 217

SUP 26253
SCH 80
SOCKET T
119
Page 225

Sub-Matl No.

MANUAL
Z0628389 C
NC8411&13S FACE
MANUAL
MANUAL
MANUAL
MANUAL
MANUAL
S30 MANUAL
S30 MANUAL
MANUAL
MANUAL
TOP S30 MANUAL
MANUAL
MANUAL
S300 MANUAL
MANUAL
F E 2369197 1 1 EA LDR&GR POST CLIP FACE A-KD MHF7111 GC SEE TWR
MANUAL
MANUAL
1/4-28-UNF THD.
120
Page 226
MANUAL
MHF7111,13 S300
MANUAL
Z0596069 A
Z0596069 A
SERVICE
MANUAL
SPIRAL TAR
121
Page 274

Sub-Matl No.

MANUAL
S304 MANUAL
MANUAL
MANUAL
MANUAL
MANUAL
S300-KD MANUAL
MANUAL
S300,
BTM S30 MANUAL
MANUAL
MANUAL
MANUAL
MANUAL
MANUAL
SS
F E 2369161 1 1 EA LDR&GR CASE FC AorC W/O LDR W/O FDEXT Z0921094 A
MHF7111
F F 2369167 1 1 EA KIT FSTN LDR&GR CASE FC W/O LDR FSTN KIT
MHF7111-13
122
Page 275
MHF7111-13
S304 MANUAL
MANUAL
MANUAL
MANUAL
MANUAL
ASSYMHF71
1.0 NEMA 4X
MANUAL
S300 MANUAL
MANUAL
MANUAL
MANUAL
KD MANUAL
S S3 MANUAL
MHF7111-13 S300
F E 2749423 2 2 EA LFPF LADDER ALUM - LVR FACE MHF7111-13 50212853 A
TWR
FACE A -
FACE C - K
USED W/ MOTORIZ
MANUAL
Z1052195
123
Page 350

FIL
C
FIL
CO
TIERO
CHAIN 25418
124
Page 354

SUP 26253
SCH 80
SOCKET T
125
Page 361

Sub-Matl No.

MANUAL
Z0628389 C
NC8411&13S FACE
MANUAL
MANUAL
MANUAL
MANUAL
MANUAL
S30 MANUAL
S30 MANUAL
MANUAL
MANUAL
TOP S30 MANUAL
MANUAL
MANUAL
S300 MANUAL
MANUAL
F E 2369205 1 1 EA LDR&GR POST CLIP FACE C-KD MHF7111-13 GC SEE TWR
MANUAL
MANUAL
1/4-28-UNF THD.
126
Page 362
MANUAL
MHF7111,13 S300
MANUAL
Z0596069 A
Z0596069 A
SERVICE
MANUAL
SPIRAL TAR
127
Page 410

Sub-Matl No.

MANUAL
S304 MANUAL
MANUAL
MANUAL
MANUAL
MANUAL
S300-KD MANUAL
MANUAL
S300,
BTM S30 MANUAL
MANUAL
MANUAL
MANUAL
F E 2368965 1 1 EA ACCESS DOOR PLATFORM -PAC MHF7111-13 Z0915977
GALV
MANUAL
MANUAL
F E 2369118 1 1 EA FAN DECK WALKWAY 5.5" MHF7111-S300 Z0924034
SS
F F 2369168 1 1 EA KIT FSTN LDR&GR CASE FC W/LDR W/O FDEXT FSTN KIT
MHF7111-13
128
Page 411

MHF7111-13
S304 MANUAL
F E 2393788 1 1 EA SAFETY CAGE W/NO EXT&ADPF MHF7111-13 Z0955215
MANUAL
MANUAL
MANUAL
MANUAL
ASSYMHF71
1.0 NEMA 4X
F E 2601457 1 1 EA GUARDRAIL CASE FC AorC W/ LDR NO FDEXT Z1069733 A
MHF7111 (WELD F
F F 2602769 1 1 EA KIT FSTN SAFETY CAGE W/O ADPF&MOAPF FSTN KIT
MHF7111-13(WELD
MANUAL
S300 MANUAL
MANUAL
MANUAL
MANUAL
KD MANUAL
S S3 MANUAL
MHF7111-13 S300
F E 2749405 1 1 EA GUARDRAIL LDR ALUM-CASE FACE MHF7111-13 Z1069733 A
TWR
FACE C - K
USED W/ MOTORIZ
129
Page 484

FIL
C
FIL
CO
TIERO
CHAIN 25418
130
Page 488

SUP 26253
SCH 80
SOCKET T
131
Page 499

Sub-Matl No.

MANUAL
Z0628389 C
NC8411&13S FACE
MANUAL
MANUAL
MANUAL
MANUAL
MANUAL
S30 MANUAL
S30 MANUAL
MANUAL
MANUAL
TOP S30 MANUAL
MANUAL
MANUAL
S300 MANUAL
MANUAL
F E 2369198 1 1 EA LDR&GR POST CLIP FACE A-KD MHF7111 SHB SEE TWR
S30 MANUAL
MANUAL
1/4-28-UNF THD.
132
Page 500
MANUAL
MHF7111,13 S300
MANUAL
Z0596069 A
Z0596069 A
SERVICE
MANUAL
SPIRAL TAR
133
Page 21
Serial Number HF10243694A1LOW Product Allocation INSTAL
Sub-Matl No. 2318069 Drawing FSTN KIT
Description KIT FSTN COIL MHF71XX SS 1 COIL Lit Pac Indicator F
F F VBI UKA7051-6135 5 10 EA BOLT S304 M16X65 ISO4014 DIN931-A2-70

F F W29 UKA7221-6515 10 20 EA WASHER S304 FLAT M16 ISO7093 DIN9021-A2
F F X14 UKA7211-6515 5 10 EA NUT S304 M16 ISO4032 DIN934-A2-70
134
Page 22
Description KIT FSTN RECIRC PIPING TOP FIELD MHF7111 S Lit Pac Indicator F
F F V35 UKA7052-0165 9 18 EA BOLT S304 M20X80 ISO4014 DIN931-A2-70

F F VMP UKA7051-2115 5 10 EA BOLT S304 M12X55 DIN931-A2-70
F F W35 576439X 10 20 EA WASHER S300 SEALING 3/4 80-1305 K
F F X13 UKA7211-2585 10 20 EA NUT S304 NYLOC M12 ISO7040 DIN985-A2-70
135
Page 23
Description KIT FSTN FLD INSTALL MHF7111 S300,304 Lit Pac Indicator F
F E T07 2733385 65 65 EA SCREW SS TAP 3/8X1 HWH TYPE AB 1 GALV 50202847 A

SCREW PE
F F VN3 UKA7052-0095 9 9 EA BOLT S304 M20X45 ISO4017 DIN933-A2-70 AL
136
Page 24
Description KIT FSTN LDR&GR CASE FC W/LDR W/O FDEXT Lit Pac Indicator F
F F L28 E14954 8 8 EA PLASTIC PIPE PLUG NIAGARA SQ-12-1 BLACK O

F F V10 UKA7051-008G 30 30 EA BOLT GALV M10X40 ISO4017 DIN933-G8.8 ALL
F F V22 UKA7051-213G 13 13 EA BOLT GALV M12X65 ISO4014 DIN931-G8.8
F F W02 UKA7221-053G 30 30 EA M10 SPRING WASHER TYPE B GALV DIN127B DIN
127B
127B
F F W22 UKA7221-051G 25 25 EA WASHER GALV FLAT M10 ISO7093 DIN9021
F F X02 UKA7211-051G 35 35 EA NUT GALV M10 ISO4032 DIN934-G5
137
Page 25
Description KIT FSTN LDR&GR LVR FACE W/O LDR MHF7111-13 Lit Pac Indicator F

127B
138
Page 26
Description KIT FSTN FAN GUARD MHF7111-13 S300,S304 Lit Pac Indicator F
F F N97 260216X 7 7 EA SHEET S300 12GAX1.25X1.93 CLAMP WASHER 54-1182 M

F F VM4 UKA7050-8055 20 20 EA BOLT S304 M8X25 ISO4017 DIN933-A2-70 AL
139
Page 27
Description KIT FSTN Sweeper MH7111-13 S300-04 Lit Pac Indicator F

F F W37 B64302 10 10 EA WASHER S300 SEALING 5/16 80-1305 K
140
Page 28
Description KIT FSTN Blow Down MH7111-13 S300-04 Lit Pac Indicator F
F F V01 UKA7050-6045 2 2 EA BOLT S304 M6X20 ISO4017 DIN933-A2-70 AL

F F V07 UKA7051-0055 2 2 EA BOLT S304 M10X25 DIN933-A2-70 AL
141
Page 29
Description KIT FSTN SENSOR CLIP MH7111-13 S300-04 Lit Pac Indicator F

142
Page 30
Description KIT FSTN AD Platform MH7111-13 GALV Lit Pac Indicator F
F F T07 263723X 20 20 EA SCREW GALV TAP 3/8X1 HWH TYPE AB

127B
127B
143
Page 31
Description KIT FSTN Louver Platform MH7111-13 GALV Lit Pac Indicator F

F F V8K UKA7051-208G 30 30 EA BOLT GALV M12X40 ISO401 DIN933-G8.8 ALL
127B
144
Page 32

127B
145
Page 33
Description KIT FSTN Plenum Wkwy MH7111-13 S300-04 Lit Pac Indicator F

SCREW PE
146
Page 34
Description KIT FSTN COIL HEADER MH7111-13 S300-04 HF Lit Pac Indicator F

SCREW PE
147
Page 35
Description KIT FSTN CASING BM MH7111 S300-04 Lit Pac Indicator F

148
Page 36
Description KIT FSTN Coil Support MH7111 S300-04 Lit Pac Indicator F

F F V8K UKA7051-2085 43 43 EA BOLT S304 M12X40 DIN933-A2-70 AL
149
Page 37
Description KIT FSTN CWB Common MH7111 S300-04 Lit Pac Indicator F

150
Page 38
Description KIT FSTN CASING BM MH7111 S300-04 HF Lit Pac Indicator F

SCREW PE
151
Page 39
Description KIT FSTN Struct Btm MH7111 S300-04 Lit Pac Indicator F
F F T04 A57759 30 30 EA SCREW S300 CAP 1/4-20X1/2

SCREW PE
F F X02 143685X 5 5 EA NUT S300 3/8
152
Page 40
Description KIT FSTN Louver Column Btm MH7111-13 S300-04 Lit Pac Indicator F

SCREW PE
153
Page 41
Description KIT FSTN ME Internal Platform Btm MH7111-13 Lit Pac Indicator F

SCREW PE
154
Page 42
Description KIT FSTN Pump Box MH7111-13 S300-04 Lit Pac Indicator F

SCREW PE
F F VPQ 2227776 18 18 EA BOLT S304 M20X120 ISO4014 DIN931-A2-70
F F W05 UKA7222-0535 35 35 EA M20 SPRING WASHER TYPE B SSA2 DIN127B DIN
127B
155
Page 43
Description KIT FSTN MHF7111-13 S300 INTERIOR CLIP Lit Pac Indicator F

156
Page 44
Description KIT FSTN Side Overflow MH7111-13 S300-04 Lit Pac Indicator F

157
Page 45
Description KIT FSTN SAFETY CAGE W/O ADPF&MOAPF Lit Pac Indicator F

F F V23 UKA7051-215G 4 4 EA BOLT GALV M12X75 DIN931-G8.8
127B
158
Page 46
Description KIT FSTN COIL INLET/OUTLET SEAL S304 MHF71XX Lit Pac Indicator F

SCREW PE
159
Page 47
Description KIT FSTN Interm Basin Extend Fill MH7111 S300-04 Lit Pac Indicator F
SCREW PE
160
Page 48
Description KIT FSTN Piping Btm Mod Extend Fill MH7111-13 Lit Pac Indicator F

161
Page 49
Description KIT FSTN LFPF ALUM LDR MH7111-13 Lit Pac Indicator F

127B
127B
162
Page 50
Description KIT FSTN WATER MAKEUP MHF7111-13 S300-304 Lit Pac Indicator F

163
Page 51
Sub-Matl No. 2727372 Drawing SEE TOWER MANUAL
Description CASING CMPTS BOT COPPER COIL 12 ROW MHF7111 Lit Pac Indicator F
F F 999 2377387 1 1 EA KIT FSTN CASING BM MH7111 S300-04 FSTN KIT

F E D07 2361165 1 1 EA SHEET S300 1.5MMX1246.9X1931 MH7111 BM 2013-
CSNG 23834
CSNG 23835
CSNG 23864
F E D11 2358267 1 1 EA SHEET S300 1.5MMX357.7X1162.1 MH7113 BM 2013- A
CSNG 23869
F E D12 2358263 1 1 EA SHEET S300 1.5MMX357.7X1162.1 MH7113 BM 2013-
CSNG 23868
F E D42 2365818 1 1 EA SHEET S300 3MMX350.9X1368.5 MH7113 BM 2013-
CSNG 26558
F E D70 2726172 1 1 EA SHEET S300 1.5MMX948.3X1943.6 7111 BM CS1 50193480 A
COP
F E D71 2726220 1 1 EA SHEET S300 1.5MMX1250.0X1943.6 7111 BM 50193497 B
CS2 COP
CS6 COP
COP
F F Y31 146183X 2 2 EA FITTING HOLE PLUG HEYCO PT 2633 BLK NYL
164
Page 52
Description COIL INLET/OUTLET RUBBER BOOT SEAL S300 Lit Pac Indicator F
F F 999 2746720 2 4 EA KIT FSTN COIL INLET/OUTLET SEAL S304 FSTN KIT
MHF71XX
F F D46 2744498 2 4 EA FITTING DEKTITE DF204RE #4 RED (BOOT)
DEKTITE ORIGINA
F E DD1 2744549 2 4 EA SHEET S300 3MMX247.7X241.3 MH71XX COPPER 50209119 A
C
F F DD2 2743874 1 2 EA SEALER Sikasil WS-295 10.0 OZ TUBE
F F DD3 2743879 2 4 EA CLAMP WORM DRIVE MCMASTERCARR #5
165
Page 53
Sub-Matl No. 2296189 Drawing SEE TWR MANUAL
Description FLOAT VALVE HOLE PLUG (1 FACE) MHF71X K/D Lit Pac Indicator F
F F Q37 379214X 1 1 EA PLASTIC HOLE PLUG NIAGARA #421 CAPLUG

BPF
F F Y86 D89348 1 1 EA FITTING HOLE PLUG HEYCO PT 2783 BLK NYL
166
Page 54
Description CW BASIN-BOLT-COMMON PARTS-KD MHF7111-S Lit Pac Indicator F
F F 999 2377360 1 1 EA KIT FSTN CWB Common MH7111 S300-04 FSTN KIT
F E A02 2361250 2 2 EA SHEET S304 1.5MMX1107.2X3575.2 MH7111 BM 2013-
CWB S 23855
F E A03 2372032 2 2 EA SHEET S304 3MMX157.3X1143.2 MH7111 BM 2013-
CWB D 27660
F E A05 2361254 2 2 EA SHEET S304 1.5MMX1250X3575.2 MH7111 BM 2013-
CWB F 23856
F E A06 2361028 2 2 EA SHEET S304 1.5MMX1250.0X3575.2 MH7111 BM Z0737158 A
CWB F
F E A09 2361242 2 2 EA SHEET S304 3MMX737.3X3594.5 MH7111 BM 2013- A
CWB E 23853
F E A10 2421799 4 4 EA SHEET S304 3MMX399X639.3 MH7111 CWB END Z0903829 A
F E A12 2361009 4 4 EA SHEET S304 1.5MMX388.4X3600.6 MH7111 BM 2013-2129
CWB F
F F A18 2363691 4 4 EA PLATE S304 6.3MMX289.67X330.2 MH7113 BM Z0737042 A
CWB D
CWB F 23791
F E A20 2361258 2 2 EA SHEET S304 3MMX864.4X2696.9 MH7111 BM Z0737219 A
CWB S
CWB S
F E A23 2358158 4 4 EA SHEET S304 3MMX117.5X761.3 MH71XX BM 2013- A
CWB S 22567
TU EL 23812
CWB F
F E D35 2412980 2 2 EA SHEET S304 3MMX152.8X677.2 MH7111 LVR Z0897382
SIDE
SIDE
167
Page 55
Description CW BASIN-BOLT-SIDE-KD MHF7111-SCB S304 Lit Pac Indicator F

CWB S 23961
168
Page 56
Description CW BASIN-BOLT-SIDE-D&OF-KD MHF7111-SCB S304 Lit Pac Indicator F

CWB S 23821
169
Page 57
Description CW BASIN-BOLT-DEP FLR -KD MHF7111-SCB S304 Lit Pac Indicator F

CWB D 23854
170
Page 58
Description CASING CMPTS BOT MHF7111 S300-KD Lit Pac Indicator F

CSNG 23834
CSNG 23835
CSNG 23864
CSNG 23869
CSNG 23868
CSNG 23831
CSNG 23830
CSNG 23833
CSNG 26558
CSNG 23832
171
Page 59
Description COIL HEADER 88C12R HIGH FLOW MHF7111 S300-KD Lit Pac Indicator F
F F 999 2377241 1 2 EA KIT FSTN COIL HEADER MH7111-13 S300- FSTN KIT
F E D43 C24172 15 30 EA ASSEMBLY ELIM TU12X 70.000 A,1@00.0&00.0 92-3680 A
F E D44 2367405 1 2 EA SHEET S300 3MMX223.7X3569.1 MH7111 BM TU 2013- A
EL 26565
F E D56 2361213 1 2 EA SHEET S300 1.5MMX222.4X3492.5 MH7111 BM Z0737208 C
RETAI
WTR S 23782
LVR F 26559
172
Page 60
Description RECIRC PIPING TOP FIELD MHF7111 S S300 Lit Pac Indicator F
F F Q63 2367387 1 2 EA ASSEMBLY PVC PIPE 6DIA FAN DECK ASSY 2013-
MH7111 PIPING F 23905
F F Q66 221481X 1 2 EA GASKET FULL FACE 1/4THK 6DIA 6DIA 71-2532 Q
F F Q69 C03600 1 2 EA SHEET S300 11GAX1.50X19.58 PIPE STRAP 97-2756
F E Q74 D07181 1 2 EA SHEET S300 11GAX9.59X10.25 SIO PIPE SUPPOR 01-2797 B
173
Page 61
Description LOUVER COLUMN&END BRACE-ATT-KD MHF7111 BTM Lit Pac Indicator F
F F 999 2378269 1 1 EA KIT FSTN Louver Column Btm MH7111-13 S300- FSTN KIT
F E A60 2369453 2 2 EA SHEET S300 3MMX262.7X1675 MH7113 BM LVR 2013- A
B 27359
B 27360
F E A62 2772737 2 2 EA SHEET S300 1.5MMX63.9X183.0 MHF711-13 BOT 50226249 A
C
C
F E D24 2361193 2 2 EA SHEET S300 4MMX297.9X2700.5 MH7111 BM Z0737203 B
LVR C
LVR C
TIERO 23844
F E D27 2363654 4 4 EA ASSEMBLY S304 1/2 DIA TIE ROD MH7111 BM 2013-
TIERO 26256
TIERO 23845
F F D30 2361201 2 2 EA SHEET S300 4MMX130.4X547.7 MH7111 BM 2013-
TIERO 23843
TIERO 28194
F F D32 2374318 4 4 EA SHEET S300 4MMX30X244.5 MH7113 BM OUTSI 2013-
28195
F F Y80 2025896 2 2 EA HARDWARE CABLE TIE BY THOMAS BETTS CAT.
NO.
174
Page 62
Description PUMP BOX 60Hz MHF7111-13 SBC S300-KD Lit Pac Indicator F
F F 999 2378282 1 1 EA KIT FSTN Pump Box MH7111-13 S300- FSTN KIT
PUMP 22980
F E A45 2357909 2 2 EA SHEET S300 3MMX413X794 MH7113 BM PUMP 2013-
22979
DBL F 23924
F E B47 2365794 2 2 EA SCREEN S304 1/2X1/2X.063X 204.1MM X 483.8 2013-
22982
F E QA3 2363700 2 2 EA ASSEMBLY S300 SIDE SUCTION MH7111-13 BM 2013-
SI 23925
F F QA6 D67829 2 2 EA FITTING FLG VAN STONE PVC 5DIA - SCH 40/8
F F YCF D67832 4 4 EA GASKET FULL FACE 1/4THK 5DIA 5DIA 04-2498
F F YCH 221481X 2 2 EA GASKET FULL FACE 1/4THK 6DIA 6DIA 71-2532 Q
175
Page 63
Description BLOWDOWN W/CASE FACE OVERFLOW MHF7111-13 Lit Pac Indicator F
F F 999 2377100 1 1 EA KIT FSTN Blow Down MH7111-13 S300- FSTN KIT
F F Q36 676965X 1 1 EA CLAMP PVC 1DIA CARLON #E977F
F E Q9B 2369461 1 1 EA SHEET S300 1.5MMX76.2X247.8 MH7111-13 BM 2013-
BL 27358
F F QA0 D71025 3 3 LF TUBE PVC CLEAR 1 5/8 ODX X3/16WALLXLF
F F QF1 567412X 2 2 EA PIPE PVC 1DIAX0'-2 1/8 SCH 40
F F QF2 D72899 1 1 EA PIPE PVC 1DIAX0'-2 NPTOE SCH 80
F F QF6 D71022 1 1 EA VALVE PVC BALL 1DIA SOCKET-SOCKET
F F Y61 B84722 3 3 EA CLAMP SS WORM 1 1/4-2 5/8
MCM-CARR#5663K1
176
Page 64
Description LOUVER FACE PLATFORM MHF7111 MULTI CELL LVR Lit Pac Indicator F
F F 999 2377143 1 1 EA KIT FSTN Louver Platform MH7111-13 GALV FSTN KIT
F E E30 2023207 8 8 EA SHEET HMG 3MMX93.2X171.5 GUARDRAIL POST 09-2160 A
F E E31 2066134 2 2 EA SHEET HMG 3MMX108.1X171.5 GUARDRAIL POST2010-2318
F E L01 2361902 1 1 EA SHEET HMG 3MMX245.4X1444 MH7111 2013-
PLATFORM 25997
F E L02 2361906 2 2 EA SHEET HMG 3MMX117.7X127.0 MH7111 2013-
PLATFORM 25998
PLATFORM 25999
F E L04 2369329 1 1 EA SHEET HMG 3MMX381.7X3588.3 MH7111 L04 2013-
PLAT 27336
PLAT 27337
PLAT 27338
F E L07 2369341 1 1 EA SHEET HMG 3MMX362.7X770.3 MH7111 L07 2013- A
PLAT 27339
F E L08 2066142 3 3 EA SHEET HMG 3MMX239.0X769.1 PLATFORM 2010-2303
SUPPOR
F E L09 2216560 1 1 EA SHEET HMG 1.5MMX151.0X3505.2 LVR PLTFM 2011-
TOEBO 21424
F E L10 2216561 5 5 EA SHEET HMG 1.5MMX673.1X794.1 LVR PLTFM 2011- A
WKWY 21425
F F L13 2216563 1 1 EA ASSEMBLY HDG GR LOUVER PLATFORM NC8400 09-2671 B
A = 1778MM LABE
F F L17 2066151 1 1 EA ASSEMBLY HDG GR LOUVER PLATFORM NC8400 2010-2306
A = 636.6MM LAB
F F L32 2372006 1 1 EA ASSEMBLY HDG GUARDRAIL MHF7111 A = 09-2691 B
1092.2MM LA
177
Page 65
PLATFORM 25997
PLATFORM 25998
PLATFORM 25999
PLAT 27336
PLAT 27337
PLAT 27338
PLAT 27339
SUPPOR
TOEBO 21424
WKWY 21425
F F L12 2216562 1 1 EA ASSEMBLY HDG GR LOUVER PLATFORM NC8400 Z0654949 A
A = 1092.2MM LA
A = 1778MM LABE
A = 636.6MM LAB
178
Page 66
Description PLENUM WALKWAY - KD MHF7111 S300 Lit Pac Indicator F
F F 999 2377221 1 1 EA KIT FSTN Plenum Wkwy MH7111-13 S300- FSTN KIT
F E L56 2361086 2 2 EA SHEET S300 3MMX330.98X3588.5 MH7111 BM Z0737177 A
PWW B
F E L57 2358387 4 4 EA SHEET S300 1.5MMX844.6X936.8 MH7113 BM Z0737299 B
DBL F
179
Page 67
Description SENSOR CLIP MHF7111-13 S300 KD Lit Pac Indicator F
F F 999 2377103 1 1 EA KIT FSTN SENSOR CLIP MH7111-13 S300- FSTN KIT
F E P01 2362889 1 1 EA SHEET S300 3MMX184.3X213.9 MH7111-13 BW Z0737342 A
FL
180
Page 68
Description CWB COIL SUPPORTS STD COIL MHF7111SCB Lit Pac Indicator F
F F 999 2377359 1 1 EA KIT FSTN Coil Support MH7111 S300-04 FSTN KIT
F E A14 2361075 2 2 EA SHEET S304 1.5MMX439.2X2499.7 MH7111 BM Z0737174 B
MID C
MID C
F E A49 2372008 4 4 EA ASSEMBLY S304 MHF7111 COIL SUPT MH7111 Z0737687 A
BM WLDMN
F E A50 2372012 2 2 EA SHEET S304 3MMX143.9X263.0 MH7111 BM MID Z0737689 A
C
F E A51 2372016 2 2 EA SHEET S304 3MMX150X251.6 MH7111 BM MID Z0737690 A
C
C
C
181
Page 69
Description DECAL FACTORY MUTUAL CERTIFICATION Lit Pac Indicator F
F F N38 786657X 1 1 EA LABEL FACTORY MUTUAL DECAL 84-2262 K
182
Page 70
Description NAMEPLATE FLUID COOLER-SPX \ MARLEY Lit Pac Indicator F
F F N30 2307680 1 1 EA LABEL ALUM FLUID COOLER SERIAL NUMBER Z0331723 B

PLATE-USA
F F Y50 322966X 4 4 EA RIVET M400 POP 1/8X.265 DOME HEAD
183
Page 71
Description DECAL LOGO-SPX \ MARLEY-LARGE Lit Pac Indicator F
F F MLY 2815650 2 2 EA LABEL LOGO MARLEY (BLUE SQUARE) (24"X25") 10000024 A

VINYL 231
184
Page 72
Description DECAL CTI CERTIFICATION MHF SERIES Lit Pac Indicator F
F F N37 D89192 1 1 EA LABEL CTI CERTIFICATION MHF Z0549277 B
185
Page 73
Description DECAL GEAR DRIVE MHF7111-7113-LOW Lit Pac Indicator F
F F N31 143537X 1 1 EA LABEL PATENT NUMBER DECAL Z0201760 H

F F N32 B08948 2 2 EA LABEL TOWER WARNING DECAL SERIES NC Z0248397 A
F F N33 2378294 2 2 EA LABEL HOISTING DECAL MHF7111&7113 Z0897716
F F N34 A25133 4 4 EA LABEL PORTABLE LADDER WARNING DECAL Z0215350 A
F F N35 A78052 1 1 EA LABEL INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE DECAL 91-1362 D
GEAR DRIVE
F F N36 153163X 2 2 EA LABEL ACCESS WARNING-FAN MAY START AUTO Z0201769 A
F F N43 C60268 1 1 EA LABEL LEGIONNAIRES' DISEASE WARNING DECAL Z0490859 B
F F ND1 D66042 1 1 EA LABEL SECURITY HAZARD DECAL 04-120
F F ND3 D89187 2 2 EA LABEL INLET DECAL 04-1527
F F ND4 D89188 2 2 EA LABEL OUTLET DECAL 04-1528
F F ND6 D89190 1 1 EA LABEL BLOW DOWN VALVE DECAL Z0549276 A
F F ND7 D89194 2 2 EA LABEL FAN SPEED WARNING Z0549278 B
186
Page 74
Description STRUCTURE BTM MOD - KD-REVA MHF7111 S S300 Lit Pac Indicator F
F F 999 2378234 1 1 EA KIT FSTN Struct Btm MH7111 S300-04 FSTN KIT
F E D01 2361977 2 2 EA SHEET S300 1.5MMX238.7X2374.9 MH7111 BM Z0737569 B
COIL
F E D02 2677092 2 2 EA SHEET S300 3MMX375.4X2374.9 MH7111 BM Z1100482
INNER
COIL
INNER
INT D 23963
INT D 28193
F E D12 2019008 2 2 EA SHEET S300 1.5MMX38.1X76.9 DOOR LATCH 08-27305
STOP
F E D13 2357937 2 2 EA SHEET S300 1.5MMX882.96X1219.31 MH7113 2013-
BM DOOR 22987
F F D14 A57761 6 6 EA HARDWARE LIFT OFF HINGE SOUTHCO 96-10-4
F E D18 2677089 2 2 EA SHEET S300 3MMX217.8X3562.9 MH7111 BM TU Z1100481
EL
F E D19 E48118 30 30 EA ASSEMBLY ELIM TU12X 35.500 A,1@00.0&00.0 92-3680 A
BM TU EL 23816
ELIM 23815
F F D28 B09736 4 4 EA HARDWARE RUBBER DR SILENCER
MCMASTER-CARR #
F F YA3 C26867 4 4 EA PLASTIC KNOB 1 5/8DIA BLK W/3/8-16 THD
F F YA4 D33392 2 2 EA BAR S304 3/8DIAX0'-3 ALL THD
F E YA6 D71018JIT 2 2 EA SHEET S300 11GAX2.00X7.50 DOOR LATCH 04-23023 A
187
Page 75
Description INTERM BASIN S TWR T - KD MHF7111S S300 Lit Pac Indicator F
F F 999 2750347 1 1 EA KIT FSTN Interm Basin Extend Fill MH7111 FSTN KIT
S300-04
F E B07 2715285 8 8 EA SHEET S300 3MMX177.7X221.0 MH7103 FILL Z1122376
SUP
F F B10 863431X 4 4 EA TUBE S304 2.375ODX .083WALLX11'-5 91-2752 K
F E D58 2361189 2 2 EA SHEET S300 3MMX316X3567.1 MH7111 BM END Z0737202 A
P
F E F01 2749145 2 2 EA SHEET S300 3MMX311.1X3636.9 MHF7111 BM 50210309 A
GIRT
F E F02 2361066 2 2 EA SHEET S300 1.5MMX966.8X3648.35 MH7111 BM Z0737172 B
INT B
F E F04 2361050 2 2 EA SHEET S300 1.5MMX1130.5X3648.4 MH7111 BM Z0737168 A
INT B
GIRT
GIRT
F E F07 2749165 2 2 EA SHEET S300 1.5MMX966.8X3648.4 MHF7111 IMB 50210314 A
FLO
F E F08 2361046 12 12 EA SHEET S300 3MMX219.4X2524.6 MH7111 BM Z0737167 C
INT B
F E F09 2749149 6 6 EA SHEET S300 1.5MMX744.2X1165.8 7111 IMB 50210310 A
PLENUM
LVR CO
LVR CO
LVR CO
F F F46 2749054 2 2 EA SHEET S300 4MMX254.3X625.0 MHF7113 EXT 50210281 A
FIL
FIL
FIL
F E F58 2749201 2 2 EA SHEET S300 3MMX485.0X3594.5 MHF7111 EXT 50210323 B
FIL
F E F59 2749039 4 4 EA SHEET S300 3MMX264.2X1628.3 MHF7111-13 50210277 A
EXT
F E F60 2749209 4 4 EA ASSEMBLY S304 TIE ROD MHF7111 EXTEND 50210325 A
F E F68 2749050 4 4 EA SHEET S300 1.5MMX35.0X610.0 MHF7111-13 50210280 A
EXT
FIL
188
C
Page 77
Description FILL 7111 - ADDITIONAL FILL HT 12 MIL PVC - KD Lit Pac Indicator F
F E F66 2714907 95 190 EA PVC SHT A MX75P60-8.1LEV -RIB Z1041777 B

.012X60"X24.3"(
F E F67 2714908 95 190 EA PVC SHT B MX75P60-8.1LEV -RIB Z1041777 B
.012X60"X24.3"(
189
Page 78
Description RECIRC PIPING BTM TWR T & K-KD MHF7111-13 S Lit Pac Indicator F
F F 999 2750355 1 1 EA KIT FSTN Piping Btm Mod Extend Fill MH7111-13 FSTN KIT
S300-
F E F11 2358323 4 4 EA SHEET S300 3MMX267.4X778.3 MH71XX BM Z0737280 A
PIPIN
F F Q69 2295331 4 4 EA U-BOLT S304 M10DIAX506 C=86 D=110 E=40 Z0333202 B
F F Q75 D07052 2 2 EA FITTING CPLG FLEX 6DIA 6" TO 6"
F F QA8 D67831 2 2 EA FITTING PVC RED BSHG 6X5DIA SPIGXSLIP SCH
4
F F QA9 A22547 2 2 EA FITTING PVC CPLG 6DIA SCH 40
F F QB1 D73032 2 2 EA PIPE PVC 5DIAX0'-9 1/2 SCH 40
F F QB3 D41514 2 2 EA FITTING PVC ELBOW 90DG 6DIA SOCKET TYPE
SCH
F F QC1 2370938 2 2 EA PIPE PVC 6DIAX0'-9 3/8" SCH 40
F F QC3 2749246 1 1 EA PIPE PVC 6DIAX9'-2 13/16 SCH40 FAB TO
SIZE
F F QC4 2749247 1 1 EA PIPE PVC 6DIAX9'-2 13/16 SCH40 7111-13 EXT 50212145 A
FIL
190
Page 99
Order No. 10243694 Matl No. HF10243694A1TOP Description MHF7111SATBNC4SGK A1 TOP Sequence 9822
Serial Number HF10243694A1TOP Product Allocation INSTAL
Sub-Matl No. PITCH25 Drawing FAN PITCH
Description FAN PITCH 25 DEGREES Lit Pac Indicator F
F No BOM Required 1 1 PC FAN PITCH 25 DEGREES
191
Page 100
Description KIT FSTN ME COMPONENTS 22&2400GR NC8400 Lit Pac Indicator F

F F VB1 UKA7051-6135 1 5 EA BOLT S304 M16X65 ISO4014 DIN931-A2-70
F F Y55 237453X 2 2 EA PIN S300 SPIROL 3/8X1 1/2 MDP
192
Page 101
Description KIT FSTN WALKWAY SUP CLIP INST S300 Lit Pac Indicator F

193
Page 102
Description KIT FSTN CASING TM MH711-13 S300-04 Lit Pac Indicator F

194
Page 103

195
Page 104
Description KIT FSTN Fill Tube Support MH7111-13 S300-04 Lit Pac Indicator F

196
Page 105
Description KIT FSTN Piping Top Mod MH7111-13 S300-04 Lit Pac Indicator F

197
Page 106
Description KIT FSTN Struct TM MH7111-13 S300-04 Lit Pac Indicator F

198
Page 107
Description KIT FSTN LdrGRPostClipInstallFaceA MH7111 S300-04 Lit Pac Indicator F

199
Page 108
Description KIT FSTN Louver Column TOP MH7111-13 S300-04 Lit Pac Indicator F

200
Page 109
Description KIT FSTN Fill Struct 4411 MH7111 S300-04 Lit Pac Indicator F

SCREW PE
201
Page 110
Description KIT FSTN HWB MH7111 S300-04 Lit Pac Indicator F

SCREW PE
127B
F F X40 2018979 10 20 EA NUT S304 WING M8 UNI5448 DIN315-A2
202
Page 111
Description KIT FSTN Skid 4411 MH7111 S300-04 Lit Pac Indicator F
SCREW PE
203
Page 112
Description KIT FSTN Top DecK MH7111 S300-04 Lit Pac Indicator F

SCREW PE
204
Page 113
Description KIT FSTN ME Internal Platform TOP MH7111-13 Lit Pac Indicator F
F E T06 2733387 50 50 EA SCREW SS TAP 1/4x3/4 HWH TYPE AB 50202847 A

F F V22 UKA7051-2135 13 13 EA BOLT S304 M12X65 DIN931-A2-70
205
Page 114
Description KIT FSTN MEPF SafetyCage Extend Fill MH7111-13 Lit Pac Indicator F

127B
127B
206
Page 115
Sub-Matl No. E63643 Drawing FSTN KIT
Description KIT FSTN ME COUPLING COMPONENTS MC07 Lit Pac Indicator F
F F 000 300608X 10 10 EA SCREW S300 CAP 5/16X1 1/2 HEX HD

F F 000 E48579 2 2 EA SCREW S300 SET 3/8X3/8 HEX SOC HDLS CU
207
Page 116
Description ME COMPONENTS MIA 22&2400GR 284T-286T-KD Lit Pac Indicator F
F F 999 2023931 1 1 EA KIT FSTN ME COMPONENTS 22&2400GR NC8400 FSTN KIT

S300
F E M25 2023971 2 2 EA ASSEMBLY S304 MOTOR SUPPORT 280T 09-2151 A
NC8407-14
F F M32 2023976 2 2 EA ASSEMBLY S304 GRDR SUPPORT 2200&2400 09-2156 A
NC8407-14
F F M63 2038435 1 1 EA SHEET S300 4MMX273.3X1596.0 ME RAIL Z0651755 A
NC8407-
F F M64 2038439 1 1 EA SHEET S300 4MMX273.3X1596.0 ME RAIL-OH Z0651756 A
NC84
F F Y56 481085X 1 1 EA SHIM S300 SET 59-2550 D
F F Z05 612408X 1 1 EA SEALER LOCTITE 609-05 (.5 ML CONTAINE
208
Page 117
Description FORKLIFT COVERPLATE-KD NC8411-14-S S300 Lit Pac Indicator F
F E M46 2025308 4 4 EA SHEET S300 1.5MMX152.4X409.6 SKID FORK 08-27395 A

SLOT
209
Page 118
Description GRDR 2250 7.33/1 CC2 K/D Lit Pac Indicator F
F DMS DOCUMENT 1 1 PC USER MANUAL - 2200 - 2250 - 2400 GRDR Z0490769 C

F DMS DOCUMENT 1 1 PC MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT HOLD-DOWN FASTENER Z0233144 A
F F M20 2277078 1 1 EA GEAREDUCER 2250 7.33 CC2 Z0273152 B
F F Y57 A76772 3 3 EA LUBRICANT OIL SYNTHETIC ISO 150 1 GAL
210
Page 119
Description HW BASIN MHF7111S S300 - KD Lit Pac Indicator F
F F 999 2377352 1 2 EA KIT FSTN HWB MH7111 S300-04 FSTN KIT

F E C01 2361332 1 2 EA SHEET S300 1.5MMX868.4X3594.3 MH7111 TM 2013-
HWB F 23894
F E C02 2361961 1 2 EA SHEET S300 1.5MMX518.5X3575.2 MH7111 TM Z0737565 A
HWB E
F E C03 2361340 1 2 EA SHEET S300 3MMX974X3569.1 MH7111 TM HWB 2013- B
I 23896
HWB F 23895
HWB E 23764
F F C06 2358403 2 4 EA SHEET S300 4MMX203.4X1400.3 MH7113 TM 2013-
HWB F 23951
F E C07 2020304 1 2 EA SHEET S300 1.5MMX209.9X1270 HWB FLR STIFF Z0650773 A
N
F E C09 2020305 6 12 EA SHEET S300 3MMX85.9X292.1 HWB FLUME SUPT 09-2236 B
F E C10 2020306 1 2 EA ASSEMBLY S300 HWB FLUME CTR NC8409,12,14 09-2237
F E C11 2029384 2 4 EA ASSEMBLY S300 HWB FLUME END NC8407,11,13 09-21459
F E C13 2017540 1 2 EA SHEET S300 1.5mmX101.8X170.0 HWB INLET 08-27042 B
END S
F F C16 2357981 2 4 EA SHEET S300 4MMX152.4X509 MH7113 TM TIERO 2013-
22569
F E C18 2029385 1 2 EA SHEET S300 1.5MMX111.0X3403.6 HWB COVER 09-21460
SUPT
F E E22 2029402 5 10 EA SHEET S300 1.5MMX773.6X906.5 HWB COVER 09-21477 A
NC840
F E E30 2023508 2 4 EA SHEET S300 3MMX93.2X171.5 GUARDRAIL POST 09-2160 A
F F Y62 D03754 5 10 EA SPACER PLASTIC 9/16" INSDE DIA CE SHEPHERD
211
Page 120
Description TOP DECK - KD MHF7111 S300 Lit Pac Indicator F
F F 999 2377358 1 1 EA KIT FSTN Top DecK MH7111 S300-04 FSTN KIT
F E E01 2361324 2 2 EA SHEET S300 3MMX393.4X2619.5 MH7111 TM Z0737244 B
GIRT
F F E03 2017562 4 4 EA PLATE S304 6.3mmX158.8X251.7 GIRT HOIST 08-23130
CLIP
Z0624293 A
F E E09 2361352 2 2 EA SHEET S300 1.5MMX1250X2213.1 MH7111 TM Z0737251 A
FAN D
F E E10 2017565 2 2 EA SHEET S300 1.2MMX114.3X184.1 FAN DECK 08-27067
LUBE L
F E E13 2361957 2 2 EA SHEET S300 1.5MMX244.8X3575.2 MH7111 TM Z0737564 A
FAN D
F E E14 2393708 4 4 EA SHEET S300 1.5MMX213.4X537.2 MH7111 FD Z0881659
SUPPO
FAN D
F E E16 2361360 2 2 EA SHEET S300 1.5MMX594.1X1079.9 MH7111 TM 2013-
FAN D 23901
FAN D 26218
FAN D 26219
F F E20 2030178 2 2 EA GRPFR FAN CYL 132 DIA W/BUTT SPLC NC8400 09-21004 A
F F E21 2030180 2 2 EA GRPFR FAN CYL 132 DIA W/BUTT SPLC-NOTCH 09-21007 A
NC8400
GIRT
F E E27 2361320 2 2 EA SHEET S300 3MMX393.4X2025.8 MH7111 TM 2013-
GIRT 23891
F E E31 2017563 4 4 EA SHEET S300 3MMX228.6X372.7 GIRT SPLICE NC8 08-27065
212
Page 121
Description SKID-KD MHF7111 S300 Lit Pac Indicator F
F F 999 2377356 1 1 EA KIT FSTN Skid 4411 MH7111 S300-04 FSTN KIT
F E B18 2017531 8 8 EA SHEET S300 1.2mmX139.7X139.7 FILL TUBE 08-27033
HOLE
INT B
F E G01 2367417 2 2 EA SHEET S300 3MMX584.6X3633.9 MH7111 TM Z0737638 B
SKID
F E G02 2361277 2 2 EA SHEET S300 3MMX956.8X3556.4 MH7111 TM Z0737232 C
SKID
F E G05 2358057 4 4 EA SHEET S300 3MMX228.577X1610.087 MH7113 2013-
TM TOP B 22588
F E G07 2361281 4 4 EA SHEET S300 3MMX451.6X3569.1 MH7111 TM 2013-
TOP B 23881
F E G08 2031164 4 4 EA SHEET S300 1.5MMX152.9X3556.2 SKID BEAM Z0630016 A
FILL
F E G09 2025300 4 4 EA SHEET S300 1.5MMX96.8X1549.4 SKID SIDE 08-27387
FILLD
F E G10 2358061 2 2 EA SHEET S300 1.5MMX35.6X285.8 MH7113 TM 2013-
TOP F 22589
F E G11 2025301 4 4 EA SHEET S300 3MMX89.2X216.2 SKID BRACE NC84 08-27388 B
F E G16 2025297 4 4 EA SHEET S300 3MMX342.9X495.7 SKID SPLICE NC808-27384 B
SKID
SKID 23879
F E G21 2025302 4 4 EA SHEET S300 3MMX152.8X228.6 TIE ROD 08-27389 C
CHANNEL
213
Page 122
Description STRUCTURE TOP MOD - KD MHF7111 S300 Lit Pac Indicator F
F F 999 2377223 1 1 EA KIT FSTN Struct TM MH7111-13 S300- FSTN KIT

F E J01 2367409 4 4 EA SHEET S300 3MMX486.5X3487.2 MH7111 TM 2013-
COL 26576
F E J05 2031187 4 4 EA SHEET S300 3MMX461.0X2408.8 ME Z0630032 A
KBRACE-22&24
F E J36 2038427 2 2 EA SHEET S300 3MMX944.4X3483.0 ME BEAM Z0651761 C
NC8407,
214
Page 123
Description CASING CMPTS TOP MOD-GRDR MHF7111&13S S300 Lit Pac Indicator F
F F 999 2377128 1 1 EA KIT FSTN CASING TM MH711-13 S300-0 FSTN KIT

F E J07 2358109 1 1 EA SHEET S300 1.5MMX1250.1X2867 MH7113 TM 2013-
CSNG 23770
CSNG 23772
215
Page 124

CSNG 23770
CSNG 23772
216
Page 125
Description CASING-MTRSIDE-MIA-KD MHF7111&13S S300 Lit Pac Indicator F

CSNG 23774
217
Page 126

CSNG 23774
218
Page 127
Description LOUVER COLUMN&END BRACE-STD-KD MHF7111 TOP Lit Pac Indicator F
F F 999 2377296 1 1 EA KIT FSTN Louver Column TOP MH7111-13 S300- FSTN KIT
F F J24 2358133 2 2 EA SHEET S300 4MMX298X3493.5 MHF7113 TM Z0737142 A
LVR
F F J25 2358137 2 2 EA SHEET S300 4MMX298X3493.5 MH7113 TM LVR Z0737143 A
C
F E J27 2361285 4 4 EA ASSEMBLY S304 1/2 DIA TIE ROD MH7111 TM 2013-
TIERO 23882
NO.
219
Page 128
Description RECIRC PIPING TOP-KD MHF7111 S S300 Lit Pac Indicator F
F F 999 2377220 1 2 EA KIT FSTN Piping Top Mod MH7111-13 S300- FSTN KIT
F E Q73 2361368 1 2 EA SHEET S300 3MMX187.1X257.1 MHF7111 TM 2013-
INLE 23903
F E Q80 2358145 1 2 EA SHEET S300 3MMX156.7X257.1 MH7113 TM 2013-
INLET 23779
INLE 23904
SCH
F F QC6 E07057 1 2 EA PIPE PVC 6DIAX0'-11 3/8 SCH 40
F F QC8 2358411 1 2 EA PIPE PVC 6DIAX9'-8 7/8 SCH 40 FAB TO
SIZE
F F Z09 451799X 2 5 EA SEALER SOLVENT CEMENT WELD-ON TYPE #7
F F Z10 B50181 1 2 EA SEALER SOLVENT CEMENT PRIMER WELD-ON
220
Page 129
Description FILL SUPPORT - KD MHF7111-7113 S300 Lit Pac Indicator F
F F 999 2377150 1 1 EA KIT FSTN Fill Tube Support MH7111-13 S300- FSTN KIT
F E N25 B95482 8 8 EA SHEET S300 11GAX1.50X3.88 U-BOLT COVER 88-141 C
F F N98 2365799 8 8 EA U-BOLT S304 M6DIAX732 C=32 D=311 E=50 Z0333202 B
221
Page 130
Description FILL STRUCT TOP - KD W/TUBE HOLES MHF7111 Lit Pac Indicator F
F E 000 2537131 1 2 EA Top Fill Eliminator support-KD MHF7111 & MHF71 Z1044785
F F 999 2377351 1 2 EA KIT FSTN Fill Struct 4411 MH7111 S300-04 FSTN KIT
F E B07 2017577 4 8 EA SHEET S300 3MMX221.0X221.0 FILL TUBE SUPT- Z0624324 A
F E B08 2526110 2 4 EA SHEET S300 1.5MMX232.4X1270 MHF7111-13 Z1037526
FILL
F F B16 282855X 4 8 EA PLASTIC CAP NIAGARA #WWX230Q1 (YELLOW)
CHAIN 25418
F E H01 2362017 1 2 EA SHEET S300 1.5MMX1099.2X2871.7 MH7111 TM 2013-
CSNG 26240
F E H02 2362013 1 2 EA SHEET S300 1.5MMX1096.1X2871.7 MH7111 TM Z0737587 B
CSNG
CSNG 26238
CSNG 26244
F E H13 2025313 1 2 EA SHEET S300 1.5MMX35.6X2692.4 FILL DVRTR 08-27403
NC84
222
Page 131
Description MECH EQUIP PLTFRM TOP MHF7111 S300 - KD Lit Pac Indicator F
F F 999 2378277 1 1 EA KIT FSTN ME Internal Platform TOP MH7111-13 FSTN KIT
S300-
F E E29 2363167 2 2 EA SHEET S300 3MMX95.3X171.5 MHF7111-13 MEPF2013-
25701
F F K63 2361832 1 1 EA ASSEMBLY HDG GUARDRAIL MHF7111 A = 2013-
2050.6MM LA 25702
2050.6MM LA 25703
F E L07 2060784 8 8 EA SHEET S300 3MMX179.3X774.3 ME PLATFORM 09-27744
COL
F E L08 2363178 1 1 EA SHEET S300 3MMX273.5X3244.9 MH7111-13 2013-2114
MEPF
F E L10 2032274 4 4 EA SHEET S300 3MMX216.3X762.3 ME PLATFORM 09-21590 A
BEA
F E L11 2060783 1 1 EA SHEET S300 3MMX165.5X1606.9 ME PLATFORM 09-27743 B
GRA
F F L15 2372974 1 1 EA ASSEMBLY HDG GUARDRAIL MHF7113 A = Z0872873 A
1281.1MM LA
F F L17 2032287 2 2 EA GRATING FIBERGLASS 83% OPEN 1"THK 3'-0" 50238163 A
WDX 6'-10
F F L18 2363173 1 1 EA SHEET S300 4MMX203.2X1448.778 MH7111-13 2013-2111
MEPF
F E L20 2361829 2 2 EA SHEET S300 3MMX238.9X762.2 MH7111 MEPF 2013-
SUP 25709
F F L27 2032282 1 1 EA GRATING FIBERGLASS 83% OPEN 1"THK 1'-8 09-21593 A
9/16" WDX
F F L50 2023239 1 1 EA SHEET S300 4MMX152.4X803.8 ME PLTFM 08-26555
LADDER
F F L52 2363176 1 1 EA ASSEMBLY ALUM LADDER 7'-8 3/16" Z0737537 C
F F L57 2032281 1 1 EA GRATING FIBERGLASS 83% OPEN 1"THK 3'-0" 09-21592 A
WDX 6'-10
F E L75 2376065 3 3 EA SHEET S300 3MMX273.4X3244.9 MH7111-13 2013-
MEPFS 28213
F F L92 2372973 1 1 EA ASSEMBLY HDG GUARDRAIL MHF7113 A =
1281.1MM LA
F F Y20 D27889 46 46 EA HARDWARE S300 GRATING CLIP FIBERGRATE
TYPE
223
Page 132
Description LDR&GR POST CLIP FACE C-KD MHF7111-13 SHB Lit Pac Indicator F
F F 999 2377245 1 1 EA KIT FSTN LdrGRPostClipInstallFaceA MH7111 FSTN KIT

S300-04
F F L99 2034573 1 1 EA LABEL ACCESS WARNING-FAN BARRIER DECAL Z0628814 A
NC8400
224
Page 133
Description FILL MHF7111 MX75P60-12 MIL PVC - KD Lit Pac Indicator F
F E H11 2532829 95 190 EA PVC SHT MX75P60-8.1LEV -RIB Z1041777 B

.012X60"X125.5"
.012X60"X125.5"
225
Page 134
Description DECAL MHF7111-7113-TOP Lit Pac Indicator F
226
Page 135
Serial Number HF10243694A1TOP Product Allocation PLN-AS
Sub-Matl No. E63637 Drawing SEE TWR MANUAL
Description KIT CMNPTS & INSTR CPLG MC07 K/D Lit Pac Indicator F
F DMS DOCUMENT 1 1 PC Marley SofTork Series MC Coupling Z0592740 B

F F 000 512046X 1 1 EA HARDWARE FLEX ELEMENT DODGE 011107 EA
F F 000 E48551 2 2 EA RING EG MC07 07-2350
Z0596105 A
F F 000 E63643 1 1 EA KIT FSTN ME COUPLING COMPONENTS MC07 FSTN KIT
227
Page 159

228
Page 160

229
Page 161

SCREW PE
230
Page 162
Description KIT FSTN FANDECK 5.5 SPACE MHF7113 SHB Lit Pac Indicator F

SCREW PE
231
Page 163
Description KIT FSTN LDR&GR CASE FC W/O LDR MHF7111-13 Lit Pac Indicator F

127B
232
Page 164

127B
233
Page 165

234
Page 166

235
Page 167

236
Page 168

237
Page 169

127B
238
Page 170

127B
239
Page 171

SCREW PE
240
Page 172

SCREW PE
241
Page 173

242
Page 174

243
Page 175

244
Page 176

SCREW PE
245
Page 177

SCREW PE
F F X02 143685X 5 5 EA NUT S300 3/8
246
Page 178

SCREW PE
247
Page 179

SCREW PE
248
Page 180

SCREW PE
127B
249
Page 181

250
Page 182

251
Page 183

252
Page 184

SCREW PE
253
Page 185
SCREW PE
254
Page 186

255
Page 187

256
Page 188

CSNG 23834
CSNG 23835
CSNG 23864
CSNG 23869
CSNG 23868
CSNG 26558
COP
CS2 COP
CS6 COP
COP
257
Page 189
MHF71XX
DEKTITE ORIGINA
C
258
Page 190

BPF
259
Page 191
CWB S 23855
CWB D 27660
CWB F 23856
CWB F
CWB E 23853
CWB F
CWB D
CWB F 23791
CWB S
CWB S
CWB S 22567
TU EL 23812
CWB F
SIDE
SIDE
260
Page 192

CWB S 23961
261
Page 193

CWB S 23821
262
Page 194

CWB D 23854
263
Page 195

CSNG 23834
CSNG 23835
CSNG 23864
CSNG 23869
CSNG 23868
CSNG 23831
CSNG 23830
CSNG 23833
CSNG 26558
CSNG 23832
264
Page 196
EL 26565
RETAI
WTR S 23782
LVR F 26559
265
Page 197
266
Page 198
B 27359
B 27360
C
C
LVR C
LVR C
TIERO 23844
TIERO 26256
TIERO 23845
TIERO 23843
TIERO 28194
28195
NO.
267
Page 199
PUMP 22980
22979
DBL F 23924
22982
SI 23925
268
Page 200
BL 27358
MCM-CARR#5663K1
269
Page 201
Description LOUVER FACE PLATFORM MHF7111 MULTI CELL LT Lit Pac Indicator F
PLATFORM 25997
PLATFORM 25998
PLATFORM 25999
PLAT 27336
PLAT 27337
PLAT 27338
PLAT 27339
SUPPOR
TOEBO 21424
WKWY 21425
A = 636.6MM LAB
1739.9MM LA
270
Page 202
Description LOUVER FACE PLATFORM MHF7111 MULTI CELL RT Lit Pac Indicator F
PLATFORM 25997
PLATFORM 25998
PLATFORM 25999
PLAT 27336
PLAT 27337
PLAT 27338
PLAT 27339
SUPPOR
TOEBO 21424
WKWY 21425
A = 1739.9MM LA
A = 636.6MM LAB
271
Page 203
PWW B
DBL F
272
Page 204
FL
273
Page 205
MID C
MID C
BM WLDMN
C
C
C
C
274
Page 206
275
Page 207

PLATE-USA
276
Page 208

VINYL 231
277
Page 209
278
Page 210

GEAR DRIVE
279
Page 211
COIL
INNER
COIL
INNER
INT D 23963
INT D 28193
STOP
BM DOOR 22987
EL
BM TU EL 23816
ELIM 23815
MCMASTER-CARR #
280
Page 212
S300-04
SUP
P
GIRT
INT B
INT B
GIRT
GIRT
FLO
INT B
PLENUM
LVR CO
LVR CO
LVR CO
FIL
FIL
FIL
FIL
EXT
EXT
FIL
281
C
Page 214

.012X60"X24.3"(
.012X60"X24.3"(
282
Page 215
S300-
PIPIN
4
SCH
SIZE
FIL
283
Page 234
284
Page 235

285
Page 236

286
Page 237

287
Page 238

288
Page 239

289
Page 240

290
Page 241

291
Page 242

292
Page 243

SCREW PE
293
Page 244

SCREW PE
127B
294
Page 245
SCREW PE
295
Page 246

SCREW PE
296
Page 247
Description KIT FSTN LdrGRPostClipInstallFaceA MH7111 GALV Lit Pac Indicator F

127B
297
Page 248

298
Page 249

127B
127B
299
Page 250

300
Page 251

S300
NC8407-14
NC8407-14
NC8407-
NC84
301
Page 252

SLOT
302
Page 253

303
Page 254

HWB F 23894
HWB E
I 23896
HWB F 23895
HWB E 23764
HWB F 23951
N
END S
22569
SUPT
NC840
304
Page 255
GIRT
CLIP
Z0624293 A
FAN D
LUBE L
FAN D
SUPPO
FAN D
FAN D 23901
FAN D 26218
FAN D 26219
NC8400
GIRT
GIRT 23891
305
Page 256
HOLE
INT B
SKID
SKID
TM TOP B 22588
TOP B 23881
FILL
FILLD
TOP F 22589
SKID
SKID 23879
CHANNEL
306
Page 257

COL 26576
KBRACE-22&24
NC8407,
307
Page 258

CSNG 23770
CSNG 23772
308
Page 259

CSNG 23770
CSNG 23772
309
Page 260

CSNG 23774
310
Page 261

CSNG 23774
311
Page 262
LVR
C
TIERO 23882
NO.
312
Page 263
INLE 23903
INLET 23779
INLE 23904
SCH
SIZE
313
Page 264
314
Page 265
FILL
CHAIN 25418
CSNG 26240
CSNG
CSNG 26238
CSNG 26244
NC84
315
Page 266
S300-
25701
2050.6MM LA 25702
2050.6MM LA 25703
COL
MEPF
BEA
GRA
1281.1MM LA
WDX 6'-10
MEPF
SUP 25709
9/16" WDX
LADDER
WDX 6'-10
MEPFS 28213
1281.1MM LA
TYPE
316
Page 267
Description LDR&GR POST CLIP FACE A-KD MHF7111 GC Lit Pac Indicator F

GALV
NC8400
317
Page 268

.012X60"X125.5"
.012X60"X125.5"
318
Page 269
319
Page 270

F F 000 E48551 2 2 EA RING EG MC07 07-2350
Z0596105 A
320
Page 295

321
Page 296

322
Page 297

SCREW PE
323
Page 298
Description KIT FSTN FANDECK 37.75 SPACE MHF7113 SHB SS Lit Pac Indicator F

SCREW PE
F F VM1 UKA7050-805G 40 40 EA BOLT GALV M8X25 ISO4017 DIN933-G8.8 ALL
127B
127B
324
Page 299
Description KIT FSTN LDR&GR CASE FC W/O LDR MHF7111-13 Lit Pac Indicator F

127B
325
Page 300

127B
326
Page 301

327
Page 302

328
Page 303

329
Page 304

330
Page 305

127B
331
Page 306

127B
332
Page 307

SCREW PE
333
Page 308

SCREW PE
334
Page 309

335
Page 310

336
Page 311

337
Page 312

SCREW PE
338
Page 313

SCREW PE
F F X02 143685X 5 5 EA NUT S300 3/8
339
Page 314

SCREW PE
340
Page 315

SCREW PE
341
Page 316

SCREW PE
127B
342
Page 317

343
Page 318

344
Page 319

345
Page 320

SCREW PE
346
Page 321
SCREW PE
347
Page 322

348
Page 323
Description KIT FSTN LFPF ALUM LDR MH7111-13 Lit Pac Indicator F

127B
127B
349
Page 324

350
Page 325

CSNG 23834
CSNG 23835
CSNG 23864
CSNG 23869
CSNG 23868
CSNG 26558
COP
CS2 COP
CS6 COP
COP
351
Page 326
MHF71XX
DEKTITE ORIGINA
C
352
Page 327

BPF
353
Page 328
CWB S 23855
CWB D 27660
CWB F 23856
CWB F
CWB E 23853
CWB F
CWB D
CWB F 23791
CWB S
CWB S
CWB S 22567
TU EL 23812
CWB F
SIDE
SIDE
354
Page 329

CWB S 23961
355
Page 330

CWB S 23821
356
Page 331

CWB D 23854
357
Page 332

CSNG 23834
CSNG 23835
CSNG 23864
CSNG 23869
CSNG 23868
CSNG 23831
CSNG 23830
CSNG 23833
CSNG 26558
CSNG 23832
358
Page 333
EL 26565
RETAI
WTR S 23782
LVR F 26559
359
Page 334
360
Page 335
B 27359
B 27360
C
C
LVR C
LVR C
TIERO 23844
TIERO 26256
TIERO 23845
TIERO 23843
TIERO 28194
28195
NO.
361
Page 336
PUMP 22980
22979
DBL F 23924
22982
SI 23925
362
Page 337
BL 27358
MCM-CARR#5663K1
363
Page 338
PLATFORM 25997
PLATFORM 25998
PLATFORM 25999
PLAT 27336
PLAT 27337
PLAT 27338
PLAT 27339
SUPPOR
TOEBO 21424
WKWY 21425
A = 1778MM LABE
A = 636.6MM LAB
F F L32 2372006 1 1 EA ASSEMBLY HDG GUARDRAIL MHF7111 A = 09-2691 B
1092.2MM LA
364
Page 339
PLATFORM 25997
PLATFORM 25998
PLATFORM 25999
PLAT 27336
PLAT 27337
PLAT 27338
PLAT 27339
SUPPOR
TOEBO 21424
WKWY 21425
F F L12 2216562 1 1 EA ASSEMBLY HDG GR LOUVER PLATFORM NC8400 Z0654949 A
A = 1092.2MM LA
A = 1778MM LABE
A = 636.6MM LAB
365
Page 340
PWW B
DBL F
366
Page 341
FL
367
Page 342
MID C
MID C
BM WLDMN
C
C
C
C
368
Page 343
369
Page 344

PLATE-USA
370
Page 345

VINYL 231
371
Page 346
372
Page 347

GEAR DRIVE
373
Page 348
COIL
INNER
COIL
INNER
INT D 23963
INT D 28193
STOP
BM DOOR 22987
EL
BM TU EL 23816
ELIM 23815
MCMASTER-CARR #
374
Page 349
S300-04
SUP
P
GIRT
INT B
INT B
GIRT
GIRT
FLO
INT B
PLENUM
LVR CO
LVR CO
LVR CO
FIL
FIL
FIL
FIL
EXT
EXT
FIL
375
C
Page 351

.012X60"X24.3"(
.012X60"X24.3"(
376
Page 352
S300-
PIPIN
4
SCH
SIZE
FIL
377
Page 370
378
Page 371

379
Page 372

380
Page 373

381
Page 374

382
Page 375

383
Page 376

384
Page 377

385
Page 378

386
Page 379

SCREW PE
387
Page 380

SCREW PE
127B
388
Page 381
SCREW PE
389
Page 382

SCREW PE
390
Page 383
Description KIT FSTN LdrGRPostClipInstallFaceA MH7111 GALV Lit Pac Indicator F

127B
391
Page 384

392
Page 385

127B
127B
393
Page 386

394
Page 387

S300
NC8407-14
NC8407-14
NC8407-
NC84
395
Page 388

SLOT
396
Page 389

397
Page 390

HWB F 23894
HWB E
I 23896
HWB F 23895
HWB E 23764
HWB F 23951
N
END S
22569
SUPT
NC840
398
Page 391
GIRT
CLIP
Z0624293 A
FAN D
LUBE L
FAN D
SUPPO
FAN D
FAN D 23901
FAN D 26218
FAN D 26219
NC8400
GIRT
GIRT 23891
399
Page 392
HOLE
INT B
SKID
SKID
TM TOP B 22588
TOP B 23881
FILL
FILLD
TOP F 22589
SKID
SKID 23879
CHANNEL
400
Page 393

COL 26576
KBRACE-22&24
NC8407,
401
Page 394

CSNG 23770
CSNG 23772
402
Page 395

CSNG 23770
CSNG 23772
403
Page 396

CSNG 23774
404
Page 397

CSNG 23774
405
Page 398
LVR
C
TIERO 23882
NO.
406
Page 399
INLE 23903
INLET 23779
INLE 23904
SCH
SIZE
407
Page 400
408
Page 401
FILL
CHAIN 25418
CSNG 26240
CSNG
CSNG 26238
CSNG 26244
NC84
409
Page 402
S300-
25701
2050.6MM LA 25702
2050.6MM LA 25703
COL
MEPF
BEA
GRA
1281.1MM LA
WDX 6'-10
MEPF
SUP 25709
9/16" WDX
LADDER
WDX 6'-10
MEPFS 28213
1281.1MM LA
TYPE
410
Page 403
Description LDR&GR POST CLIP FACE C-KD MHF7111-13 GC Lit Pac Indicator F

GALV
NC8400
411
Page 404

.012X60"X125.5"
.012X60"X125.5"
412
Page 405
413
Page 406

F F 000 E48551 2 2 EA RING EG MC07 07-2350
Z0596105 A
414
Page 429

415
Page 430

416
Page 431

SCREW PE
417
Page 432
Description KIT FSTN FANDECK 37.75 SPACE MHF7113 SHB SS Lit Pac Indicator F

SCREW PE
F F VM1 UKA7050-805G 40 40 EA BOLT GALV M8X25 ISO4017 DIN933-G8.8 ALL
127B
127B
418
Page 433
Description KIT FSTN LDR&GR CASE FC W/LDR W/O FDEXT Lit Pac Indicator F

127B
127B
419
Page 434

127B
420
Page 435

421
Page 436

422
Page 437

423
Page 438

424
Page 439
Description KIT FSTN AD Platform MH7111-13 GALV Lit Pac Indicator F

127B
127B
425
Page 440

127B
426
Page 441

127B
427
Page 442

SCREW PE
428
Page 443

SCREW PE
429
Page 444

430
Page 445

431
Page 446

432
Page 447

SCREW PE
433
Page 448

SCREW PE
F F X02 143685X 5 5 EA NUT S300 3/8
434
Page 449

SCREW PE
435
Page 450

SCREW PE
436
Page 451

SCREW PE
127B
437
Page 452

438
Page 453

439
Page 454
Description KIT FSTN SAFETY CAGE W/O ADPF&MOAPF Lit Pac Indicator F

F F V23 UKA7051-215G 4 4 EA BOLT GALV M12X75 DIN931-G8.8
127B
440
Page 455

SCREW PE
441
Page 456
SCREW PE
442
Page 457

443
Page 458

444
Page 459

CSNG 23834
CSNG 23835
CSNG 23864
CSNG 23869
CSNG 23868
CSNG 26558
COP
CS2 COP
CS6 COP
COP
445
Page 460
MHF71XX
DEKTITE ORIGINA
C
446
Page 461

BPF
447
Page 462
CWB S 23855
CWB D 27660
CWB F 23856
CWB F
CWB E 23853
CWB F
CWB D
CWB F 23791
CWB S
CWB S
CWB S 22567
TU EL 23812
CWB F
SIDE
SIDE
448
Page 463

CWB S 23961
449
Page 464

CWB S 23821
450
Page 465

CWB D 23854
451
Page 466

CSNG 23834
CSNG 23835
CSNG 23864
CSNG 23869
CSNG 23868
CSNG 23831
CSNG 23830
CSNG 23833
CSNG 26558
CSNG 23832
452
Page 467
EL 26565
RETAI
WTR S 23782
LVR F 26559
453
Page 468
454
Page 469
B 27359
B 27360
C
C
LVR C
LVR C
TIERO 23844
TIERO 26256
TIERO 23845
TIERO 23843
TIERO 28194
28195
NO.
455
Page 470
PUMP 22980
22979
DBL F 23924
22982
SI 23925
456
Page 471
BL 27358
MCM-CARR#5663K1
457
Page 472
Description LOUVER FACE PLATFORM MHF7111 MULTI CELL LT Lit Pac Indicator F
PLATFORM 25997
PLATFORM 25998
PLATFORM 25999
PLAT 27336
PLAT 27337
PLAT 27338
PLAT 27339
SUPPOR
TOEBO 21424
WKWY 21425
A = 636.6MM LAB
1739.9MM LA
458
Page 473
Description LOUVER FACE PLATFORM MHF7111 MULTI CELL RT Lit Pac Indicator F
PLATFORM 25997
PLATFORM 25998
PLATFORM 25999
PLAT 27336
PLAT 27337
PLAT 27338
PLAT 27339
SUPPOR
TOEBO 21424
WKWY 21425
A = 1739.9MM LA
A = 636.6MM LAB
459
Page 474
PWW B
DBL F
460
Page 475
FL
461
Page 476
MID C
MID C
BM WLDMN
C
C
C
C
462
Page 477
463
Page 478

PLATE-USA
464
Page 479

VINYL 231
465
Page 480
466
Page 481

GEAR DRIVE
467
Page 482
COIL
INNER
COIL
INNER
INT D 23963
INT D 28193
STOP
BM DOOR 22987
EL
BM TU EL 23816
ELIM 23815
MCMASTER-CARR #
468
Page 483
S300-04
SUP
P
GIRT
INT B
INT B
GIRT
GIRT
FLO
INT B
PLENUM
LVR CO
LVR CO
LVR CO
FIL
FIL
FIL
FIL
EXT
EXT
FIL
469
C
Page 485

.012X60"X24.3"(
.012X60"X24.3"(
470
Page 486
S300-
PIPIN
4
SCH
SIZE
FIL
471
Page 508
472
Page 509

473
Page 510

474
Page 511

475
Page 512

476
Page 513

477
Page 514

478
Page 515

479
Page 516
Description KIT FSTN LdrGRPostClipInstallFaceA MH7111 S300-04 Lit Pac Indicator F

480
Page 517

481
Page 518

SCREW PE
482
Page 519

SCREW PE
127B
483
Page 520
SCREW PE
484
Page 521

SCREW PE
485
Page 522

486
Page 523

127B
127B
487
Page 524

488
Page 525

S300
NC8407-14
NC8407-14
NC8407-
NC84
489
Page 526

SLOT
490
Page 527

491
Page 528

HWB F 23894
HWB E
I 23896
HWB F 23895
HWB E 23764
HWB F 23951
N
END S
22569
SUPT
NC840
492
Page 529
GIRT
CLIP
Z0624293 A
FAN D
LUBE L
FAN D
SUPPO
FAN D
FAN D 23901
FAN D 26218
FAN D 26219
NC8400
GIRT
GIRT 23891
493
Page 530
HOLE
INT B
SKID
SKID
TM TOP B 22588
TOP B 23881
FILL
FILLD
TOP F 22589
SKID
SKID 23879
CHANNEL
494
Page 531

COL 26576
KBRACE-22&24
NC8407,
495
Page 532

CSNG 23770
CSNG 23772
496
Page 533

CSNG 23770
CSNG 23772
497
Page 534

CSNG 23774
498
Page 535

CSNG 23774
499
Page 536
LVR
C
TIERO 23882
NO.
500
Page 537
INLE 23903
INLET 23779
INLE 23904
SCH
SIZE
501
Page 538
502
Page 539
FILL
CHAIN 25418
CSNG 26240
CSNG
CSNG 26238
CSNG 26244
NC84
503
Page 540
S300-
25701
2050.6MM LA 25702
2050.6MM LA 25703
COL
MEPF
BEA
GRA
1281.1MM LA
WDX 6'-10
MEPF
SUP 25709
9/16" WDX
LADDER
WDX 6'-10
MEPFS 28213
1281.1MM LA
TYPE
504
Page 541
Description LDR&GR POST CLIP FACE A-KD MHF7111 SHB S300 Lit Pac Indicator F

S300-04
NC8400
505
Page 542

.012X60"X125.5"
.012X60"X125.5"
506
Page 543
507
Page 544

F F 000 E48551 2 2 EA RING EG MC07 07-2350
Z0596105 A
508
Q18
Solid Edge
CONFIDENTIAL AND CONSTITUTE THE EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF SPX SIDE DRAIN PLUG INSTALLATION
REPRODUCED OR COPIED EITHER IN WHOLE OR PART WITHOUT THE PRIOR
WRITTEN CONSENT OF SPX COOLING TECHNOLOGIES.
C AS OF DATE(S) IN TITLE BLOCK SPX COOLING TECHNOLOGIES
UNPUBLISHED-ALL RIGHTS RESERVED UNDER COPYRIGHT LAWS. D. JENKINS 2-3-2006 MN 1=1 06-21113
509
Page 18
Sub-Matl No. E22592 Drawing 06-21113
Description SIDE DRAIN PLUG MHF702-705 SS PAC Lit Pac Indicator F
F F Q18 A20889 1 1 EA FITTING S300 PIPE PLUG 3DIA EXT SQ HD
510
Page 156
511
Page 292
512
Page 426
513
FANDECK
X61
L05
VP3
GIRT
FIND NO. PARTS LIST DESCRIPTION

V07 BOLT, M10 X 25MM
VP3 W02** LOCK WASHER, M10
W22 FLAT WASHER, M10
X02* NUT, M10
X61 General Notes
* Use Nyloc Nut for SS fastener • SEE MATERIAL MASTER FOR FACE DESIGNATION.
Solid Edge
CONFIDENTIAL AND CONSTITUTE THE EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF SPX 15071 FANDECK WALKWAY SUPPORT INSTALLATION
NOT BE MADE PUBLIC IN ANY MANNER, DISTRIBUTED OR LOANED TO REV. BY CHECKED FAP
OTHERS, OR REPRODUCED OR COPIED EITHER IN WHOLE OR PART WITHOUT
THE PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT OF SPX COOLING TECHNOLOGIES, INC. GSZ OCY
UNPUBLISHED-ALL RIGHTS RESERVED UNDER COPYRIGHT LAWS. 7-11-2011 SNOW 3/18/09 MAM 1=1 09-22250 A
514
Page 98
Serial Number HF10243694A1TOP Product Allocation OPTION
Sub-Matl No. 2033903 Drawing 09-22250
Description WALKWAY SUPPORT 5 1/2",3'&4'-6" AB TO AB Lit Pac Indicator F
F F 999 2044131 1 1 EA KIT FSTN WALKWAY SUP CLIP INST S300 FSTN KIT
NC8411,13
F E L05 2033895 1 1 EA SHEET S300 2.5MMX83.4X660.4 FDWW SUP 09-22248
NC8411
515
Page 233
NC8411,13
NC8411
516
Page 369
NC8411,13
NC8411
517
Page 507
NC8411,13
NC8411
518
519
Page 20
Serial Number HF10243694A1LOW Product Allocation OPTION
Sub-Matl No. C01515 Drawing 97-156
Description OBSTRUCTION EXISTS ON WW DECAL Lit Pac Indicator F
F F L76 B40844 1 2 EA LABEL OBSTRUCTIONS EXIST ON WW DECAL 94-1205
520
Page 158
521
Page 294
522
Page 428
523
V07 M10 X 25 BOLT
VM1 M8 X 25 BOLT
W02 M10 SPRING WASHER
W48 M8 SPRING WASHER
X02 M10 NUT Q27
X12 M10 NUT S300 SELF-LOCKING
X19 M8 NUT S300 SELF-LOCKING
X47 M8 NUT
Q30
N58
Q25
Q32
Q34
N58 K41
Q26
Q34 Q33
Q26
ISOLATED VIEW FOR CLARITY

General Notes
• Refer to the beginning steps in the Tower Assembly Manual for installing Float
Valve piping installation. Begin with attaching the float valve support Q25 to the
casing.
• Using pipe joint compound Z04 on all pipe connections, install coupling K41,
pipe Q32, 45° elbow N58, pipe Q34 and 90° elbow Q26 (make sure 90° elbow
is pointing down).
VIEW FROM INSIDE OF TOWER
• Finish by installing support clip Q27, diagonal support Q30 & clamp Q33.
• Fasteners used for installation of the Water Makeup are the same as those
used for standard float valve installation shown in the Tower Assembly
Manual.
Solid Edge
CONFIDENTIAL AND CONSTITUTE THE EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF WATER MAKEUP INSTALLATION
SPX COOLING TECHNOLOGIES, INC. THIS DOCUMENT AND ITS
CONTENTS MAY NOT BE MADE PUBLIC IN ANY MANNER, REV. BY CHECKED MHF
DISTRIBUTED OR LOANED TO OTHERS, OR REPRODUCED OR
COPIED EITHER IN WHOLE OR PART WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN FAP
CONSENT OF SPX COOLING TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
© AS OF DATE(S) IN TITLE BLOCK SPX COOLING TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
UNPUBLISHED-ALL RIGHTS RESERVED UNDER COPYRIGHT LAWS. J. BRAYMEN 05/09/2017 BEM BEM 1=1 Z1052195
524
Page 86
Sub-Matl No. 2819093 Drawing SEE TWR MANUAL,Z1052195
Description WATER MAKEUP 01DIA - NPT MHF7111-13 S300-304 Lit Pac Indicator F
F F K41 265769X 1 1 EA FITTING S304 CPLG FULL 1DIA NPT TAPER THD
F F N58 2073221 1 1 EA FITTING S304 ELL 45DG 1DIA
F E Q25 2375636 1 1 EA ASSEMBLY S304 FLOAT VALVE SUPT 1" DIA. Z1006909 A
MH7111 NPT
F F Q26 B74504 1 1 EA FITTING S304 ELL 90DG 1DIA NPT
F E Q27 2312390 1 1 EA SHEET S304 1.5MMX101.6X107.7 MHF71XX 2012- A
FLOAT V 25428
FLOAT V 25429
F E Q32 E29957 1 1 EA PIPE S304 1DIAX2'-3 3/4 NPT BOTH ENDS S
F F Q33 2314317 1 1 EA TOP MOUNT CLAMP HANGER 1DIA WITH BOLT
F E Q34 336446X 1 1 EA PIPE S304 1DIAX0'-6 NPTBE SCH 40 CLEANED
F F Q35 140277X 1 1 EA LABEL FLOAT VALVE DECAL 85-2931
F F Q99 380386X 1 1 EA PLASTIC THREAD PROT CAP 1DIA NIAGARA #3
F F V07 2819092 2 2 EA KIT FSTN WATER MAKEUP MHF7111-13 S300 FSTN KIT
F F Z04 A00030 1 1 EA SEALER LOCTITE 592-14 PIPE SEAL W/TFL
525
Page 223
MH7111 NPT
FLOAT V 25428
FLOAT V 25429
526
Page 359
MH7111 NPT
FLOAT V 25428
FLOAT V 25429
527
Page 412
MANUAL
Z1052195
FSTN KIT
3DIA
Z SPIRAL TAR
NPT GRP
26818
528
Page 495
MH7111 NPT
FLOAT V 25428
FLOAT V 25429
529
Reference Fastener Kit: KIT FSTN MOTOR
Field Installed Motor NC8400
FIELD INSTALLED MOTOR
For field installation of motor inside the tower refer to Figure
1. Attach motor to motor supports and install drive coupling
M28. Refer to Close Coupling Service Manual for
installation instructions. Use shims Y56 as required, to align
drive coupling. After installing drive coupling, coat motor
and Geareducer shafts with paint.
CAUTION: Excessive
force when installing the Fan
drive coupling could
damge Geareducer seal.
See Service Manual for
installation instructions.
M28
B
Motor
Y56
As required
Do not apply anti-seize compound to

stainless steel motor hold down bolts.
Loctite will be applied to these
attachments later.
A Figure 1 Y56
NC8401 thru NC8414 As required
MOTOR ATTACHMENT HARDWARE
FIND NO. FIND NO.
MOTOR FRAME PARTS LIST DESCRIPTION PARTS LIST DESCRIPTION
A B
V10 BOLT, M10X 40MM X02 * NUT, M10
184T THRU 215T VP4 W02 ** LOCK WASHER, M10 X61 W22 FLAT WASHER, M10
VB1 BOLT, M16 X 65MM X05 * NUT, M16
254T THRU 365T VPG W04 ** LOCK WASHER, M16 X63 W29 FLAT WASHER, M16
404T THRU 447T VPN V39 BOLT, M20 X 90MM X64 X04 * NUT, M20
449T VPL VC4 BOLT, M20 X 65MM X64 X04 * NUT, M20
09-1270B - NC8400 Field Install - Field Installed Motor PAGE 1 OF 3

530
FAN INSTALLATION Tower Model A
Step One (NC8401 thru NC8414) NC8401 1/2" (13mm)
On towers with field install motor, final fan adjustments must be made NC8402 1/2" (13mm)
after motor is in place. Fan blades are pitched to contract requirements in
NC8403 1/2" (13mm)
the plant. Fan blade tip clearance, tip track, and fan tilt must be adjusted
NC8405 1/2" (13mm)
in the field, as indicated in Figure 4. Tower must be plumb and cylinder
NC8407 1/2" (13mm)
centered around fan to provide proper tip clearance. Use longest blade
NC8409 1/2" (13mm)
and check all around cylinder for tip clearance. Be certain each blade is in
NC8411 1/2" (13mm)
its furtherst out position.
NC8412 1/2" (13mm)
NC8413 1/2" (13mm)
All blades when rotated past the same NC8414 1/2" (13mm)
location on the cylinder must be same
Any single blade must be same distance from distance from fan deck within ±A"
fan deck to fan blade around perimeter of
cylinder within a range of one inch (25mm)
Fan blade
Fan blade
Fan cylinder
Fan cylinder
Tip Track Check
If not within tolerance,
Fan Tilt Check recheck blade, blade
Adjust by shimming attachment and fan
Geareducer while pitch.
maintaining alignment
with motor. To attach Fan to Geareducer, Clean geareducer shaft and apply
use cap screw and lock washer anti-seize compound. After fan is
provided with Geareducer. installed, clean exposed shaft and
coat with rust inhibiting paint.
M21 Fan
Inside of A u1/8" (u3mm)

cylinder
Bevel protractor
Fan blade
pitch angle Fan rotation
u1/4v
Blade Tip Clearance Check Fan Blade Pitch Detail
Adjust by repositioning Geareducer (Cofimco Fans)
within cylinder or by adjusting fan
cylinder.
Figure 4

531
FAN INSTALLATION FIND NO. DESCRIPTION
Step Two (NC8401 thru NC8414) Y55 3/8" X 1 1/2" SPIROL PIN
After all drive coupling and fan adjustments have been made refer to
Figure 5. Tighten each motor and Geareducer nut 5 to 10 ft-lbs (7 to 13
Nm) less than specified torque while holding bolt head. Retighten nuts
to specified torque. Bolt heads may be tightened while holding nut if
nut is not accessible with torque wrench. Now apply thread locking
compound Z05 to all bolt threads. On towers with series 2000, 2200,
2400, or 3000 Geareducers, using pilot holes in Geareducer feet, drill
two 23/64" (9mm) diameter holes through support and install drive pins
Y55.
FASTENER TORQUE @
MOTOR AND GEAREDUCER HOLD-
DOWN FASTENERS ONLY
FASTENER TORQUE
BOLT FOOT-LBS. (NEWTON-METERS)
DIAMETER GALVANIZED STAINLESS STEEL
(UNLUBRICATED) (UNLUBRICATED)
10MM 30-32 (42-43) 34-36 (46-48)
12MM 64-66 (87-90) 85-90 (115-122)
16MM 135-140 (183-190) 125-130 (169-176)
20MM 220-230 (298-312) 195-205 (264-278)
Y55
After rechecking alignment,
drill thru support and drive
pin to project an equal
distance above
Geareducer foot and below
support.

532
Page 19
Sub-Matl No. E82235SS Drawing 09-1270,FSTN KIT
Description KIT FSTN MOTOR 254T-286T -SS METRIC Lit Pac Indicator F

533
Page 141
FSTN KIT
3DIA
Z SPIRAL TAR
NPT GRP
26818
534
Page 157

535
Page 276

FSTN KIT
3DIA
Z SPIRAL TAR
NPT GRP
26818
536
Page 293

537
Page 427

538
Reference Fastener Kit: KIT FSTN FANGUARD INSTALL
Fan Guard NC8400 and MHF7111-13
D32
D34
FAN DECK
A
X60 X60
N97
(Use VP0 when

Pre-installed installed on
VP1 at factory Fan Cylinder
Extension)
X60
VP0
DETAIL B
FAN GUARD DETAIL A
A single piece fan guard is provided on models NC8401
thru NC8403, Models NC 8405 thru NC8414 and FIND NO. PARTS LIST DESCRIPTION
MHF7111 thru MHF7113 use a two piece fan guard and VM1 BOLT, M8 X 25MM
require guard splice hardware. On models with a single VP0 W48** LOCK WASHER, M8
piece fan guard, position guard D32 over cylinder and W24 FLAT WASHER, M8
raise center to align holes in fan cylinder. On models X47* NUT, M8
with a two piece fan guard, guard D32 is installed first X60
W24 FLAT WASHER, M8
and a splice clip N97 is used to retain guard D34. * Use Nyloc Nut for SS fastener
Note: If fan cylinder option is included that would be ** Lock Washer only required for GALV fastener
installed prior to fan guard.
Z0628389_C - NC8400 and MHF7111-13 Field Install - Fan Guard PAGE 1 OF 1

539
Page 136
Description FAN GUARD-GALV-PAC NC8410-LOW MODULE Lit Pac Indicator F
F F D32 A93965 1 1 EA ASSEMBLY HDG FAN GUARD W/SUPT 132DIA Z0239586 A

ORDER W/
F F D34 574590X 1 1 EA ASSEMBLY HDG FAN GUARD 132DIA ORDER W/ Z0178856 A
A93965
540
Page 271

ORDER W/
A93965
541
Page 407

ORDER W/
A93965
542
Page 545

ORDER W/
A93965
543
CWB SIDE
CWB SIDE
N56
N81
N57
N55 B N65
N79
N75
N79
N55
N86
N70 N68
N61
A N77
N57
N54
N76 N76
N71 N53 N85 N78
N58
N74 N74 C N65 N85
CWB END
N65
N59
N67 N79
N84
N61
N71
N83
F F DETAIL B
N70 N82 N65 N54 DETAIL A 7
N70
N52
E E
N61
Q49 N50 N60
N75 Q49 N79
N72 N58
N65 or N61
N57 N55 D N65
N81 N51 G
D
N67 N80
G FIND NO. DESCRIPTION
DETAIL C SECTION E-E
N63 N64 VM1 Bolt M8X25 General Notes
N70 CWB SIDE
1. Piping to be installed after cold water basin modifications are made.
W24 Washer SC M8
N56 W37 Washer Sealing M8 2. Apply PVC cement (F/N Z22) to mating joints only per E.S. 37513.
CWB SIDE N68 or N84 X19 Nut S300 Self-Locking M8
3. Pipe (F/N N55) to follow slope of floor. Adjust fittings as required.
W24 X47 Nut M8
W37 VM1
N62 4 Do not install nozzles (F/N N59) until all other components have been
attached. After installation, turn nozzles parallel the raised CWB floor
to prevent damage.
CWB FLOOR
N56 5 Others will reposition nozzles (F/N N59) in field.
N81 GALV.TWR X19
6 Make sure cable ties (F/N N80) are tight against the piping. "Glue" (F/N N68)
N63 Q47 down to floor using sealer (F/N Z11). Clean mating surfaces before "gluing".
N59 SS.TWR X19
DEPRESSED FLOOR
Apply a 9mm bead of 7 Install K-Ball with nozzles to spray horizontal to basin floor.
sealer (F/N Z11) around &
between holes
8 Refer to Assenbly Manual for outlet installation details (uses standard drain
as outlet).
SECTION D-D SECTION F-F 4 5 6 SECTION G-G
Solid Edge
CONFIDENTIAL AND CONSTITUTE THE EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF SPX SWEEPER SYSTEM INSTALL SIDE INLET
NOT BE MADE PUBLIC IN ANY MANNER, DISTRIBUTED OR LOANED TO REV. BY CHECKED MHF7111 THRU MHF7113
OTHERS, OR REPRODUCED OR COPIED EITHER IN WHOLE OR PART WITHOUT
THE PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT OF SPX COOLING TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
UNPUBLISHED-ALL RIGHTS RESERVED UNDER COPYRIGHT LAWS. GUI 12/26/13 AMA CGW 1=1 Z0897996
544
Page 79
Sub-Matl No. 2368855 Drawing Z0897996
Description LAKOS SWEEPER SYSTEM - KD MHF7111 S304 INLET Lit Pac Indicator F
F F 999 2374888 1 1 EA KIT FSTN Sweeper MH7111-13 S300- FSTN KIT

F F N50 C66873 1 1 EA FITTING PVC UNION FEMALE 4DIA (SXS) SCH
F F N51 2374864 1 1 EA PIPE PVC 4DIAX1'-7 3/8 NPT ONE END SCH
F F N52 2374865 1 1 EA PIPE PVC 4DIAX1'-7 3/8 SCH 80
F F N53 A20309 1 1 EA FITTING PVC TEE 4DIA SCH 80
F F N54 C71830 4 4 EA FITTING PVC CPLG FULL 2 1/2 DIA SCH 8
F F N55 2362042 4 4 EA PIPE PVC 2.5DIAX5'-4 SCH80 2013-
26252
F F N56 A85029 16 16 EA FITTING PVC ELBOW 90DG 2 1/2DIA SCH 80
F F N57 2361900 4 4 EA PIPE PVC 2.5DIAX2'-8 SCH 80 Z0737521 B
F F N58 2361901 2 2 EA PIPE PVC 2.5DIAX5#-3/16 SCH 80 Z0737522 A
F F N59 C48217 14 14 EA FITTING LAKOS 3/4 HYDRO- HB-10-K BOOSTER
NOZZLE
F F N60 A79391 2 2 EA FITTING PVC PIPE PLUG 3/4DIA NPT SCH
F F N61 D07479 4 4 EA PIPE PVC 1/2DIAX3'-0 NPT BOTH ENDS S
F F N62 2360922 6 6 EA FITTING PVC NIPPLE 1'-1" LONG 3/4DIA SCH 80
F F N63 C48218 12 12 EA FITTING PVC ELBOW 90DG 3/4 DIA THDXTHD
F F N64 D16198 6 6 EA FITTING PVC NIPPLE 4" LONG 3/4DIA SCH 80
F E N68 2362038 4 4 EA SHEET S304 1.5MMX117.5X521.1 MH7111 PIPE 2013- A
SUP 26250
F F N70 2362040 4 4 EA PIPE PVC 2.5DIAX4'-1 1/4 SCH80 2013-
26251
F F N71 A33236 4 4 EA FITTING PVC BSHG RED 3X2 1/2 SCH 80
F F N72 D07484 12 12 EA FITTING PVC CPLG FULL 1/2 DIA (THREAD
F F N74 2362043 2 2 EA PIPE PVC 3DIAX1'-10 SCH40 FAB TO
SIZE
F E N75 D93248 4 4 EA PIPE PVC 2 1/2DIAX2'-1 SCH 80
F F N76 D07488 2 2 EA FITTING PVC BSHG RED 4X3 SCH 80
F F N77 C71874 8 8 EA FITTING PVC NIPPLE SHORT 3/4DIA SCH 80
F F N78 C66910 8 8 EA FITTING PVC ELBOW 45DG 3/4DIA THDXTHD
SCH 80
F F N79 D02345 28 28 EA FITTING 1/2" MALE NTP K-BALL ASSY. W/ZIP TIP
F F N80 C68882 5 5 EA HARDWARE CABLE TIE BY THOMAS BETTS CAT.
NO.
F F N81 2362041 4 4 EA PIPE PVC 2.5DIAX0'-9 SCH80 FAB TO
SIZE
F F N82 2363342 1 1 EA PIPE PVC 4DIAX1'-3 1/2 SCH 80 FAB TO
SIZE
SIZE
545
Page 216

26252
NOZZLE
SUP 26250
26251
SIZE
SCH 80
NO.
SIZE
SIZE
SIZE
546
Page 353

26252
NOZZLE
SUP 26250
26251
SIZE
SCH 80
NO.
SIZE
SIZE
SIZE
547
Page 487

26252
NOZZLE
SUP 26250
26251
SIZE
SCH 80
NO.
SIZE
SIZE
SIZE
548
Reference Fastener Kit: KIT FSTN ACCESS DOOR PLATFORM
Access Door Platform MHF7111 THRU MHF7113
ACCESS DOOR PLATFORM Stainless steel bolts are prone to
The access door platform should be installed galling. Generously apply thread
next to the ladder. Access to underside of lubricant Z21 to threads of bolts before
tower is required for installation. Use Figure 1 torquing nuts.
to begin assembly on tower models MHF7111
through MHF7113. Attach support beams L10 with the clips
Note: On stainless steel towers, hardware L04 to basin side. Insert platform support
that attaches directly to the tower will be beams L06 as shown.
stainless steel.
All remaining hardware will be galvanized.
L04
L04
L06
L10
L04
V18
W23 W33 X03
X02
X03
VP6
VP7
L10
X03 VP7 L04

VP7
W03** LOCK WASHER, M12
VP6
V07 BOLT, M10 X 25MM Figure 1
X02* X02* NUT, M10
X03* X03* NUT, M12
W33 W33 SEALING WASHER, M12
W23 W23 SC, M12
Z0915977_ PAGE 1 OF 4
549
Continue access door platform assembly on tower models FIND NO. PARTS LIST DESCRIPTION
MHF7111 thru MHF7113 as indicated in Figure 2. V18 BOLT, M12 X 25MM
VP7
Attach platform sides L07 with brace L53 to support beams X03* X03* NUT, M12
L06. Bolt platform end L11 in place as shown. * Use Nyloc Nut for SS fastener
X03 L07
VP7
L53
VP7
VP7
X03 X03
L11
L06
X03
VP7
VP7 X03
Figure 2
Z0915977_ PAGE 2 OF 4
550
Continue access door platform assembly for all models by FIND NO. DESCRIPTION
setting platform grating panels L17 in place as shown in Figure T07 3/8" X 1" TAP SCREW
3. Attach panels to beams using tap screws T07.
T07
L17
Figure 3
Z0915977_ PAGE 3 OF 4
551
Use Figures 4 & 5 to finish access door platform assembly FIND NO. PARTS LIST DESCRIPTION
for all models. First attach guard rail post clips E30 to VP7
platform side and attach guardrail assembly L46 to post clip W03** LOCK WASHER, M12
and platform end. Attach guardrail L45 to post clip and VPC
platform end. Complete access platform assembly by W03** LOCK WASHER, M12
attaching guardrail assembly L44 to guardrail assemblies V25 BOLT, M12 X 100MM
VPD
L45 & L46. After completing installation instal plug L28 in the
X03* X03* NUT, M12
top of all vertical posts.
VPC
L28 X62
L46
VP7
E30
DETAIL A
VPC
A
X62
Figure 4
L28
L45
E30
VPD
VPC
L44
X62
VP7
X62
Figure 5
DETAIL B B VPC
Z0915977_ PAGE 4 OF 4
552
Page 81
Description ACCESS DOOR PLATFORM -PAC MHF7111-13 GALV Lit Pac Indicator F
F F 999 2377141 1 1 EA KIT FSTN AD Platform MH7111-13 GALV FSTN KIT

F E L04 2363266 4 4 EA SHEET HMG 3MMX86.2X218.4 MH7113 BM ADPF 2013-
26032
F E L05 2363274 1 1 EA SHEET HMG 3MMX262.5X1311.9 MH7111-13 BM 2013-
AD 26034
F E L06 2363278 2 2 EA SHEET HMG 3MMX642.5X1345.2 MH7111-13 BM Z0737558 C
AD
AD 26036
F E L10 2363270 2 2 EA SHEET HMG 3MMX635.7X1353.7 MH7111-13 BM Z0737556 B
AD
F E L11 2363258 1 1 EA SHEET HMG 3MMX536.2X2413.4 MH7111-7113 2013-
BM 26030
F E L17 2363286 3 3 EA SHEET HMG 1.5MMX663.1X2215.6 MH7111-13 2013-
BM AD 26211
F F L45 2362824 1 1 EA ASSEMBLY HDG GUARDRAIL MHF7113 A = 09-21740 C
561.7MM LAB
1146.8MM LA
F F L50 2030987 1 1 EA ASSEMBLY HDG GUARDRAIL NC8411-14 A = 09-21739 B
2193.9MM L
AD 26212
553
Page 489
Description ACCESS DOOR PLATFORM -PAC MHF7111-13 GALV Lit Pac Indicator F
F F 999 2377141 1 1 EA KIT FSTN AD Platform MH7111-13 GALV FSTN KIT

F E L04 2363266 4 4 EA SHEET HMG 3MMX86.2X218.4 MH7113 BM ADPF 2013-
26032
AD 26034
F E L06 2363278 2 2 EA SHEET HMG 3MMX642.5X1345.2 MH7111-13 BM Z0737558 C
AD
AD 26036
F E L10 2363270 2 2 EA SHEET HMG 3MMX635.7X1353.7 MH7111-13 BM Z0737556 B
AD
F E L11 2363258 1 1 EA SHEET HMG 3MMX536.2X2413.4 MH7111-7113 2013-
BM 26030
F E L17 2363286 3 3 EA SHEET HMG 1.5MMX663.1X2215.6 MH7111-13 2013-
BM AD 26211
561.7MM LAB
1146.8MM LA
F F L50 2030987 1 1 EA ASSEMBLY HDG GUARDRAIL NC8411-14 A = 09-21739 B
2193.9MM L
AD 26212
554
Reference Fastener Kit: KIT FSTN FAN DECK EXTENSION
Ladder & Guardrail MHF7100
LADDER & GUARDRAIL Note: If there is a special option required
LOUVER FACE W/ NO LADDER for the ladder and guardrail, there will be
The ladder and guardrail installation required additional drawing(s) that will replace (or
for your tower may vary depending on the be used in conjunction with) the details in
optional equipment selected for the tower. this manual.
The figure numbers are listed in the order Note: On stainless steel towers, hardware
that they are intended to be installed and are that attaches directly to the tower will be
located on the corresponding page number. stainless steel. All remaining hardware will
be galzanized. Stainless steel bolts are
prone to galling. Generously apply thread
lubricant Z21 to threads of bolts before
torquing nuts.
Guardrail Package Louver Face w/ No Ladder
L32
L33
Z0921093_ PAGE 1 OF 2
555
Reference Fastener Kit: KIT FSTN LDR&GR LVR SGL FACE W/O LDR
Ladder & Guardrail MHF7100
Install guardrail assy L32
to louver column and existing post
clips. Next install guardrail assy
L33 to louver column and guardrail L32
assy L32. After completion of
installation install plug L28 in the
top of all vertical posts.
L33

V22 Bolt M12 X 65
V25 Bolt M12 X 100
W03 Washer Lock M12
A X03 NUT M12
L28
Louver Face Guardrail
B
X03
V25
X03 W03
W03
X03
L33
V22 W03
L33
L32
V22
DETAIL B
(Typical all 4 corners)
DETAIL A
Z0921093_ PAGE 2 OF 2
556
Page 82
Description LDR&GR LVR FACE W/O LDR MHF7111 Lit Pac Indicator F
F F L32 2028199 1 1 EA ASSEMBLY HDG GUARDRAIL NC8407,11,13 A = 09-2666 B

2134MM LABE
F F L33 2028200 1 1 EA ASSEMBLY HDG GUARDRAIL NC8407 A = 09-2667 B
1391MM LABE
557
Page 83

2134MM LABE
1391MM LABE
558
Page 218

2134MM LABE
1391MM LABE
559
Page 219

2134MM LABE
1391MM LABE
560
Page 355

2134MM LABE
1391MM LABE
561
Page 356

2134MM LABE
1391MM LABE
562
Page 490

2134MM LABE
1391MM LABE
563
Page 491

2134MM LABE
1391MM LABE
564
Reference Fastener Kit: KIT FSTN WALKWAY 5 1/2" AB-AB
Fan Deck Walkway MHF7111 THRU MHF7113
Determine where outside walkways L61 will
FAN DECK WALKWAY attach to tower and remove existing tap screws in
The fan deck walkway should be fan deck and girt at those locations. The larger
installed after the ladder and guardrail. diameter holes in the walkway are clearance
Use the figure below to install the holes, do not remove fasteners at these locations.
walkway between cells when towers are Set walkways in place and install. Attach
5 1/2" (14 cm) apart. toeboards L18 to walkways as shown.
L61
T07
L61

T07 T07 TAP SCREW, 3/8"X1"
VPC
X03 X03* NUT, M12 B
T07 Figure 1
L18
L61
Towers 5 1/2" (14 cm) Apart L14
At Tower Anchor Bolts
VPC
Existing Guardrail X03
DETAIL A DETAIL B
Z0924034_ PAGE 1 OF 1
565
Page 221
Description FAN DECK WALKWAY 5.5" MHF7111-S300 Lit Pac Indicator F
F E L14 2029006 2 2 EA SHEET S300 1.5MMX143.1X223.8 NC8400S 09-2992 A

WALKWAY
F E L18 2361805 2 2 EA SHEET S300 1.5MMX110.2X130.3 MH7111 2013-
FDWW TOE 25768
F E L61 2361761 2 2 EA SHEET S300 1.5MMX288.924X3603.575 MH7111 2013- A
FD WW-5. 25770
566
Page 492
Description FAN DECK WALKWAY 5.5" MHF7111-S300 Lit Pac Indicator F
F E L14 2029006 2 2 EA SHEET S300 1.5MMX143.1X223.8 NC8400S 09-2992 A

WALKWAY
F E L18 2361805 2 2 EA SHEET S300 1.5MMX110.2X130.3 MH7111 2013-
FDWW TOE 25768
F E L61 2361761 2 2 EA SHEET S300 1.5MMX288.924X3603.575 MH7111 2013- A
FD WW-5. 25770
567
Reference Fastener Kit: KIT FSTN SAFETY CAGE W/ADPF INSTAL
Safety Cage MHF7100
SAFETY CAGE - Tower with Access Door Platform Note: On stainless steel towers,
hardware that attaches directly to
MHF7111-MHF7113 the tower will be stainless steel. All
No Ladder Extension remaining hardware will be
The safety cage is intended to be installed after the ladder, galvanized. Stainless steel bolts
handrail, and platforms (if applicable) are in place. See the are prone to galling. Generously
details in those sections for items not shown in this section. apply thread lubricant Z21 to
The installation required for your tower will depend upon the ladder threads of bolts before torquing
extension length (if equipped with a ladder extension) and if an nuts.
access or MOA platform (or both) are installed on the tower. Only FIND NO. PARTS LIST DESCRIPTION
safety cages at standard ladder locations are covered by this V22 BOLT, M12 X 65MM
manual. VPC W03** LOCK WASHER, M12
VPD W03** LOCK WASHER, M12
X03* NUT, M12
X62
L65 * Use Nyloc Nut for SS fastener
VPC
L67
L67
X62
VPC
L66
L70
X62
X62
Typical Unless Noted
L19
X62
L74 VPC
VPD
Z0955215_ PAGE 1 OF 1
568
Page 84
Description SAFETY CAGE W/NO EXT&ADPF MHF7111-13 Lit Pac Indicator F
F E L19 2550803 1 1 EA TUBE HDG 38.1MMX38.1MMX3MMX1943.3MM Z1048484

MHF711X SAFETY
F F L65 2036897 1 1 EA ASSEMBLY ALUM SAFETY CAGE TOP SECT 09-22252
A=24.3
F F L66 2034395 1 1 EA ASSEMBLY ALUM SAFETY CAGE MID SECT 09-22253
A=35.7
A=47.7
F F L70 2550805 1 1 EA ASSEMBLY ALUM SAFETY CAGE BOT SECT Z1048752
A=36.2
569
Page 493
Description SAFETY CAGE W/NO EXT&ADPF MHF7111-13 Lit Pac Indicator F
F E L19 2550803 1 1 EA TUBE HDG 38.1MMX38.1MMX3MMX1943.3MM Z1048484

MHF711X SAFETY
F F L65 2036897 1 1 EA ASSEMBLY ALUM SAFETY CAGE TOP SECT 09-22252
A=24.3
A=35.7
A=47.7
F F L70 2550805 1 1 EA ASSEMBLY ALUM SAFETY CAGE BOT SECT Z1048752
A=36.2
570
Mech Equip Platform MHF7111 THRU MHF7113
The Mechanical Equipment Platform has sections in both the top
and bottom modules. The sections must be installed prior to the
stacking of the tower modules. X02
VP4
VP3

L18
Step 1 ( Bottom Module)
Begin installation in the bottom module by attaching ladder
support L47 to the plenum walkway. Attach ladder brace L18
to the top beam and then install ladder L49.
L49
X02

T07 T07 3/8" X 1" TAP SCREW
VP3
W02** LOCK WASHER, M10 VP4
V10 BOLT, M10X 40MM X02
VP4
W02** LOCK WASHER, M10 L47
X02 X02 NUT, M10
* Use Nyloc Nut for SS fastener T07
Z1010136_ PAGE 1 OF 1
571
Page 85
Description MECH EQUIP PLTFRM BOT TWR T & K MHF7111-13 Lit Pac Indicator F
F F 999 2378275 1 1 EA KIT FSTN ME Internal Platform Btm MH7111-13 FSTN KIT
S300-
F E L47 2749137 1 1 EA SHEET S300 3MMX88.9X838.3 7111-13 BOT LDR 50210306 B
F F L49 2749092 1 1 EA ASSEMBLY ALUM LADDER 7111-13 LDRBTM- 50210292 C
572
Page 222
S300-
573
Page 358
S300-
574
Page 494
S300-
575
Eliminator Support Assembly MHF7100
ELIMINATOR SUPPORT ASSEMBLY 1 Note: For MHF7107 Tall top-STD, the casing VM1 Bolt M8X25
Apply strip sealer Z12 to eliminattor support insert needs to be put in position and temporarily W24 Washer SC M8
H42, H43 and attach to casing as shown. fixed before installing the eliminator Support. W37 Washer Sealing M8
VM1 X47 NUT M8
W24
VM1 W37
W24 VM1
W37 SS.TWR X19
W24
SS.TWR X19 GALV.TWR X47
SS.TWR X19 GALV.TWR X47 W37
GALV.TWR X47
H43
J06 H02
H43
H43
J31
J04
J04
H42
Z12 (TYPE 'D')
H42
Z12 (TYPE 'D')
GALV.TWR X47
Z12 (TYPE 'D')
GALV.TWR X47 SS.TWR X19
SS.TWR X19
W24 VM1
W37 W24 VM1
W37
MHF7107-09 STD 1 MHF7107 DRY COIL MHF7111-13

Z1044785_ Page 1 of 1
576
Page 137
Description Top Fill Eliminator support-KD MHF7111 & MHF7113-S Lit Pac Indicator F
F E H43 2536209 1 2 EA SHEET S300 1.5MMX35.0X2815.0 MHF7111-13 Z1043332 A

TOP
577
Page 272

TOP
578
Page 408

TOP
579
Page 546

TOP
580
Ultrasonic Water Level Sensor Assembly
P99
2 in. x 1 in. reducer bushing

(vendor supplied)
3 in. x 2 in. reducer bushing

(vendor supplied)
P82
P83
Type 'D' Z12 P84

T07 TAP SCREW - 3/8" X 1"
STEP FLOOR V07 BOLT M10 X 25
P01
Y31 HOLE PLUG 7/16"
Y31
Add to any
unused holes
P85
TYPE 6 V07
DEPRESSED FLOOR
T07
Z1062939_ AND ITS CONTENTS MAY NOT BE MADE PUBLIC IN ANY MANNER, DISTRIBUTED OR LOANED TO OTHERS, OR REPRODUCED OR COPIED EITHER IN WHOLE OR PART W ITHOUT THE
581
Page 87
Description CONTROL ENH Ultra SENSOR K/D PROBE Lit Pac Indicator F
F E P82 2362885 1 1 EA SHEET S300 1.5MMX209.7X703.3 MH7111-13 2013-

BW BR 25213
F F P83 C78876 1 1 EA FITTING PVC CPLG 3DIAX7/8" SCH 40 00-22710
F F P84 C78877 1 1 EA FITTING PVC CPLG 3DIAX3/4" THREADED SCH 00-22710
40
BW ST 25215
SCREW PE
582
Page 224

BW BR 25213
40
BW ST 25215
SCREW PE
583
Page 360

BW BR 25213
40
BW ST 25215
SCREW PE
584
Page 496

BW BR 25213
40
BW ST 25215
SCREW PE
585
2
4
3 3 1
2
VERTICAL
1 AXIAL AXIAL
3 HORIZONTAL
HORIZONTAL 3
VERTICAL
-1 -2
FIND # DESCRIPTION
1 VIB. MOUNTING BLOCK
2 LOCK WASHER
3 LONGER BOLT
2 4 NUT
DRAWING Z1070874 - #
NOTES:
1 FOR TORQUE VALUES CONSULT SPX DRAWING Z0233144.
2 RE-USE NUT WHERE APPLICABLE. CONFIDENTIAL: THE CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT ARE VIBRATION MOUNTING BLOCK
CONFIDENTIAL AND CONSTITUTE THE EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF SPX Solid Edge
COOLING TECHNOLOGIES, INC. THIS DOCUMENT AND ITS CONTENTS MAY DRAWN BY DRAWN DATE
BELT DRIVE MECH. EQUIPMENT ASSEMBLY
NOT BE MADE PUBLIC IN ANY MANNER, DISTRIBUTED OR LOANED TO ®
3 RECOMMENDED PRIMARY TRANSDUCER POSITION IS HORIZONTAL. OTHERS, OR REPRODUCED OR COPIED EITHER IN WHOLE OR PART WITHOUT SADICH 4-17-18 LOCATIONS & ORIENTATION
THE PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT OF SPX COOLING TECHNOLOGIES, INC. CHECKED / APPROVED BY RELEASE DATE ECO NUMBER ORDER NUMBER FORMAT PLOT DRAWING NUMBER REV.
586 UNPUBLISHED-ALL RIGHTS RESERVED UNDER COPYRIGHT LAWS.
OPSAHL 4-17-18 ANSI D 1=1 Z1070874
Page 138
Description KIT TRANSDUCER Mtg BLOCK AND HDWE Lit Pac Indicator F
F DMS DOCUMENT 1 1 PC BELT DRIVE MOUNTING BLOCK LOCATIONS Z1070874

F F 001 2378666 1 1 EA ASSEMBLY SS VIB TRANSDUCER 1/4-28UNF LRG. Z0927639 A
MTG. SLEEV
F F 002 UKA7221-653E 1 1 EA M16 SPRING WASHER TYPE B SSA4 DIN127B DIN
127B
F F VB3 2479936 1 1 EA BOLT S316 M16X100 DIN931-A4-70
F F W29 UKA7221-651E 2 2 EA WASHER S316 FLAT M16 ISO7093 DIN9021-A4
F F X05 2101565 1 1 EA NUT S316 NYLOC M16 ISO7040 DIN985-A4-70
587
Page 273

MTG. SLEEV
127B
588
Page 409

MTG. SLEEV
127B
589
Page 547

MTG. SLEEV
127B
590
SPX Cooling Technologies User Manuals January 18, 2024
Project: Boston Scientific De Costa For: Clima Ideal

Rica Zona Industrial Pavas 10109
2546 Calle Primera SAN JOSE
COYOL
Performance Conditions:
Flow Rate: 4,650.00 GPM Hot Water: 95.00F Cold Water: 81.70F Wet Bulb: 74.60F
Motor Capacity per Cell: 30.00 HP Motor Output per Cell: 30.00 HP
Fan Speed RPM: 241.00 Trial Fan Pitch Degrees: 25.00
Order No: 10243694 Model No: MHF7111SATBNC4SGK PO No: IM0010663

Sales Office Order No:
Please contact your local sales representative if you have any questions:
SPX Cooling Technologies

7401 West 129 Street
Overland Park KS 66213
Phone:
Fax:
Email: william.zavislak@spx.com
Your local sales representative will be happy to quote current parts price and lead time upon request.
Go to http://spxcooling.com for a full list of representatives.
Z0238848 C DM-MDT-C DOWNTIME MANUAL

Z0490769 C USER MANUAL - 2200 - 2250 - 2400 GRDR
Z0490858 C SERVICE ALERT - LEGIONELLA
Z0560176 A OM-PUMP SCOT MOTORPUMP C56 & JM FRAME
Z0592740 B Marley SofTork Series MC Coupling
Z0920512 E MH Fluid Cooler User Manual
Z1070990 B IMI 686B Engineering Data & User Manual
Z1080817 LLC+u+bms ULTRASONIC USER MANUAL
Z1104005 WARRANTY REGISTRATION INFO BULLETIN
Z1110148 COOLING TOWER STORAGE GUIDELINES
user manual
Downtime Instructions
M E C H A N I CA L D R A F T C O O L I N G TO W E R S
Z0238848_C ISSUED 8/2017 READ AND UNDERSTAND THIS MANUAL PRIOR TO OPERATING OR SERVICING THIS PRODUCT
Preface
Proper preventive maintenance of equipment during downtime will assure

trouble-free start-up. This manual gives suggested procedures for protection of
tower mechanical equipment for downtime ranging from seasonal to extended
downtime in two different periods. The periods increase in length and in extent
of protection.
SPX Cooling Technologies offers these suggestions as being representative
of good practice. Warranty of condition after downtime and or amendment to
specific contract warranties is not intended.
Never start motor on fan drive without first making sure that there will
Warning be no interference with free rotation of the fan, driveshaft, or V-belt.
Seasonal Downtime
Fans, Driveshafts, and V-belts

Maintain freedom for fan rotation. Do not operate if snow, ice or other obstruc-
tion will interfere with rotation.
Geareducers
The 2000, 2250 and 2800 Geareducer models have 5-year synthetic
Note oil change intervals. To maintain five-year change intervals, use only
oil designed specifically for these Geareducer models. Proceed to
step 2 below. If, after five years, turbine-type mineral oil is used, then
proceed starting with step 1. Refer to the Geareducer User Manual
for oil recommendations and further instructions.
1. At start of down-time period, operate Geareducer until oil is warm (120° F)

and change the oil. See Lubrication section of the Geareducer User Manual
for instructions on changing oil. Allow freedom for fan to windmill.
2. Each month, drain any water condensate from the lowest point of the
Geareducer and its oil system. Check the oil level and add oil if necessary.
Operate the Geareducer a minimum of 20 minutes to coat the interior
surfaces with oil.
3. To return to operation, drain off any condensate, check oil level and add oil
as necessary to establish required oil level. Change oil at normal recom-
mended interval, accounting for downtime as operating time.
2
Bearing Housing – Oil Lubricated
1. At start of downtime period, operate the bearing housing until oil is warm
(95°F) and change the oil. See the Lubrication section of the Bearing Housing
User Manual for instructions on changing oil. Allow fan freedom to windmill.
2. Each month drain any water condensate from the lowest point of the bear-
ing housing. Add oil if necessary to maintain oil level.
3. To return to operation, drain any water condensate, check oil level and add
oil as necessary to establish required level. Change oil at normal recom-
mended interval, accounting for downtime as operating time.
Fan Motors
1. At start of downtime, clean all air passages and lubricate bearings. See
the motor manufacturer’s instructions. Motors with sealed bearings do not
require lubrication maintenance.
2. Each month, run motor until it has reached operating temperature. Space
heaters are recommended. If space heaters are used, motors need be run
only 20 minutes minimum. Refer to the “Fan Motor” User Manual for ad-
ditional information.
Higher density of cold air at fan increases motor horsepower. If

Note motor overloads will not allow fan motor operation at high speed
in forward direction, one of the following might be done:
• If overloads are adjustable, set at a higher value (+15%) for cold weather
operation.
• Operate motor (fan) in reverse (reverse any 2 leads).
• Operate two speed motor at low speed.
3. Enclose motors or cover to protect from wet-down of a fire protection system

or rainfall.
4. To return motors into operation, clean all air passages, remove temporary
vented cover and lubricate bearings. Motors with sealed bearing do not
require lubrication maintenance.
3
Extended Downtime – Beyond 3 Months
Fans and Driveshafts

Maintain freedom of rotation. Do not operate if snow, ice or other obstructions
will interfere with rotation.
V-Belt Drives
1. At start of down time, remove and store belts in a cool, dry, dark room. Clean
and coat sheave grooves with rust preventative, lacquer or paint.
2. Remove rust preventative from sheaves before reinstalling belts.
Geareducers with External Gauge and Drain Lines

At Start of Downtime Period:
1. Operate Geareducer until oil is warm (120°F) and drain the oil. Completely
replacing the oil may only be required for Geareducers using mineral oil.
See Geareducer note on page 2 for further information.
2. Fabricate and install an expansion chamber on the sight glass riser; see
Figure 1. The figure shows the proportions of the expansion chamber and
its relationship in elevation to the oil level. The purpose is to allow for ex-
pansion of the oil due to temperature change from that at the time of filling
without causing it to overflow at the fan shaft closure. Smaller chambers
may satisfy smaller Geareducer applications, but the 4" depth and elevation
relationships should be maintained.
Expansion volumes required by Geareducers most likely to require this type
of storage are listed by basic model number:
Models 3400, 36, 38, 3600 and 4000_____ 1.5 gallon (5.7 liter)
Models 2700, 3000 and 32.2_____________ 1.0 gallon (3.8 liter)
Models 2200, 2250, 2400 and 2800______ .75 gallon (2.9 liter)
The vent may be removed from the top of the oil level gauge to be used as
a vent for the expansion chamber. The chamber must be vented.
3. Remove the vent or vent line from the Geareducer.
4. Fill the Geareducer with oil until it rises just to the bottom of the vent hole
in the top (cover) of the Geareducer. Use one of the oils listed in the ap-
propriate Geareducer User Manual.
5. Smaller Geareducers than listed may be stored this way, provided the basic
requirement of submerging the top-most bearing in oil and the requirements
above are satisfied.
6. Plug the vent on the Geareducer with a 1/2" pipe plug. Model 2200, 2250
and 2400 requires a 1/4" plug.
4
An ordinary standpipe to 6" min. elevation above oil level may be substituted
for the chamber with the possibility of oil spillage from Geareducer fan shaft
closure due to wide temperature fluctuations (see note on page 6). Oil level
must be monitored and kept at vent hole level, shown here, at all times.
14" x 14" x 4"
VENT HOLE OIL EXPANSION CHAMBER
LINE TO AIR VENT

VENT
OIL LEVEL 2"
1"
DRAIN
PLUG
SUPPORT
SIGHT GLASS
ASSEMBLY
Figure 1
7. Open the disconnect switch to the fan motor, and tag it to prevent running
the Geareducer while it is full of oil. Allow Geareducer freedom to windmill.
See note on page 6.
8. Quarterly, drain water condensate at lowest point of oil system at drain in
expansion chamber, check and make up oil level and rotate input shaft at
least 15 revolutions. Allow to windmill.
At End of Downtime Period

1. Drain oil to operating level.
2. Remove the pipe plug from the Geareducer vent hole and reinstall the vent
fitting or line.
3. Remove the tag and close the disconnect switch to the fan motor. The
expansion chamber may be removed .
4. If downtime was 6 months or longer, check to be sure there is no obstruc-
tion to rotation and run the fan motor until Geareducer until oil is warm
(120°F). Stop the Geareducer and change the oil. Changing oil may only be
required for Geareducers using mineral oil. See Geareducer note on page
2 for further information.
Geareducers without External Gauge and Drain Lines

Use the same procedure as outlined for Geareducer with external gauge and
drain lines. It will be necessary to install an external gauge and drain line or pipe
and a riser which would permit mounting the expansion chamber outside the
fan cylinder, see Figure 1.
➠
5
Bearing Housings - Oil Lubricated
1. At the start of the downtime period, operate bearing housing until oil is
warm (95° F), then change the oil. See the lubrication section of the Bearing
Housing User Manual for instructions.
2. Each quarter, drain any water condensate from the lowest point of the
bearing housing. Add oil as necessary to maintain level. Allow to windmill.
See note on page 6. Rotate 15 revolutions.
3. To return to operation, bring up to operating temperature and change
the oil.
Fan Motors
1. At start of downtime period, lubricate bearings. See motor manufacturer’s
instructions on lubrication. Does not apply to motors with sealed bearings.
2. Keep the motor temperature 5° F to 10° F above ambient temperature with
the aid of space heaters or reduced voltage winding heating. Allow freedom
to windmill.
3. Once each quarter, rotate motor shaft 15 revolutions.
4. Once each year, remove grease fill and relief plugs and lubricate motor
bearings. Do not operate motor. Replace plugs. Does not apply to motors
with sealed bearings.
5. Enclose motors or cover to protect from wet-down of a fire protection system
or rainfall.
6. To return to operation, remove temporary covers and clean air passages.
Remove grease fill and relief plugs and lubricate bearings. Operate the motor
to purge excess grease and replace the plugs. See motor manufacturer’s
instructions on lubrication. Does not apply to motors with sealed bearings.
Refer to the “Fan Motor” User Manual Z0239042 for additional informa-
tion.
The frequency of maintenance operations required by these instruc-

Note tions assumes sufficient wind velocity to cause some fan rotary
motion (not necessarily fan spinning) at least once per month. This
motion is required to reposition bearing, shaft and gear elements
with respect to each other to allow the lubricant the greatest oppor-
tunity to protect these vital parts from corrosion. Any time a period
of one month passes without wind-caused fan rotary motion, main-
tenance personnel should be alert to this fact and provide manual
rotation of the drive line. At least 15 revolutions of the motor shaft
is recommended.
6
General
Fire Protection—Protect dry wood towers against fire. Any flammable debris
should be removed weekly. Wood towers may be wetted for fire protection.
This may be done by providing some form of sprinkler system to wet the entire
top of the tower. This should include the top structure inside the fan cylinder.
Sprinkling should be avoided in freezing weather.
The sprinkler system must be designed in order not to cause direct water im-
pingement on Geareducer shaft closures, the Geareducer vent, the Geareducer
external oil system vent, and the electric motor shaft closures, air openings,
vents and drains.
The fan motor(s) must be covered with a vented enclosure to avoid moisture
entrapment. This is necessary to avoid excessively high humidity around the
motors, and to avoid wide fluctuation in motor temperature that sprinkling would
cause. The enclosure should cover any back stop or brake assembly mounted
on, or connected to any part of the motor.
During Freezing Weather—Drain tower basins and all exposed piping includ-
ing risers. Leave the drain and overflow valves open to prevent accumulation
of rain water, snow or melted snow and ice.
During Non-Freezing Weather—It may be more convenient to keep normal

water level in wood basins for short downtime periods to keep basins tight. Wood
basins (over longer periods) and concrete and steel basins should be drained.
GREASE AT LOCKING
ZERK FITTING BAR
APPLY GREASE
TO STEM
Figure 2
Flow Control Valves are to be left full open with locking bar locked. Apply grease
through the zerk fitting to the stem-guide interface and coat the entire exposed
stem with grease. NLGI #2 Lithium base grease is suggested. See Figure 2.
Start-up preparation of a wood tower after a long dry shut-down

Note should include thorough wetting before full operation.
7
Downtime Instructions
SPX COOLING TECHNOLOGIES, INC.

7401 WEST 129 STREET Z0238848_C | ISSUED 8/2017
OVERLAND PARK, KS 66213 USA COPYRIGHT © 2017 SPX CORPORATION
913 664 7400 | spxcooling@spx.com In the interest of technological progress, all products are subject to design
spxcooling.com and/or material change without notice.

user manual
Geareducer models 2200 - 2250 - 2250S - 2400

®
O P E R AT I O N - M A I N T E N A N C E – R E PA I R
Z0490769_C ISSUED 06/2022 READ AND UNDERSTAND THIS MANUAL PRIOR TO OPERATING OR SERVICING THIS PRODUCT
operation and service
Vent
Inspection
Oil Level
Check and Fill
Drain Plug
Vibration Mounting
Location 1/4 - 28 UNF
Figure 1 Service Fittings
Protection Against Corrosion Initial Operation
All Marley Geareducer units ship from the factory with a protective Check to be sure that the Geareducer is filled with oil and that
coating of epoxy enamel paint on all unmachined parts and with there are no visible oil leaks. If equipped with an external dipstick/
rust-proofing oil and grease on machined surfaces. Machined sur- oil level gauge, be sure the oil full mark corresponds with the full
face coatings normally protect the Geareducer against atmospheric level at the Geareducer.
corrosion during storage periods for up to six months. However, if
Note—If this tower is equipped with a two-speed motor, allow a
oil is added to the Geareducer, the new oil will dissolve the rust-
time delay of at least 20 seconds when switching from high speed
proofing grease and require that the Geareducer be run once a
to low speed. Allow a time delay of at least two minutes when
week to keep a protective coating of oil on all interior machined
changing direction of fan rotation. Failure to provide these delays
surfaces.
may significantly reduce equipment service life.
Check Geareducer exterior yearly and touch up with epoxy paint if
Lubricants
required. If your Geareducer is equipped with an oil gauge and drain
line, coat any exposed threads at pipe joints to prevent corrosion. To insure maximum performance and service life, it is recommended
Marley factory lubricants be used in all Marley Geareducers.
Alignment
Marley lubricants can be purchased through your local Marley
In order to assure long service life, the Geareducer and motor must sales representative.
be level, and the drive shaft or coupling must be properly aligned.
Refer to the alignment instructions in the Driveshaft or Coupling
Manual shipped with the cooling tower. Copies are also available
from your local Marley sales representative.
3
If lubricants other than Marley factory lubricants are used, they must Seasonal temperature changes may require one viscosity of oil for
not contain any additives (such as detergents or EP additives) which summer operation and another for winter operation. Refer to the
are adversely affected by moisture and could reduce the service tables below for the seasonal selection information.
life of the Geareducer. The responsibility for use of lubricants other
than Marley factory lubricants rests with the customer/owner and
the lubricant supplier.
Note—Geareducer is designed for 5-year oil change intervals.

To maintain five-year change intervals, use only Marley Gearlube.
Marley Gearlube must be inspected every six months to ensure
the oil has not been contaminated. If turbine-type mineral oil is
used the oil must be changed every six months.
Winter or Summer Severe Duty/High Temperature
Air Temperature at Geareducer
Below 110°F (43°C) Above 110°F (43°C)
ISO 150 ISO 220
Table 1 Synthetic oil—5-year oil change interval
Maintenance Service Monthly Semi-annually Seasonal Startup or Annually
Geareducer Drive
Inspect and tighten all fasteners including oil plug x x
Check for and repair oil leaks x x x
Check oil level x R x
Change oil R R
Make sure vent is open x x
Check driveshaft or coupling alignment x
Inspect and tighten driveshaft or coupling fasteners x
Check driveshaft or coupling bushing / flex elements for unusual wear x
Lube Lines (if equipped)
Check for oil leaks in hoses and fittings x R x
R – Refer to instructions within this manual

Note: It is recommended at least weekly, that the general operation and condition be observed. Pay particular attention to any changes
in sound or vibration that may signify a need for closer inspection.
4
Scheduled Maintenance Changing Geareducer Oil
Warning—Make certain that mechanical equipment is inoper- Drain the Geareducer oil by removing the drain plug. See
able during periods of maintenance—or during any situation of Figure 1 for location. If equipped with an external dipstick/oil
possible endangerment to personnel. If your electrical system level gauge, remove the drain plug at that location, and drain the
contains a disconnect switch, lock it out until the period of expo- entire system.
sure to injury is over. When using synthetic oil with extended service intervals remove a
Monthly—Check Geareducer oil level. Shut down the unit and sample for lab analysis and look for evidence of foreign material,
allow 5 minutes for the oil level to stabilize. Add oil if required, such as water, metal shavings or sludge. If you find unacceptable
noting the addition in your maintenance log. If equipped with an condensation or sludge, flush the Geareducer with mineral oil
external dipstick/oil level gauge, small quantities of oil can be before refilling.
added at that location. After inspection is complete, fill the Geareducer with 10 quarts
(9.5 liters) of oil. See Figure 1 for location. If the Geareducer is
Semi-annually— If using turbine-type mineral oil, change oil—see
equipped with an external dipstick/oil level gauge an additional 2
Changing Geareducer Oil for instructions. Check that all the
to 3 quarts (1.9 to 2.8 liters) of oil will be required. Be certain that
assembly bolts and cap screws are tight, that oil plugs and pipe
the vent on the Geareducer (and external dipstick/oil level gauge,
connections are in place and free from leaks, and that the vent on
if present) is not plugged. Verify that the gauge/drain line is full
the Geareducer (and external dipstick/oil level gauge, if present) is
and that there aren't any leaks at the connections.
clear—a clogged vent can lead to oil leaks. Intermittent operation
and extended periods of downtime can cause condensation of Repair and Overhaul
water in the oil. If using synthetic Marley Gearlube, the oil condition
If your Geareducer ever needs replacement or repair, we recommend
must be inspected every six months—see Changing Geareducer
returning the unit to a Marley factory service center. Contact your
Oil for maximizing service life.
Marley sales representative to discuss course of action. The Order
Annually—Check mechanical equipment anchor bolts, drive shaft Number on your cooling tower will be required if the Geareducer
coupling bolts, and coupling set screws. Tighten as required. Check is shipped back to the factory for repair. Obtain a “Customer
Geareducer exterior yearly and touch up with epoxy paint, if re- Return Material” tag from the Marley sales representative in you
quired. Coat all exposed threads at pipe joints to prevent corrosion. area. To find your Marley sales representative call 913 664 7400
or visit spxcooling.com.
Every 5 Years—If using synthetic Marley Gearlube, change oil.
To maintain five-year change intervals, use only synthetic Marley Major repairs require the use of a fully equipped machine shop.
Gearlube. It is recommended to monitor the oil condition every If you decide to repair or overhaul your Geareducer, refer to the
six months throughout the five-year period per the instructions in Field Repair Section and Geareducer Parts List.
Changing Geareducer Oil.
5
field repair
210
WATER SLINGER
2250S
ASSEMBLY
502
WATER
SLINGER
BEARING RETAINER
521
420
520
412
BEARING
RETAINER
203 201
NPT PLUG
GEAREDUCER
AIR VENT CASE
301
PINION CAGE 311
104
320 501
101
504
312 “O”-RING 102
103
505 101
PINION CAGE 202

CAP
8
2250S
ASSEMBLY
411
PINION
501 CAGE BOTTOM CAP
CAP
420 503
BEARING RETAINER
CAP
Figure 2 Exploded Cross Section
6
Parts List
1 Complete Geareducer Assembly.

8 Ring Gear Hub.
100 Spiral Bevel Gear Set.
101 Set of matched spiral bevel gears including integral
pinion shaft with key.
Gear ratios as follows:
3.45 to 1 3.79 to 1 4.10 to 1
4.56 to 1 5.11 to 1 5.50 to 1
6.12 to 1 6.50 to 1 7.33 to 1
102 Ring gear attaching hardware.
103 Locknuts.
104 Lockwasher.
200 Fan Shaft Set.

201 Fan shaft.
202 Ring gear hub key. This is a special high strength
key. It must be obtained from Marley.
203 Fan key.
210 Fan attaching hardware.
Cap screws and washers.
301 Oil Slinger.

310 Set of Two Pinion Shaft Bearings.
311 Head, tapered roller bearing.
312 Tail, tapered roller bearing.

320 Pinion Cage Shims.
410 Fan Shaft Bearing Set.

411 Lower tapered roller bearing.
412 Upper tapered roller bearing.

420 Fan Shaft Shims.
500 O-Rings Set.

502 Water slinger O-ring, 3" ID × 31⁄4" OD × 1⁄8".
503 Bearing retainer O-ring, 5" ID × 51⁄4" OD ×1⁄8".
504 Pinion cage O-ring, 53⁄4" ID × 6" OD × 1⁄8".
505 Pinion cage cap O-ring, 4" ID × 43⁄8" OD × 3⁄16".
506 Oil slinger O-ring, 115⁄16" ID × 21⁄8" OD × 5⁄32".
501 Pinion Shaft Oil Seal.

**520 Fan Shaft Oil Seal
**521 Fan Shaft Oil Seal Sleeve
**Fan shaft Oil Seal and Sleeve used in "S" Models only.
7
field repair
General Pinion Cage Disassembly
Geareducers can be repaired in the field—however, major repairs 1. Remove pinion cage cap* from pinion cage.
require the use of a fully equipped machine shop. When field repair
2. Remove O-rings* (504 and 505).
or replacement of parts is necessary, the following procedure is
recommended for the disassembly and assembly of the unit. If any 3. Remove locknuts and lockwasher (103 and 104) then press
O-ring, oil seal or gasket is to be reused, care should be taken pinion shaft (101) out of pinion cage. This will free tail bear-
not to damage it during disassembly. Parts which contain O-rings ing cone (312). A hydraulic press or jack is recommended for
or seals should not be jerked or twisted past a shoulder or edge. removing or assembling press fit parts.
These parts are marked with an asterisk (*) in the description
4. Press oil slinger*, O-rings* (301 and 506), and head bearing
below. O-rings, oil seal and gaskets should be carefully inspected
cone (311) from the pinion shaft. Bearings must not be exposed
for damage before being reinstalled. Always use new O-rings and
to dirt, dust or moisture.
oil seal during a major overhaul.
5. Press bearing cups (311 and 312) out of pinion cage.
Disassembly
Fan Shaft Disassembly
Part numbers and references—refer to Figure 2 and 3.
1. Remove ring gear (101) from the ring gear hub (8).
1. Remove drain plug and drain oil.
2. Press ring gear hub and lower bearing cone (411) off of the
2. Remove outer ring of bolts in pinion cage cap and remove
fan shaft (201).
pinion subassembly*.
3. Remove lower fan shaft key (202).
Note—The thickness of the shim pack (320) is important in reset-
ting the gears. The shim pack should either be saved or carefully 4. Press the top bearing cone (412) off of the shaft.
measured with a micrometer. If the gears are to be replaced, record
the pinion setting distance that is etched on the pinion gear.
Assembly
3. Remove water slinger*.
Before assembling a new pinion gear in the pinion cage, check
4. Turn case upside down and remove bearing retainer cap* and
match numbers on pinion gear and spiral bevel ring gear to be
shim pack (420).
certain that they are a matched set. Gears are lapped in matched
Note—The thickness of this shim pack is important in the back- sets at the factory and should not be separated. Numbers are
lash setting of the gears. The shim pack should either be saved etched on both the pinion and ring gear as illustrated in Figure 4.
or carefully measured with a micrometer.
All parts that are to be reused should be thoroughly cleaned before
5. Remove bottom cap and fan shaft assembly. being reinstalled. Do not remove new bearings from packaging
until ready to use. Clean all bearings (new or used). Do not spin
6. Turn Geareducer case right side up and remove bearing retainer
dry bearings. Take each bearing set and roll the cup on the cone
and shim pack (420).
to note any roughness. Replace bearing if necessary. If bearings
Note—The thickness of this shim pack is important in setting the cannot be installed immediately after cleaning, lubricate and cover
fan shaft bearing endplay. This pack should be saved or carefully to protect against dust, moisture, etc.
measured with a micrometer.
If a press is not available to install bearing cones, they can be
7. Remove bearing cups (411 and 412) from the bottom cap and heated as long as the temperature does not exceed 275°-300°F
Geareducer case using a soft metal punch or mallet. (135°-149°C). If the bearings get hotter than this, they will begin
to draw and soften. Bearings can be heated with infrared lamps
For "S" Models Only: Remove fan shaft lip seal (520) from
8.
or with oil baths. If an oil bath is used, the bearing should be sup-
upper bearing retainer, and sleeve (521) from water slinger.
ported an inch or so above the pan to prevent local overheating.
8
FAN HUB
RETENTION HARDWARE
FAN SHAFT
BEARING RETAINER
O-RING
WATERSLINGER
PIPE PLUG
GEAREDUCERCASE
AIR VENT
O-RING
PINION GEAR
RING GEAR OIL SEAL

HUB
PINION SHAFT
PINION CAGE
RING GEAR CAP
O RING
PINION CAGE
DRAIN PLUG
BOTTOM COVERCAP
BOTTOM BEARING OIL SLINGER

O-RING
RETAINERCAP
Figure 3 Cross Section
MATCHED NUMBER TO BE COMPARED WITH THE SAME

NUMBER ON THE RING GEAR. (EXAMPLE CO-43)
PINION SETTING DISTANCE. (EXAMPLE 4.860)
BACKLASH (NORMAL) AT WHICH THE GEARS WERE

LAPPED. (EXAMPLE .010)
MATCHED NUMBER TO BE COMPARED WITH THE SAME

NUMBER ON THE PINION GEAR. (EXAMPLE C0-43)
THE PINION SETTING DISTANCE IS THE DISTANCE

THE END OF THE PINION SHOULD BE FROM THE
CENTERLINE OF THE RING GEAR SHAFT.
Figure 4 Gear Match Numbers and Setting Data
9
field repair
Pinion Cage Subassembly

5. Turn the Geareducer right side up and rotate the fan shaft
1. Place O-ring (506) on pinion shaft (101).
several turns in each direction to seat the bearing rollers. With
2. Place oil slinger (301) on pinion shaft. a dial indicator and using the Geareducer case as a reference,
measure and adjust the fan shaft bearings to .003-.005" (.076-
3. Press head bearing cone (311) on pinion shaft making sure
.127mm) endplay. The endplay is adjusted by adding shims
oil slinger and bearing are against gear.
(part 420) under the upper bearing retainer.
4. Press bearing cups (311 and 312) into pinion cage.
6. For "S" Models Only: Once proper end play is obtained install
5. Lower pinion cage on pinion shaft, until head bearing cone fan shaft oil seal in the upper bearing reatainer.
and cup mate.
6. Press tail bearing cone (312) on pinion shaft until it mates with
its bearing cup.
7. Install locknuts and lockwasher (103 and 104). Tighten nuts on

bearing cone until 5 to 15 in·lbƒ (565-1695 mN·m) of bearing
preload is obtained. Bearing preload is the resistance in the 1/8" DIA. BEAD
bearings to shaft rotation measured in in·lbƒ required to rotate OF RTV SILICON
the shaft at uniform velocity. Preload is necessary to insure the GASKET SEALER
stability of the gear engagement. Crimp the lockwasher to hold
the two nuts in place.
8. Install O-ring (504) in groove.
9. Press oil seal (501) into pinion shaft.

Figure 5 Flange Seal of Bottom Bearing Cap
10.Position O-ring (505) and push cap - with seal - in place on
shaft. Attach cap to pinion cage with cap screws.
11.Record the pinion setting distance that is etched on the pinion

Installation of Pinion Cage
gear.
1. The "X" marked pinion and gear teeth should be clearly identi-
fied with chalk or other markings which can be seen from the
Installation of Fan Shaft inspection opening or the bottom of the case.
1. Press ring gear hub (8) and the upper and lower bearing cones 2. Find the difference between the pinion setting distance of
(411 and 412) on the fan shaft (201). Install ring gear (101) on the old gear and the new pinion gear and adjust the old shim
ring gear hub and tighten cap screws to 90 ft·lbƒ (123 N·m) . pack (320) or make a new shim pack to compensate for the
2. Install upper fan shaft bearing cup (412) and bearing retainer different setting distances.
without shims. Example:
3. Turn the Geareducer case upside down and install the fan Pinion setting distance of old gear 4.883
shaft assembly seating the upper fan shaft bearing cone into
its cup. Install the lower bearing cup (411). Pinion setting distance of new gear 4.878
4. Install the bottom cover cap using sealer as indicated in Figure Difference .005
5 and tighten cap screws to 25 ft·lbƒ (34 N·m). Use old shim Remove .005 from shim gap.
pack or make up equivalent thickness shim pack (420) and
install the bottom bearing retainer cap. Do not install the O-ring 3. Install shims (320) and pinion cage subassembly.
for the bottom bearing retainer at this time. Tighten the cap
screws to 25 ft·lbƒ (34 N·m).
Note—Care must be taken not to damage the pinion gear teeth
by forcing them into the ring gear teeth.
10
field repair
Gear Setting Procedure
The proper mounting of the gear set is essential to obtain long adjustment must be made at the bearing retainer.
life and smooth operation of the gears. The pinion and ring gears Example: Removing .003" shims at the bottom bearing retainer
were positioned approximately in the preceding steps. The correct requires the addition of .003" shims at the top bearing retainer to
gear position is determined by the gear tooth contact pattern and maintain correct bearing adjustment.
by the backlash.
Recheck the backlash to make sure it is within the proper limits.
With the "X" marked tooth on the pinion gear engaged between
the two "X" marked teeth on the ring gear, check the backlash With gears adjusted to the proper backlash, blue (Prussian blue in
with a dial indicator as shown in Figure 6. Lock the pinion shaft oil) the pinion teeth. By using a long handled brush or swab, the
against rotation. The amount of movement of the fan shaft, mea- pinion teeth can be reached through the inspection opening. Drive
sured at a distance equal to the outside radius of the ring gear the pinion by turning the fan shaft in both directions for several
is the backlash. The backlash on the 6.50/1 gear set should be revolutions. Observe the markings on both gears on both sides of
between .013 and .018" (.33 and .46mm). The backlash on all the teeth. Compare the markings with the contact pattern shown
other ratios should be between .010 and .015" (.25 and .38mm). in Figure 7.
With the "X" teeth engaged, the backlash should be approximately If contact pattern is incorrect, adjust the pinion position with shims
in the middle of the allowable range. Check the backlash at three between the pinion cage cap and Geareducer case.
other points around the ring gear to be sure the backlash is within
the specified limits. Adjust ring gear axially by removing or adding When tooth contact is correct, recheck backlash. If necessary,
shims (420) at bottom bearing retainer. adjust ring gear to obtain proper backlash and recheck contact
pattern. Proper contact is more important of the two. On a used set
Note—To maintain bearing adjustment corresponding shim (420) of gears, it may be necessary to set the gears with slightly greater
backlash in order to obtain proper tooth contact. Should a condi-
tion be encountered where correct contact cannot be obtained,
contact your local Marley sales representative for information on
factory repair service.
TOP VIEW
OF INDICATOR
POINT OF MEASUREMENT
COLLAR OUTSIDE RADIUS OF GEAR Final Assembly
SET SCREW DIAL INDICATOR
1. Remove bottom bearing retainer cap and install the O-ring
(503). Reinstall the bottom bearing retainer cap and tighten
the cap screws to 25 ft·lbƒ (34 N·m).
2. For "S" Models Only:Install wear sleeve (521) on water slinger.
3. Install O-ring (502) in water slinger.
4. Install water slinger on fan shaft (8).
5. Replace air vent and all pipe plugs.
6. Fill with lubricant selected from Table I.
Figure 6 Gear Backlash Measurement
11
Geareducer
U S E R M A N UA L
Correct Pinion and Ring Gear Tooth Contact Patterns Incorrect Ring Gear Tooth Contact Patterns
OUT-OF POSITION CONTACT
*
Cause: Pinion too close to
ORIGINAL
* gear center.
Remedy: Move pinion out.
PATTERN
AFTER CONVEX SIDE CONCAVE SIDE
BREAK IN
*
OUT-OF POSITION CONTACT
Cause: Pinion too far from
RING GEAR gear center.
Remedy: Move pinion in.
CONVEX SIDE CONCAVE SIDE
ENTERING LEAVING
* DIRECTION OF ROTATION
Figure 7 Tooth Contact Pattern—Correct and Incorrect
SPX COOLING TECH, LLC

7401 WEST 129 STREET Z0490769_C (M99-1260E) | ISSUED 06/2022
OVERLAND PARK, KS 66213 USA COPYRIGHT © 2022 SPX TECHNOLOGIES

Service Alert
Cooling Tower Inspection and Maintenance

The presence of Legionella bacteria in potable water systems and premise plumbing, which includes cooling towers,
has sometimes resulted in these devices being implicated, among other sources, in outbreaks of Legionnaires’ disease.
The development of an effective water management plan (WMP) and implementation of maintenance procedures
are essential to prevent the presence, dissemination and amplification of Legionella bacteria and other waterborne
contaminants throughout premise plumbing. Before operating the cooling system, the water management plan and
maintenance procedures must be in place and regularly practiced.
In addition, the following steps are recommended:
❑ Do not attempt any service until the fan motor is ❑ Workers performing decontamination procedures
locked out. must wear personal protective equipment (PPE)
❑ Consult a knowledgeable water treatment as directed by their facility safety officer.
professional to clean and treat your new cooling ❑ Cooling towers must be visually inspected regularly
tower prior to startup. Refer to your specific Marley to assess signs of bacterial growth, appearance of
Cooling Tower User Manual for more detailed debris and scale on drift eliminators and general
instructions. operating conditions. Refer to ASHRAE Standard
❑ Cooling towers must be cleaned and disinfected 188 for specific frequency recommendations.
regularly in accordance with ASHRAE Standard Replace worn or damaged components.
188 and Guideline 12.
By following the water management plan, performing regularly scheduled cooling tower inspections and
maintenance, and enlisting the services of water treatment professionals, the opportunity for waterborne
microorganisms, such as Legionella, to colonize is minimized.
Visit spxcooling.com for specific cooling tower product information and user manuals or contact your Marley
sales representative for technical support.
References:
ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 188-2015, Legionellosis: Risk Management for Building Water Systems, ASHRAE, 2015 https://www.ashrae.org/technical-resources/
bookstore/ansi-ashrae-standard-188-2015-legionellosis-risk-management-for-building-water-systems
ASHRAE Guideline 12-2000 - Minimizing the Risk of Legionellosis Associated with Building Water Systems, ASHRAE, 2000 https://www.techstreet.com/ashrae/
standards/guideline-12-2000-minimizing-the-risk-of-legionellosis-associated-with-building-water-systems?product_id=232891
Developing a Water Management Program to Reduce Legionella Growth and Spread in Buildings, Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, June 5, 2017 https://
www.cdc.gov/legionella/maintenance/wmp-toolkit.html

7401 WEST 129 STREET Z0490858_C | ISSUED 01/2019
OVERLAND PARK, KS 66213 USA © 1999-2019 SPX COOLING TECHNOLOGIES, INC | ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
913 664 7400 | spxcooling@spx.com In the interest of technological progress, all products are subject to design and/or
spxcooling.com material change without notice.
user manual
Fluid Cooler pump

I N STA L L AT I O N - O P E R AT I O N - M A I N T E N A N C E
Z0560176_A ISSUED 06/2017 READ AND UNDERSTAND THIS MANUAL PRIOR TO OPERATING OR SERVICING THIS PRODUCT.
contents
This manual contains vital information for the proper operation and
Note maintenance of your Marley MH Fluid Cooler Pump. Carefully read
the manual before operation and follow all instructions. Save this
manual for future reference.
Inspection......................................................................................................................3
Handling.........................................................................................................................3
Operation.......................................................................................................................3
Maintenance..................................................................................................................5
Mechanical Seal Assembly........................................................................................6
Mechanical Seal Replacement.................................................................................9
The following defined terms are used throughout this manual to bring attention
to the presence of hazards of various risk levels, or to important information
concerning the life of the product.
Indicates presence of a hazard which will or can cause personal

Caution injury or property damage if ignored.
Indicates special instructions on installation, operation or

Note maintenance which are important but not related to personal injury
hazards.
2
inspection
Check pump for shortage and damage immediately upon arrival.
Note Note damage or shortage on freight bill (bill of lading); immediately
notify your Marley sales representative.
EXTERIOR
Pay particular attention to conduit box, external hardware and accessories.
Touch up abrasions or scratches with approved paint.
INTERNAL
If extensive or serious external damage is noted, if impeller is damaged (look
in ports), or if shaft binds or sticks, disassemble as required to permit internal
inspection.
handling
Handle with care. Dropping or jarring can seriously damage motor
Caution bearings or break pump parts. Lift with device having capacity for
pump weight, and use lifting hooks or eye bolts (if provided) or rig
double sling around motor frame and pump casing. Do not use sling
through pump motor adapter nor around suction and discharge
flanges.
operation
Pre-Start
Before initial start of the pump, check as follows:
1. The rotation must be checked upon installation. Close, then break the
contacts quickly and observe the rotation of the exposed portion of the
rotating parts. Rotation must agree with the rotation arrow on the motor. For
all pumps, the standard rotation is counterclockwise when viewed from the
suction end. Motor wiring is easily changed in the field. Observe the wiring
diagram on the inside of the terminal box cover, or on the motor nameplate.
2. Check voltage, phase and frequency of line circuit with motor nameplate.
3. Check the suction hood and discharge piping for proper installation.
4. Assure that the collection basin is filled with water to the level indicted
in Startup portion of the MH Fluid Cooler User Manual. This water level
ensures that the pump is primed.
➠
3
operation
Do not run pump dry hoping it will self-prime.

Caution
Serious damage may result if started dry.
Starting
Proceed as follows to start pump:
1. Prime the pump as outlined in Pre-Start. If pump does not prime properly,
or loses prime during start-up, shut down and correct condition before
repeating procedure.
2. Start the motor (pump).
Running
Periodically inspect pump while running, but especially after first start and
following repair.
1. Check pump and piping for leaks. Repair immediately.
2. Record voltage, amperage per phase, and kW (if an indicating wattmeter

is available).
Freezing Protection
Protect pumps shut down during freezing conditions by one of the
following methods:
1. Drain pump; remove all liquid from the casing.
2. Keep fluid moving in pump and insulate or heat the pump to prevent freezing.
If heated, do not let temperature go above 100° to 150°F.
3. Fill pump completely with antifreeze solution.
4
maintenance
Cleaning
• Remove oil, dust, dirt, water, chemicals from exterior or motor and pump.
• Keep motor air inlet and outlet open.
• Blow out interior of open motors with clean compressed air at low pressure.
• Regularly drain moisture from TEFC motors.
Temperature
Total temperature, not the rise, is the measure of safe operation for a motor.
If temperature by thermometer exceeds limits for insulation class, investigate
and change operating conditions.
Labeled Motors
It is imperative for repair of a motor with Underwriters’ Laboratories label that
original clearances be held; that all plugs, screws, other hardware be fastened
securely, and that parts replacements be exact duplicates or approved equals.
Violation of any of the above invalidates Underwriters’ label.
Lubrication
Pumps should require no maintenance. Due to the double shielded prelubricated
bearings, no lubrication is required for the life of the bearings. Inspect bearings
periodically to determine the condition of the grease and replace the bearings
if necessary.
5
mechanical seal assembly
JM FRAME MOTOR
A. Disassembly:
1. Turn off power.
2. Drain pump.
3. Remove bolts holding base to foundation
4. Remove pump casing bolts.
5. Remove motor and rotating element from casing, leaving casing and piping
undisturbed.
6. Insert a screwdriver in one of the impeller waterway passages and back off
the impeller retaining assembly with a socket wrench, as shown in Figure 1.
Figure 1 Back off the impeller retaining assembly.
7. Remove impeller from shaft, being careful not to lose the impeller key, spring
and seal retainer. If impeller is difficult to remove, it may be necessary to
use a bearing puller to pull off impeller.
8. Pry off rotating member of mechanical seal from sleeve by using two (2)
screwdrivers.
9. Remove bolts holding adapter to motor and take off adapter.
10. Place adapter on a flat surface with case rabbet facing down, and push
out stationary part of mechanical seal.
11. Inspect the shaft sleeve, shaft O-ring and flinger. If damaged or worn,
remove and replace with a new one.
6
Figure 2 Prying off the rotating member.
B. Reassembly:
The mechanical seal is a precision product and should be handled
Note accordingly. Use care when handling the lapped running surfaces
of the mechanical seal to ensure they remain clean and free of
chips or scratches.
1. Clean gasket and flange faces, seal seat cavity, shaft sleeve, and motor shaft.
2. Lubricate the seal seat cavity of the adapter and the rubber cup or O-ring
of seal seat with the lubricating fluid that comes with the mechanical seal or
repair kit. Press the stationary seat in seal seat cavity of the adapter squarely
and evenly using a arbor press (if possible) and the cardboard disc supplied
with the seal. Be certain that the lapped face (shiny side) is facing you.
3. Install the flinger on the motor shaft until it bottoms on the motor shaft.
4. Slide the shaft O-ring on the motor shaft until it is tight against the flinger.
Make sure that the shaft O-ring does not get damaged during this procedure.
7
5. Position shaft sleeve chamfer towards motor and slide on motor shaft.
6. With motor preferably in vertical position, remount the adapter on motor,

making sure the motor shaft does not dislocate or chip the stationery seat
of the seal.
7. Apply the lubricating fluid that comes with the mechanical seal or repair
kit to the shaft sleeve and the rubber bellows of the rotary seal. Slide the
seal head on the sleeve; press the rubber drive band on the rotary head
until the lapped face on the head seats firmly against the lapped face of
the stationary seat. Do not chip or scratch faces during installation. Take
extra care to make sure the lapped faces are clean. Install seal spring on
seal head and retainer on spring.
8. Place key in key seat. Line up keyway in impeller with key on motor shaft,
and slide impeller on motor shaft. Be certain that the key is positioned in the
keyway of the motor and impeller. Slightly compress seal spring with impeller
and hold impeller while installing impeller retaining assembly in motor shaft.
9. Insert a screwdriver in a waterway passage of the impeller holding it against

rotation and tighten the retaining assembly as discussed in paragraph 7
of disassembly instructions. The impeller will compress the seal spring to
the proper length assuring the correct pressure on the lapped surfaces.
10. Remove any burrs caused by screwdriver on the vane of impeller in

waterway passage.
11. Slide motor and rotating element in casing. Be sure that any damaged
O-ring or gasket is replaced.
12. T
ighten casing bolts alternately and evenly.
13. R
eplace hold-down bolts.
14. Check for free rotation after assembly is completed.
15. Seal all drain openings using pipe sealant on threads.
16. Reprime before starting. Do not start until pump is completely filled with
water.
8
mechanical seal replacement
C56 FRAME MOTOR
A. Disassembly:
Refer to “JM FRAME” Disassembly, Notes 1-11.
12. Inspect the stub shaft. If damaged or worn, replace with a new one; removal:
A. Drive pin from stub shaft and remove pin.
B. Loosen set screws
C. Remove stub shaft from motor shaft.
Assembly:
For motors with drilled hole:
A. Slide stub shaft on motor shaft. Line up set screws in stub shaft with
motor keyway, and drilled hole in stub shaft with drilled hole in motor
shaft.
B. Tighten set screws
C. Insert #12 drill in pilot hole of stub and motor shaft. Drill out opposite
side of stub shaft.
D. Install pin
For motors without a drilled hole in the motor shaft:
A. Slide stub shaft on motor shaft. Line up set screws in stub shaft with
keyway in motor shaft.
B. Position stub 3 3/32” from Motor C face. (See Figure 3)
C. Tighten set screws

➠
Figure 3 Positioning the stub.
9
D. Insert #12 drill in stub shaft pilot hole and drill completely through motor
shaft and opposite side of stub shaft. See Figure 4.
E. Install pin
Figure 4 Positioning the stub.
B. Reassembly:
The mechanical seal is a precision product and should be handled
Caution accordingly. Use care when handling the lapped running surfaces
of the mechanical seal to ensure they remain clean and free of
chips or scratches.
1. Clean gasket and flange faces, seal seat cavity, and stub shaft.
2. Lubricate the seal seat cavity of the adapter and the rubber cup or O-ring
of seal seat with the lubricating fluid that comes with the mechanical seal or
repair kit. Press the stationary seat in seal seat cavity of the adapter squarely
and evenly using a arbor press (if possible) and the cardboard disc supplied
with the seal. Be certain that the lapped face (shiny side) is facing you.
3. With motor preferably in vertical position, remount the adapter on motor,

making sure the stub shaft does not dislocate or chip the stationery seat
of the seal.
10
4. Apply the lubricating fluid that comes with the mechanical seal or repair
kit to the stub shaft and the rubber bellows of the rotary seal. Slide the
seal head on the stub; press the rubber drive band on the rotary head until
the lapped face on the head seats firmly against the lapped face of the
stationary seat. Do not chip or scratch faces during installation. Take extra
care to make sure the lapped faces are clean. Install seal spring on seal
head and retainer on spring.
5. Place key in key seat. Line up keyway in impeller with key on stub shaft,
and slide impeller on stub shaft. Be certain that the key is positioned in the
keyway of the stub and impeller. Slightly compress seal spring with impeller
and hold impeller while installing impeller retaining assembly in stub shaft.
6. Insert a screwdriver in a waterway passage of the impeller holding it against

rotation and tighten the retaining assembly as discussed in paragraph 7 of
disassemby instructions for JM shaft. The impeller will compress the seal
spring to the proper length assuring the correct pressure on the lapped
surfaces.
7. Remove any burrs caused by screwdriver on the vane of impeller in waterway

passage.
8. Slide motor and rotating element in casing. Be sure that any damaged
O-ring or gasket is replaced.
9. Tighten casing bolts alternately and evenly.
10. Replace hold-down bolts.
11. Check for free rotation after assembly is completed.
12. Seal all drain openings using pipe sealant on threads.
13. Reprime before starting. Do not start until pump is completely filled with
water. The approved lubricating fluid for seal installation is included with
the mechanical seal or repair kit.
Do not use other lubricating liquids. We recommend stocking a

Caution spare mechanical seal or repair kit to eliminate down time.
11
Fluid Cooler pump
U S E R M A N UA L

7401 WEST 129 STREET Z0560176_A (05-1109A) | ISSUED 06/2017
OVERLAND PARK, KS 66213 USA COPYRIGHT © 2017 SPX CORPORATION

user manual
Softork MC coupling
™
M07-1205A I S S UE
Z0592740_B D 0 3 /02/2019
ISSUED 2015 R E A D READ
AN D U N D EUNDERSTAND
AND R S TAN D TH ITHIS
S M AN UAL P RPRIOR
MANUAL I OR TO
TOOOPERATING
P E RATI N G OR
O RSERVICING
S E RV I C I N THIS
G T H PRODUCT
I S PR O D U CT.
CLAMP RING COUPLING
HALF
CLAMP RING
BOLT
FLEXIBLE
ELEMENT
Assembly and Alignment B MIN

1. Inspect and clean motor and Geareducer shafts.
C
®
Remove any burrs on shafts with emery cloth or a fine

file. Remove all lubricants from coupling bores and
mating surfaces. Install keys in motor and Geareducer
shaft keyways.
2. Install a clamp ring on each coupling half using the
bolts provided.
Note: Leave this attachment loose for now, only
engaging a few threads of each bolt—it may be
necessary to reposition the clamp rings for parallel
alignment—Step 7.
Caution: Do not lubricate bolt threads.
3. Slip each coupling half onto its mating shaft. Move the D
motor and Geareducer into place. FLANGE
Note: Clamp ring must be mounted to coupling half DIA
before the motor and Geareducer are positioned.
4. Check coupling spacing by measuring dimension “C”
at the top of the coupling only. Refer to Table and
Detail 1. Slide the coupling halves along the shafts
to obtain spacing. The maximum distance between
shaft ends is 2". The shafts may protrude through the
coupling halves if necessary.
5. Tighten each set screw on its key—24 ft·lbƒ.
Detail 1
place, wrap the flexible element around the clamp rings
as shown. Make sure the beads of the element are fully
1/16" MAX worked down into the seats.
STRAIGHT EDGE 9. Hold the split of the flexible element closed. An 1⁄8"
maximum gap is allowable. Tighten one or two bolts
directly opposite the split—enough to hold the flexible
element in place. Using both hands, knead the rubber
element toward the split. Hold split closed and tighten
the next two bolts farthest from split—enough to hold
the flexible element in place. Repeat this procedure
on all remaining flange bolts. Retighten each bolt in
the order shown in Detail 3 using a torque specified in
table.
Note: MC07 couplings have 5 bolts/half, use a similar
cross pattern.
Tighten all bolts a second time to the specified torque.
Detail 2 Caution: Do not over-torque bolts or you may damage
the clamp ring.
6. Check angular alignment by measuring the “C” Maintenance

dimension at 90° intervals (take at least four 1. Marley SofTork couplings do not require lubrication.
measurements). The total difference between any two 2. Thoroughly inspect the coupling at least every six
measurements, C max – C min, must not exceed 1⁄16". months. Check for looseness of set screws and
See Detail 1. coupling halves on shafts, and for wear of the flexible
7. Check parallel alignment by laying a straight edge element.
across the outside of the coupling halves at several 3. Contact your Marley sales representative if you need
places around its circumference. Parallel misalignment replacement parts. Call 913 664 7400 or check the
may not exceed 1⁄16". See Detail 2. web at spxcooling.com to locate your nearest rep.
Tip: If the clamp rings are larger in diameter than the
coupling halves, remove enough clamp ring bolts
to rotate the clamp rings so the straight edge bears
directly on the coupling halves.
If measured misalignment is greater than 1⁄16", shim
the motor and/or Geareducer mounting feet to obtain
1 3
proper alignment. After adjusting shims, tighten the
hold-down hardware and check alignment. Repeat
the procedure until proper alignment is achieved. The
6 5
best alignment is achieved when the straight edge is
in contact with the coupling halves at four points as
shown in Detail 2.
8. With clamp ring bolts holding the clamp ring(s) in 4 2
Detail 3
Torque
Coupling B C D Cap Screw
ft · lbƒ
MC07 5 1⁄8" 11⁄2" 5 5⁄8" 24 ⁄16" x 11⁄2"
5
MC09 5 9⁄16" 117⁄32" 7 3⁄8" 40 3

⁄8" x 11⁄2"
MC11 6 3⁄8" 19⁄16" 9 3⁄16" 40 3
⁄8" x 11⁄2"
MC12 6 7⁄8" 13⁄4" 101⁄8" 90 1
⁄2" x 11⁄2"
Softork MC coupling
U S E R M A N UA L

7401 WEST 129 STREET Z0592740_B | ISSUED 02/2019
OVERLAND PARK, KS 66213 USA © 2007-2019 SPX COOLING TECHNOLOGIES, INC. | ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
user manual
MH fluid cooler
Z0920512_E ISSUED 03/2019 READ AND UNDERSTAND THIS MANUAL PRIOR TO OPERATING OR SERVICING THIS PRODUCT
contents
This user manual contains vital information for the proper installa-
Note tion and operation of your fluid cooler. Carefully read the manual
before installation or operation of the fluid cooler and follow all
instructions. Save this manual for future reference.
Overview....................................................................................................................................... 3
Fluid Cooler Location................................................................................................................. 4
Fluid Cooler Shipment............................................................................................................... 5
Receiving Fluid Cooler.............................................................................................................. 5
Hoisting Fluid Cooler................................................................................................................. 5
Fluid Cooler Installation............................................................................................................. 6
Motor Wiring................................................................................................................................ 9
Mechanical Equipment........................................................................................................... 10
Fluid Cooler Startup................................................................................................................ 12
Fluid Cooler Operation........................................................................................................... 14
Dry Cooling Operation............................................................................................................ 16
Freezing Weather Operation..................................................................................................17
Water Quality and Blowdown............................................................................................... 20
Fluid Cooler Inspection and Maintenance......................................................................... 22
Belt Tensioning......................................................................................................................... 25
Sheave Alignment.................................................................................................................... 29
Routine Maintenance.............................................................................................................. 31
Motor Relubrication (external motor option)...................................................................... 34
Seasonal Shutdown Instructions......................................................................................... 35
Long-Term Storage Procedures............................................................................................ 36
Troubleshooting........................................................................................................................ 40
Maintenance Schedule........................................................................................................... 42
The following defined terms are used throughout this manual to bring attention
to the presence of hazards of various risk levels, or to important information
concerning the life of the product.
Indicates presence of a hazard which can cause severe personal

Warning injury, death or substantial property damage if ignored.
Indicates presence of a hazard which will or can cause personal

Caution injury or property damage if ignored.
Indicates special instructions on installation, operation or mainte-

Note nance which are important but not related to personal injury hazards.
2
overview
This User Manual as well as those offered separately on motors, fans,
Geareducer, couplings, drive shafts, float valves, pumps, etc., are intended
to assure that this fluid cooler serves you properly for the maximum possible
time. Since product warrantability may well depend upon your actions, please
read this User Manual thoroughly prior to operation.
This User Manual provides information regarding general fluid cooler installation
and operation. Any deviation from, change or modification to, the User Manual,
the original design conditions or the original intended use of the equipment
may result in improper installation and/or operation of the fluid cooler.
Any such deviation, change or modification shall be the responsibility of
the party or parties making such deviation, change or modification. SPX
Cooling Technologies, Inc. expressly disclaims all liability for any such deviation,
change or modification. The equipment shall be warranted in accordance with
the applicable SPX Cooling Technologies Certification of Limited Warranty.
If you have questions about the operation and/or maintenance of this fluid
cooler, and you don’t find the answers in this manual, please contact your
Marley sales representative. When writing for information, or when ordering
parts, please include the serial number shown on the fluid cooler nameplate.
Safety First
The location and orientation of the fluid cooler can affect the safety of those
responsible for installing, operating or maintaining the fluid cooler. However,
since SPX Cooling Technologies does not determine the location or orienta-
tion of the fluid cooler, we cannot be responsible for addressing those safety
issues that are affected by the fluid cooler’s location or orientation.
The following safety issues should be considered by those

Warning responsible for designing the fluid cooler installation.
• Access to and from the fan deck
• Access to and from maintenance access doors
• The possible need for ladders (either portable or permanent) to
gain access to the fan deck or maintenance access doors
• The possible need for handrails around the fan deck
• The possible need for external access platforms
• Access issues due to obstructions surrounding the fluid cooler
• Lockout of mechanical equipment
• The possible need for safety cages around ladders
• The need to avoid exposing maintenance personnel to the
potentially unsafe environment inside the fluid cooler
➠
3
overview
It is not intended nor assumed that access to the fan deck on
Note single-flow models—Models MHF7101 thru MHF7109—is needed or
necessary.
Those are only some of the safety issues that may arise in the design
process. SPX strongly recommends that you consult a safety engi-
neer to be sure that all safety considerations have been addressed.
Several options are available that may assist you in addressing some of these
personnel safety concerns, including:
• Louver face distribution basin access platform with ladder and handrail.
• A
handrail system around the perimeter of the fan deck with either one or
two ladders for access to the deck. Doubleflow models MHF7111 and
MHF7113 only.
• E
xtended fan deck that provides additional access around one end of the fan
cylinder opposite the fan deck access ladder. Doubleflow models MHF7111
and MHF7113 only.
• Ladder extensions—used where the base of the fluid cooler is elevated.
• Safety cages for ladders.
• External lube lines.
• Access door platform.
• M
otor located outside the fluid cooler. Doubleflow models MHF7111 and
MHF7113 with Geareducer drive only.
• E
xternal motor access platform. Doubleflow models MHF7111 and MHF7113
with Geareducer drive only.
• P
lenum walkway.
• Mechanical equipment access platform.
Fluid Cooler Location

Space available around the fluid cooler should be as generous as possible
to promote ease of maintenance—and to permit freedom of airflow into and
through the fluid cooler. If you have questions about the adequacy of the avail-
able space and the intended configuration of the fluid cooler, please contact
your Marley sales representative for guidance.
Prepare a stable, level support foundation for the fluid cooler, utilizing weight,
wind load, and dimensional information appearing on appropriate Marley
submittal drawings. Supports must be level to insure proper operation of the
fluid cooler.
4
installation
The fluid cooler must be located at such distance and direction
Warning to avoid the possibility of contaminated fluid cooler discharge air
being drawn into building fresh air intake ducts. The purchaser
should obtain the services of a Licensed Professional Engineer or
Registered Architect to certify that the location of the fluid cooler is
in compliance with applicable air pollution, fire and clean air codes.
Fluid Cooler Shipment

Unless otherwise specified, the MH Fluid Cooler ships by truck (on flat
bed trailers), which lets you receive, hoist, and install the fluid cooler in one
continuous operation. Single-cell single-flow fluid coolers ship on one truck.
Doubleflow and multicell fluid coolers, depending on their size, may require
more than one truck.
Responsibility for the condition of the fluid cooler upon its arrival belongs to
the trucker—as does the coordination of multiple shipments, if required.
Receiving Fluid Cooler

Prior to unloading the fluid cooler from the delivering carrier, inspect the ship-
ment for evidence of damage in transit. If damage is apparent, note the freight
bill accordingly. This will support your future recovery claim.
Find and remove the installation instruction drawings and bills of material
located in a plastic bag in the water collection basin. This information should
be kept for future reference and maintenance purposes.
Hoisting Fluid Cooler

All MH Fluid Cooler models must use hoist clips and overhead lifting for
handling assembled fluid cooler. Fork lifting from base of fluid cooler
is not permitted. The clips for the top modules are located at the fan deck
level. The clips for the lower modules are located at the bottom of the mod-
ules at the water collection basin. A Hoisting-Installation label which has
hoisting dimensional information is located on the side casing near the fluid
cooler centerline. Remove fluid cooler from the carrier and hoist into place
according to the instructions on the label.
Upper and lower modules must be hoisted and set separately. Do

Caution not preassemble modules prior to hoisting.
➠
5
installation
Hoisting clips are provided for ease of unloading and positioning
Warning the fluid cooler. For overhead lifts or where additional safety is
required, safety slings should also be placed under the fluid cooler
modules. Under no circumstances should you combine the top and
bottom modules of modular models and attempt to hoist them at
the same time by utilizing the hoisting clips alone!
OFFSET REQUIRED FOR

BALANCED LIFT
C
L C
L
SINGLE FLOW FLUID COOLER SHOWN
Fluid Cooler Installation

These installation instructions are intended to help you prepare
Note before your fluid cooler arrives. If discrepancies exist between these
instructions and those shipped with the fluid cooler, the instructions
shipped with the fluid cooler will govern.
1. Prior to placement of the fluid cooler, confirm that the supporting platform
is level, and that the anchor bolt holes are correctly located in accordance
with Marley drawings. If your installation uses vibration isolators to dampen
vibration, they must mounted below the supporting steel. See support
drawings for further information.
2. Place bottom module on your prepared supports, aligning anchor bolt holes
with those in your supporting steel. Make sure that the orientation agrees
with your intended piping arrangement. Attach fluid cooler to supporting
steel with 3⁄4" diameter bolts and flat washers (by others). See support
drawing for location and quantity. Position flat washers between the bolt
head and the fluid cooler basin flange.
6
installation
3. Before setting top module in place on bottom module, clean any debris
from the underside of the top module fill, skid and beams and from the
top of the bottom module and remove shipping cover from bottom of top
module—replace fasteners at side of module to prevent leaks. Place top
module on the top peripheral bearing surface (factory-installed gasket)
of bottom module, aligning mating holes as it is set in place. Attach top
module to bottom module with fasteners provided according to drawings
shipped with your fluid cooler.
4. Connect the recirculation piping with rubber coupling shipped with the
bottom module piping according to drawings shipped with you fluid cooler.
5. Attach makeup water supply piping to appropriately-sized float valve
connection located in collection water basin side wall. Install the drain
and overflow according to drawings shipped with your fluid cooler. If you
wish to pipe overflow and drain water to a remote discharge point, make
those connections at this time also.
Fasteners and components provided by others that are to be at-

Note tached to the fluid cooler must be compatible with the fluid cooler
materials—i.e. fasteners in a stainless steel cold water basin must
be stainless steel.
6. Attach the process fluid supply and return piping to the coil. The coil
connection type was defined based on customer preference before the
tower was ordered. The most common connection types are described
are as follows.
Except for the horizontal components of piping, do not support

Caution your piping from the fluid cooler inlet / outlet connections — sup-
port it externally. Normally, one of the following inlet arrangements
is provided:
Bevel and groove connection: The coil piping connections are beveled
for welding and grooved for a mechanical coupling. If weld connections are
used, it is recommended that weld areas be protected against corrosion.
Cold galvanizing is suggested for galvanized coils, applied according to
the manufacturer’s instructions.
For welded or soldered connections, protect adjacent areas from

Caution excessive heat and sparks or damage may occur.
➠
7
installation
Threaded connection: The coil piping connections are fitted with male
threads of a specified thread type—most commonly NPT or BSP, depend-
ing on location of installation.
Copper Soldered connection: The piping connections are pipe stubs
for field soldering.
Flanged connection: The coil piping connections are designed for flat-
face flange fittings conforming to 125# ANSI B16.1 specifications and
are field installed (by others). Flange fittings are grooved connection for
steel coils and solder connection for copper coils. Full faced gaskets and
appropriately sized bolts (by others) must be used for proper function.
7. Wire motor(s) and recirculation pump(s) in accordance with wiring diagram.
For maintenance/safety purposes, SPX recommends a lockout

Warning type disconnect switch for all mechanical equipment. In addition
to a disconnect switch, the motor should be wired to main power
supply through short circuit protection, and a magnetic starter with
overload protection.
Motor Wiring
Wire motor leads as shown on the motor nameplate matching the supply
voltage. Do not deviate from the motor nameplate wiring.
Internal space heaters may be present, depending upon the motor manufac-
turer. For space heater operation and wiring refer to the Marley “Fan Motor”
User Manual Z0239042.
Either of following symbols may be shown on the motor nameplate –
Δ, Δ Δ, Y, or YY. These symbols represent how the motor is constructed on
the inside and in no way have anything to do with a Delta or Wye electrical
distribution system serving the motor.
When using a starter:
• Set motor overload protection to 110% of motor nameplate amps.
This setting allows the fan motor to operate during cooler weather.
During cooler weather it is common for the motor to draw 6 to 10%
higher than nameplate amps. High amps are common during fluid
cooler commissioning when the fluid cooler is dry and the ambient air
temperature is cool.
Do not start the motor more than four to five times per hour. Short
Note cycling the fluid cooler will cause fuses, breakers or OLs to operate
and will decrease motor life.
8
installation
When using a two-speed starter:
• Motor rotation must be the same at slow speed and high speed.
• Single winding motor requires a starter with a shorting contactor.
• Two-winding motor requires a starter with out a shorting contactor.
• All two-speed starters must have a 20 second time delay relay when
switching from high speed to low speed.
Do not start the motor more than four to five times per hour (each
Note low speed start and each high speed start count as one start).
When using a VFD:
Before beginning, ensure that the motor is rated for “Inverter Duty”
Note per NEMA MG-1, part 31.
• Set the VFD solid state overload protection to 119% of motor name-
plate amps and set “maximum current parameter” in the VFD to motor
nameplate amps. “Maximum current parameter” will reduce fan speed
and limit amp draw to nameplate amps during cold weather opera-
tion. If furnished with a mechanical OL set this at 110% over motor
nameplate amps.
• Motor rotation must be the same in both VFD mode and bypass mode.
• If cable distance between the VFD and motor is greater than 100 feet a
DV/DT output filter is recommended to avoid damage to the motor. 100
feet distance is based on our field experience, the VFD manufacture
may state different distances and distance does vary depending on
the VFD manufacturer.
• Program the VFD for variable torque output. Flux vector and constant
torque modes may damage the gearbox.
• Do not start and stop the motor using the safety switch at the motor.
If the drive is being commanded to run and the load side is cycled ON
and OFF with the safety switch this may damage the VFD.
Using a VFD in cooling applications has advantages over traditional single

or two speed motor control. A VFD can reduce the cost of electrical energy
being used and provide better temperature control. In addition, it reduces the
mechanical and electrical stress on the motor and mechanical equipment.
Electrical savings can be large during periods of low ambient temperature
when the cooling requirement can be satisfied at reduced speeds. To benefit
from these advantages, it is important that the drive be installed correctly.
Marley VFD and controls are specifically designed for our cooling products. If
you have purchased a Marley VFD and/or controls package, please follow the
➠
9
installation
instructions in the User Manual for that system. Most VFD problems can be
avoided by purchasing Marley drive systems. If you are installing a VFD other
than a Marley drive, please refer to that drives installation manual.
Improper use of a VFD may cause damage to equipment or personal
Warning injury. Failure to correctly install the VFD drive will automatically
void all warranties associated with the motor and any equipment
that is either electrically or mechanically (directly) attached to the
VFD drive system. The length of this warranty avoidance will be
contingent on properly installing the VFD system and repairing any
damage that may have occurred during its operation. SPX Cooling
Technologies does not assume responsibility for any technical sup-
port or damages for problems associated with non-Marley brand
VFD systems.
Changing the operational fan speed from the factory settings could
Warning cause the fan to operate in an unstable region which may result in
damage to the equipment and possible injury.
Mechanical Equipment
The fluid cooler is designed to operate at full speed and half speed.
Caution Warranty is void if the fluid cooler is operated at speeds which cause
damaging vibrations to the fluid cooler and associated equipment.
When utilizing a variable frequency drive, the fluid cooler must be
tested across the full range of speeds and checked against CTI
guidelines for excessive vibration. Speed ranges not meeting these
guidelines must be locked out in the VFD.
Always shut off electrical power to the fluid cooler fan motor prior
Warning to performing any maintenance on the fluid cooler. Any electrical
switches should be locked out and tagged out to prevent others
from turning the power back on.
1. If equipped, check oil level . Although the Geareducer was filled to the
proper level at the factory, tipping during shipment and hoisting may have
caused some loss of oil. If oil is required, fill Geareducer to the proper
level with approved lubricant. See Geareducer User Manual. Check oil
level at the Geareducer or dipstick (standpipe located on fan deck, if so
equipped) to confirm that the proper level is indicated.
2. On doubleflow models—MHF7111 and MHF7113—install the two-piece fan
guard according to the installation drawing shipped with the fluid cooler.
10
installation
Improper installation of the fan cylinder and fan guard will destroy
Warning the structural integrity of the fan guard. Failure of the fan guard could
allow operating or maintenance personnel to fall into the rotating fan.
3. Spin the fan(s) manually to assure that all fan blades properly clear the inside
of the fan cylinder. If equipped, observe the action of the coupling (or drive
shaft couplings) to be sure that the motor and Geareducer are properly
aligned. If necessary, correct the alignment in accordance with the included
manual. For belt drive equipped models observe the action of the sheaves
and belts to be sure that the motor is properly aligned with the fan sheave.
See Belt Tensioning and Sheave Alignment on pages 25 and 30.
It is essential that the fan cylinder and fan guard be installed in ac-
Note cordance with the drawings shipped with the fluid cooler. Do not
force the fan cylinder out of round.
4. Momentarily bump (energize) the motor(s) and observe rotation of the

fan(s). If rotation is backwards, shut off the fan and reverse two of the
three primary leads supplying power to the motor.
If fluid cooler is equipped with a two-speed motor, check for proper ro-
Caution tation at both speeds. Check also to see that starter is equipped with a
20 second time delay which prevents direct switching from high
speed to low speed. If the fan is intended to be reversed for deicing
purposes, make sure that the starter is equipped with a 2 minute
time delay between changes of direction. These delays will prevent
abnormal stress from being applied to the mechanical equipment
and the electrical circuit components.
5. Run the motor and observe the operation of the mechanical equipment.
Operation should be stable, and, if equipped, there should be no evidence
of oil leakage from the Geareducer.
6. If equipped with belt drive, check the torque on the fan and motor sheave
after 10 - 60 hours of operation. See Bushing Fastener Torque Values
on pages 25 and 30.
If the water supply system is not being operated—or if there is no
Note heat load on the system—motor amps read at this time may indicate
an apparent overload of as much as 10–20%. This is because of the
increased density of unheated air flowing through the fan. Deter-
mination of an accurate motor load should await the application of
the design heat load.
11
operation
Fluid Cooler Startup

Microorganisms including Legionella bacteria can exist in premise
Warning plumbing including cooling towers. The development of an effective
water management plan (WMP) and implementation of maintenance
procedures are essential to prevent the presence, dissemination and
amplification of Legionella bacteria and other waterborne contami-
nants throughout premise plumbing. Before operating the cooling
tower, the water management plan and maintenance procedures
must be in place and regularly practiced.
Water System:
1. Consult a knowledgeable water treatment professional to clean and treat
your new fluid cooler prior to startup. Fluid coolers must be cleaned and
disinfected regularly in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 188 and
Guideline 12.
The water conditions during initial fluid cooler operation are crucial in pre-
venting premature corrosion of galvanized steel (white rust). For at least
the first eight weeks of operation, pH should be controlled between 6.5
and 8.0 with hardness and alkalinity levels between 100 and 300 ppm
(expressed as CaCO3).
2. Do NOT attempt any service unless the fan motor is locked out.
3. Remove any and all accumulated debris from fluid cooler. Pay particular
attention to inside areas of collection water basin, distribution water basins,
louvers and drift eliminators. Make sure that cold water suction screens
are clear and properly installed.
4. Fill the water system to an approximate depth of 8" in the depressed area
of the collection water basin. This is the recommended operating water
level. Adjust the float valve so that it is 75% open at that level. Continue
filling the system until the
water reaches a level ap-
proximately 1⁄8" below the
lip of the overflow.
12
operation
5. Start your pump(s) and check for proper rotation as indicated by the ar-
row on the pump cover, observe system operation. A certain amount of
“pump-down” of the basin water level will occur before water completes
the circuit and begins to fall from the fill in the upper module. The amount
of initial pump-down may be insufficient to cause the float valve to open.
However, you can check its operation by pressing down on the operating
lever to which the stem of the float valve is attached.
Some trial and error adjustment of the float valve may be required to bal-
ance the makeup water with fluid cooler operation. Ideally, the float valve
setting will be such that no water is wasted through the overflow at pump
shutdown. However, the water level after pump start-up must be deep
enough to assure positive pump suction.
6. Open the valve on the fluid cooler bleed line and adjust bleed to the
recommended rate. See Water Quality and Blowdown section.
7. Continue pump operation for about 15 minutes, after which it is recom-
mended that the water system be drained, flushed and refilled.
8. While operating the recirculating water pump(s) and prior to operating
the fluid cooler fan, execute one of the two alternative biocidal treatment
programs described in the following:
• Resume treatment with the biocide which had been used prior to shut-
down. Utilize the services of the water treatment supplier. Maintain the
maximum recommended biocide residual (for the specific biocide) for
a sufficient period of time (residual and time will vary with the biocide)
to bring the system under good biological control or
• Treat the system with sodium hypochlorite to a level of 4 to 5 ppm free
chlorine residual at a pH of 7.0 to 7.6. The chlorine residual must be
held at 4 to 5 ppm for six hours, measurable with standard commercial
water test kits.
If the fluid cooler has been in operation and then shut down for a dura-
tion of time and not drained, perform one of the two previous biocidal
treatment programs directly to the fluid cooler storage vessel (collection
basin, drain down tank, etc.) without circulating stagnant water over the
fluid cooler fill or operating the fluid cooler fan.
After biocidal pretreatment has been successfully completed, cooling
water may be circulated over the fluid cooler fill with the fan off.
When biocidal treatment has been maintained at a satisfactory level for
at least six hours, the fan may be turned on and the system returned to
service. Resume the standard water treatment program, including biocidal
treatment.
13
operation
Fluid Cooler Operation

General:
The cold process fluid temperature obtained from an operating fluid cooler
will vary with the following influences:
1. Heat load With the fan in full operation, if the heat load increases, the
cold process fluid temperature will rise. If the heat load reduces, the cold
process fluid temperature will reduce.
Note that the number of degrees (“range”) through which the fluid cooler
cools the process fluid is established by the system heat load and the
amount of fluid being circulated, in accordance with the following for-
mula—formula is only valid for 100% water as process fluid:
Heat Load (Btu/hr)

Range – °F =
gpm x 500
or — in SI units
The fluid cooler establishes only the cold process fluid temperature at-
Heat Load (kW)
Range
tainable under – °C = circumstance.
any operating
Water Flow (m3/hr) x 1.162
2. Air wet-bulb temperature Cold process fluid temperature will also vary
with the wet-bulb temperature of the air entering the louvered faces of the
fluid cooler. Reduced wet-bulb temperatures will result in colder process
fluid temperatures. However, the cold process fluid temperature will not
vary linearly with the wet-bulb. For example, a 20°F reduction in wet-bulb
may result in only a 15°F reduction in cold process fluid temperature.
3. Fluid flow rate Increasing the process fluid flow rate (gpm) will cause
a slight elevation in cold process fluid temperature, while reducing the
fluid flow rate will cause the cold process fluid temperature to decrease
slightly. However, at a given heat load (see formula above), process fluid
flow reductions also cause an increase in the incoming hot process fluid
temperature and thermal range.
4. Air flow rate Reducing air flow through the fluid cooler causes the cold
process fluid temperature to rise. This is the recommended method by
which to control leaving process fluid temperature.
If your fluid cooler is equipped with a single-speed motor, the motor may
be shut off when the process fluid temperature becomes too cold. This will
cause the process fluid temperature to rise. When the fluid temperature
then becomes too warm for your process, the motor can be restarted.
14
operation
Fan Cycling Limits:
Considering the normal fan and motor sizes utilized on MH Fluid

Note Coolers, anticipate that approximately 4 to 5 starts per hour are
allowable.
If your fluid cooler is equipped with a two-speed motor(s), you will have
an opportunity for process temperature control. When the process fluid
temperature becomes too cold, switching the fan to half-speed will cause
the cold process fluid temperature to rise—stabilizing at a temperature
a few degrees higher than before. With a further reduction in fluid tem-
perature, the fan may be cycled alternately from half-speed to off.
Do not start the motor more than four to five times per hour (each
Note low speed start and each high speed start count as one start).
For greater insight on process fluid temperature control, please read

Marley Technical Report H-001 “Cooling Tower Energy Management”,
available at spxcooling.com.

Pump cycling limits Cycling the recirculating water pump(s) to control
process fluid temperature is not typically recommended. It is recommended
that while process fluid is being circulated through the coil the fluid cooler
recirculation water system always be in operation. If the recirculating water
pumps(s) are cycled as part of normal system operation, care must be
exercised — frequent wet/dry cycles may lead to premature scaling of the
coil surface.

Dampers If equipped, the positive closure damper system is designed
to help prevent heat loss from the coil due to air movement caused by
convection or wind conditions when both the fan and pump are off.
Upon start-up of the fluid cooler fans, the damper actuator is energized
and rotates the damper assembly blades open. The actuator should be
wired into the control circuitry of the fan motor. Upon system shutdown
the damper actuator is de-energized and the spring return actuator returns
the damper blades to the closed position.
➠
15
operation
If the dampers are equipped with an automatic electric actuator,
Note the actuator electric motor controller will include a 115-volt AC
space heater in accordance with the SPX Cooling specification. The
space heater is to be energized at all times whether actuator mo-
tor is operating or not. The purpose of the energized space heater
is to prevent moisture inside the unit from corroding the internal
components. Failure to wire and energize the space heater will void
the warranty if the actuator fails due to internal corrosion.
Automatic Electric Actuator must be stored in a dry environment

until installed. If a unit is going to sit idle prior to startup, the actua-
tor must be removed from the damper and stored appropriately.
Dry Operation
Also refer to the Freezing Weather Operation and Protection Against

Note Coil Freezing sections.
Models equipped with a finned coil(s) are designed to operate dry without
recirculating water during colder weather as heat load and ambient condi-
tions permit.
If dry operation is intended and the recirculating water is at risk of freezing,
the recirculating pump should be turned off, and the water in the collection
basin, pump and make-up supply piping should be drained.
Care must be exercised when cycling the recirculating water pump(s)— fre-
quent wet/dry cycles may lead to premature scaling of the coil surface.
16
operation
Freezing Weather Operation

The Marley film-fill system used in the MH Fluid Cooler has air entrance louvers
that are molded as an integral part of the fill. This feature makes these fluid
coolers very forgiving of cold weather operation, even at the low temperature
and reduced load conditions encountered in low temperature applications.
Nevertheless, during operation in subfreezing weather, the opportunity exists
for ice to form in the colder regions of the fluid cooler.
Slushy, transitory ice forms routinely in the colder regions of the

Note fill of low temperature fluid coolers, and is visible through the fluid
cooler louvers. Such ice normally has no adverse effect on fluid
cooler operation, but its appearance should be a signal to the op-
erator to undertake ice control procedures.
It is the operator's responsibility to prevent the formation of destruc-

tive (hard) ice on the fluid cooler fill. Certain guidelines should be
followed:
1. Do not allow the fluid cooler's leaving process fluid temperature to drop
below 45°F. If such low temperature operation is necessary or beneficial
to your process, establish the minimum allowable level as follows:
During the coldest days of the first winter of operation, observe whether
any ice is forming on the louver face, particularly near the bottom part of
the louver face. If hard ice is present on the louvers, you must increase
the allowable cold water temperature.
If the minimum allowable cold process fluid temperature is es-

Caution tablished at or near minimum heat load, it should be safe for all
operating conditions.
Having established the minimum allowable cold water temperature,

maintaining that temperature can be accomplished by fan manipulation,
as outlined in Item 4 under Fluid Cooler Operation.
2. As cold air enters the louvers, it causes the water flowing over the fill to
be drawn inward toward the center of the fluid cooler. Thus, under fan
operation, the louvers and lower periphery of the fluid cooler structure
remain partly dry, seeing only random splashing from within the fluid
cooler—plus normal atmospheric moisture from the entering air. Such
lightly wetted areas are most subject to freezing.
➠
17
operation
Therefore, if excessive ice forms on the louvers, stop the fan for a few
minutes. With the fan off, the water flow will increase in the vicinity of the
louvers and reduce the ice buildup.
3. Under extended extreme cold conditions, it may be necessary to operate
the fan in reverse. This forces warm air out through the louvers, melting
any accumulated ice—adequate heat load must be available. Reversal
of fan should only be done at half speed or less. Reverse operation of
the fan should be used sparingly and should only be used to control ice,
not to prevent it. Reverse fan operation should not need to exceed 1 or
2 minutes. Monitoring is required to determine the time required to melt
accumulated ice.
Operating the fan in reverse at half speed for prolonged periods

Warning during subfreezing weather can cause severe damage to fans and
fan cylinders. Ice can accumulate inside fan cylinders at fan blade
plane of rotation and fan blade tips will eventually strike this ring of
ice, damaging the fan blades or cylinder. Ice can also accumulate
on fan blades and be thrown off, damaging fan cylinder or blades.
Allow a minimum of 10 minute delay between reverse operation
and forward operation during subfreezing weather to permit ice to
dissipate from fan blades and fan cylinders. See Fan Drive Caution
note on page 9 for fan speed change and reversing precautions.
Intermittent Freezing Weather Operation:

If periods of shutdown (nights, weekends, etc.) occur during freezing weather,
measures must be taken to prevent the water in the cold water basin—and
all exposed pipework—from freezing. Several methods are used to combat
this, including automatic basin heater systems and pump freeze protection
systems available from Marley.
Basin heaters systems will not prevent the coil from freezing.
Warning
Unless some means of freeze prevention is incorporated into your

Caution system, the fluid cooler basin and exposed pipework should be
drained at the beginning of each wintertime shutdown period.
If fluid cooler basin is drained, verify that all basin heaters have been
Warning shut off either by automatic cutoff or disconnect switch.
18
operation
Protection Against Coil Freezing:

Ethylene and propylene glycol solutions are the best means to protect the
coil from freezing. The following table provides the coil volume for each
MH Fluid Cooler model. On MHF7111 and MHF7113 doubleflow models
coil volumes are for both coils added together.
Steel Coil:
Coil Volume Coil Volume Coil Volume
Model Model Model
US Gallons US Gallons US Gallons
MHF7101_ _ _HN 52 MHF7105_ _ _CN 229 MHF7109_ _ _CN 625
MHF7101_ _ _AN 73 MHF7105_ _ _AF 183 MHF7111_ _ _AN 613
MHF7101_ _ _JN 83 MHF7105_ _ _BF 248 MHF7111_ _ _JN 763
MHF7101_ _ _BN 105 MHF7105_ _ _CF 280 MHF7111_ _ _BN 885
MHF7101_ _ _DN 73 MHF7107_ _ _HN 195 MHF7111_ _ _CN 877
MHF7101_ _ _EN 105 MHF7107_ _ _AN 252 MHF7111_ _ _AF 746
MHF7103_ _ _HN 77 MHF7107_ _ _JN 318 MHF7111_ _ _BF 1017
MHF7103_ _ _AN 99 MHF7107_ _ _BN 375 MHF7111_ _ _CF 1009
MHF7103_ _ _JN 125 MHF7107_ _ _CN 435 MHF7113_ _ _AN 738
MHF7103_ _ _BN 147 MHF7107_ _ _AF 319 MHF7113_ _ _JN 920
MHF7103_ _ _AF 137 MHF7107_ _ _BF 442 MHF7113_ _ _BN 1071
MHF7103_ _ _BF 186 MHF7107_ _ _CF 501 MHF7113_ _ _CN 1063
MHF7105_ _ _HN 102 MHF7109_ _ _HN 291 MHF7113_ _ _AF 880
MHF7105_ _ _AN 132 MHF7109_ _ _AN 379 MHF7113_ _ _BF 1213
MHF7105_ _ _JN 167 MHF7109_ _ _JN 477 MHF7113_ _ _CF 1205
MHF7105_ _ _BN 197 MHF7109_ _ _BN 567
Copper Coil:
Coil Volume Coil Volume Coil Volume
Model Model Model
US Gallons US Gallons US Gallons
MHF7101_ _ _ANC 46 MHF7103_ _ _ANC 70 MHF7105_ _ _CNC 134
MHF7101_ _ _BNC 65 MHF7103_ _ _BNC 99 MHF7107_ _ _ANC 171
MHF7101_ _ _DNC 46 MHF7105_ _ _ANC 92 MHF7107_ _ _BNC 249
MHF7101_ _ _ENC 65 MHF7105_ _ _BNC 133 MHF7107_ _ _CNC 252
When the use of industrial antifreeze solutions is not possible, the system
must be operated to meet both of the following conditions.
1. Maintain sufficient flow rate through the coil.
2. Maintain sufficient heat load on the process fluid. Fluid exiting the coil
must be maintained at or above 45°F. Cycling of the recirculation pump
should not be used to control process temperatures.
➠
19
maintenance
Draining the galvanized steel coil is not acceptable as a normal
Caution method of freeze protection—draining promotes corrosion inside
the coil tubes. Draining is acceptable in an emergency if the coil
is not protected by an antifreeze solution. Copper coils and stain-
less steel coils may be drained as necessary without significantly
increasing corrosion risk.
It is recommended that you discuss your freeze prevention options with your
local Marley sales representative.
Water Quality and Blowdown

Maintaining Water Quality:
The steel used in MH Fluid Coolers has been galvanized with a heavy zinc
coating averaging 2.0 mils in thickness. Other materials used (PVC fill, drift
eliminators, and louvers, aluminum fans, cast iron Geareducer, etc.) are se-
lected to offer maximum service life in a “normal” fluid cooler environment,
defined as follows:
Recirculating water with a pH between 6.5 and 8; a chloride content (as NaCl)
below 500 ppm; a sulfate content (SO4) below 250 ppm; total alkalinity (as
CaCO3) below 500 ppm; calcium hardness (as CaCO3) above 50 ppm; no
significant contamination with unusual chemicals or foreign substances; and
adequate water treatment to minimize scaling.
• Startup Conditions: The water conditions during initial fluid cooler opera-
tion are crucial in preventing premature corrosion of galvanized steel (white
rust). For at least the first eight weeks of operation, pH should be controlled
between 6.5 and 8.0 with hardness and alkalinity levels between 100 and
300 ppm (expressed as CaCO3).
• Chlorine (if used) shall be added intermittently, with a free residual not to
exceed 1 ppm—maintained for short periods. Excessive chlorine levels may
deteriorate sealants and other materials of construction.
• An atmosphere surrounding the fluid cooler no worse than “moderate in-
dustrial”, where rainfall and fog are no more than slightly acid, and they do
not contain significant chlorides or hydrogen sulfide (H2S).
• Many proprietary chemicals exist for control of scale, corrosion, and biologi-
cal growth and should be used prudently. Also, combinations of chemicals
may cause reactions which reduce treatment effectiveness, and certain
chemicals such as surfactants, biodispersants and antifoams may increase
drift rate.
20
maintenance
The structure and coil of your fluid cooler consists primarily of
Note galvanized steel, therefore your water treatment program must be
compatible with zinc. In working with your water treatment supplier,
it is important that you recognize the potential effects on zinc of the
specific treatment program you choose.
Blowdown:
A fluid cooler cools water by continuously causing a portion of it to evaporate.
Although the water lost by evaporation is replenished by the makeup system,
it exits the fluid cooler as pure water—leaving behind its burden of dissolved
solids to concentrate in the remaining water. Given no means of control, this
increasing concentration of contaminants can reach a very high level.
In order to achieve water quality which is acceptable to the fluid cooler, the
selected water treatment company must work from a relatively constant level
of concentrations. This stabilization of contaminant concentrations is usually
accomplished by blowdown, which is the constant discharge of a portion of
the circulating water to waste. As a rule, acceptable levels on which to base
a treatment schedule will be in the range of 2-4 concentrations. The following
table shows the minimum amount of blowdown (percent of flow) required to
maintain different concentrations with various cooling ranges*:
Number of Concentrations
Cooling Range
1.5X 2.0X 2.5X 3.0X 4.0X 5.0X 6.0X
5° F (2.78° C) .78 .38 .25 .18 .11 .08 .06
10° F (5.56° C) 1.58 .78 .51 .38 .25 .18 .14
15° F (8.33° C) 2.38 1.18 .78 .58 .3 8 .28 .22
20° F (11.11° C) 3.18 1.58 1.05 .78 .51 .38 .30
25° F (13.89° C) 3.98 1.98 1.32 .98 .64 .48 .38
Multipliers are based on drift of 0.02% of the circulating water rate.
* Range = Difference between hot water temperature and cold water temperature.
EXAMPLE: 700 gpm circulating rate, 18°F cooling range. To maintain 4

concentrations, the required blowdown is 0.458% or .00458 times 700 gpm,
which is 3.2 gpm.
If fluid cooler is operated at 4 concentrations, circulating water will contain
four times as much dissolved solid as the makeup water, assuming none of
the solids form scale or are otherwise removed from the system.
21
maintenance
When water treatment chemicals are added, they should not be in-
Note troduced into the circulating water system via the water collection
basin of the fluid cooler. Water velocities are lowest at that point,
which results in inadequate mixing. Ideal locations would be in the
redistribution basin above the coil, or in the riser pipe above the
discharge of the recirculating water pump(s).
Fluid Cooler Inspection and Maintenance

Microorganisms including Legionella bacteria can exist in premise
Warning plumbing including fluid coolers. The development of an effective
water management plan (WMP) and implementation of maintenance
procedures are essential to prevent the presence, dissemination
and amplification of Legionella bacteria and other waterborne con-
taminants throughout premise plumbing. Before operating the fluid
cooler, the water management plan and maintenance procedures
must be in place and regularly practiced.
In addition, the following steps are recommended:
Do NOT attempt any service unless the fan motor is locked out.
• Consult a knowledgeable water treatment professional to clean and treat
your cooling tower. See Fluid Cooler Startup section of this manual.
• Fluid coolers must be cleaned and disinfected regularly in accordance with
ASHRAE Standard 188 and Guideline 12.
• Workers performing decontamination procedures must wear personal
protective equipment (PPE) as directed by their facility safety officer.
• Fluid coolers must be visually inspected regularly to assess signs of bacte-
rial growth, appearance of debris and scale on drift eliminators and general
operating conditions. Refer to ASHRAE Standard 188 and Guideline 12
for specific frequency recommendations.
• Replace worn or damaged components.
To minimize the presence of waterborne microorganisms, including Legionella,
follow the water management plan for your facility, perform regularly scheduled
fluid cooler inspections and maintenance, and enlist the services of water
treatment professionals.
For additional technical support, contact your Marley sales representative.
References: ashrae.org. Search “ASHRAE Standard 188” and “ASHRAE
Guideline 12.”
cdc.gov. Search “Water Management Program.”
22
maintenance
Louver Removal-Coil Section:

The coil inlet louvers are comprised of a series of thermoformed PVC pack
assemblies, oriented to push water back into the fluid cooler. They are packed
tightly to ensure no water escapes from the air inlet.
Louver edges can be very sharp and could cut skin if proper protec-
Caution tion is not used. Always wear gloves and sleeves when handling
eliminator packs.
To remove the louvers, place both hands on the louver face and push up,
this will indicate where one assembly stops and another starts. Push a single
louver section up until it hits the top of the metal retaining channel (1). Pull
the bottom side of the louver out away from the fluid cooler and remove the
louver (2). Repeat this procedure for other packs to gain necessary access.
Proper louver pack replacement is essential to operation. To ensure packs are
reinstalled in the correct orientation, it is recommended that one pack is left
in its original location inside the fluid cooler as a reminder of pack orientation.
Replace packs in the reverse procedure explained for removal. Place packs
in the fluid cooler in the order they were removed. Packs should nest tightly
with each other, leaving a level surface with no gaps.
XCEL® Eliminator Removal–Coil Section:

The coil eliminators are comprised of a series of thermoformed PVC pack as-
semblies, oriented to strip water from the air prior to leaving the fluid cooler.
They are packed tightly to ensure no water escapes.
Xcel Eliminator edges can be very sharp and could cut skin if proper
Caution protection is not used. Always wear gloves and sleeves when han-
dling eliminator packs.
➠
23
maintenance
To remove the eliminators, place both hands on the eliminator face and
push up, this will indicate where one assembly stops and another starts.
Push a single section up until it hits the top of the metal retaining channel
(1). Push the bottom side of the pack down inside the fluid cooler (2). Turn
the pack sideways and remove the eliminator (3). Repeat this procedure for
other packs to gain necessary access. Proper eliminator pack replacement is
essential to operation. Incorrect installation may result in excessive drift rates
and fan inefficiency! To ensure packs are reinstalled in the correct orientation,
it is recommended that one pack is left in its original location inside the fluid
cooler as a reminder of pack orientation. Place packs in the fluid cooler in the
order they were removed. Packs should nest tightly with each other, leaving
a level surface with no gaps.
24
maintenance
Belt Tensioning:
Any bolts loosened or removed functioning as mechanical or struc-

Caution tural hardware should be replaced with the torques specified below.
Anti-seize compound is recommended for stainless steel hardware
Fastener Torque Values

Machine Bolt Galvanized Stainless
Size ft·lbƒ N·m ft·lbƒ N·m
8mm 8 10 15 20
10mm 15 20 30 40
12mm 25 35 50 65
16mm 65 85 120 160
20mm 125 170 230 315
See Figure 1 for MH Fluid Cooler models MHF7101 thru MHF7109 with a
single motor per fan. Loosen specified hardware located at the top and bottom
of the motor support assembly before adjusting the jacking screws. Do not
remove the hardware—it is required to support the motor. Tighten
the hardware after adjustment. Ideal tension is the lowest tension at which the
belt will not slip under peak load conditions. Check tension frequently during
the first 24-48 hours of run-in operation. Over tensioning shortens belt and
bearing life. Keep belts free from foreign material which may cause slipping.
LOOSEN HARDWARE
JACKING
SCREWS MOTOR
SINGLE MOTOR—SINGLE FAN. MHF7101 THRU MHF 7109 ONLY.

Figure 1
25
maintenance
See Figure 2 and Figure 3 for MH Fluid Cooler models MHF7101 thru
MHF7109 for single motor with two fans. The belts are adjusted by turning
the two acme bolts clockwise to tension the belts, keeping the motor plate
square to the wall. Before tightening or loosening the belts loosen the four
motor to motor plate bolts. Do not remove the hardware. Next loosen the
four motor plate to side gusset bolts. Do not remove the hardware. It may
help to grease three radial motor slots before turning the adjustment bolts.
If one belt is looser than the other, the motor should rotate in the greased
slots until the tension is approximately equal. After achieving proper tension
tighten the hardware.
LOOSEN HARDWARE
ACME BOLT
MOTOR
SIDE GUSSET
SINGLE MOTOR—TWO FANS. MHF7101 THRU MHF 7109 ONLY.

Figure 2
Fastener Torque at Motor Only

Machine Bolt Galvanized Stainless
Size ft·lbƒ N·m ft·lbƒ N·m
10mm 30-32 42-43 34-36 46-48
12mm 64-66 87-91 85-90 115-122
16mm 135-140 183-190 125-130 169-176
20mm 220-230 298-312 195-205 264-278
MHF7101 THRU MHF7109 ONLY. NON-LUBRICATED
26
maintenance
FAN SHAFT
BEARING
HOUSING
BELT
SIDE GUSSET
MOTOR
SINGLE MOTOR—TWO FANS. MHF7101 THRU MHF7109 ONLY.

Figure 3
Ideal tension is the lowest tension at which the belt will not slip under
peak load conditions. Check tension frequently during the first 24-48
hours of run-in operation. Over tensioning shortens belt and bearing life.
Keep belts free from foreign material which may cause slipping. Never
apply belt dressing as this will damage the belt and cause early failure.
A Dodge® V-Belt Tension Tester is an alternate method for tensioning V-belts.
Check with your local belt supplier.
27
maintenance
See Figure 4 for MH Fluid Cooler models MHF7111 and MHF7113 with
belt drive option. The belts are adjusted by turning the threaded rod. Before
tightening or loosening the belt, the double nuts holding the motor support in
place must be loosened. There are two jam nuts at the end of the rod next to
the casing. Turn the nut closest to the end of the rod to tighten the belt. Turn
the other nut to loosen the belt. After achieving proper tension tighten the
double nuts located on the fan side of the motor support against the motor
support to maintain belt tension, then retighten the motor support nuts. Ideal
tension is the lowest tension at which the belt will not slip under peak load
conditions. Check tension frequently during the first 24-48 hours of run-in
operation. Over tensioning shortens belt and bearing life. Keep belts free from
foreign material which may cause slipping. Never apply belt dressing as this
will damage the belt and cause early failure. A Dodge® V-Belt Tension Tester is
an alternate method for tensioning V-belts. Check with your local belt supplier
FAN SHAFT
SHEAVE
SHEAVE
Figure 4
STRAIGHT EDGE
New belts (operating less than 8 hours) should be tensioned to the maximum
value. Tension after this period should use no less than the minimum value. If
the belt span was measured in inches, then use the pounds of force values. If
specific tensioning instructions are provided with your tensioning tool, those
instructions should be used instead.
28
maintenance
Sheave Alignment:
Warning to performing any inspections that may involve physical contact
with the mechanical or electrical equipment in or on the fluid cooler.
Lock out and tag out any electrical switches to prevent others from
turning the power back on. Service personnel must wear proper
personal protective clothing and equipment.
• The motor sheave is to be positioned as close as possible to the motor

in order to minimize torque on the motor bushings.
• The motor and fan sheaves may have grooves that are not used. The bot-
tom surface of the motor and fan sheaves must be aligned within 1⁄8" of
each other and level within 1⁄2° (1⁄8" in 12") in order to not adversely affect
belt and sheave life.
• Alignment can be achieved by placing a straight edge across the top of
the sheaves making sure that it is level and measuring down to the bottom
surface of both sheaves at four points.
• The number of grooves on the motor and fan sheaves may not match
each other, or the number of grooves on the belt. Always install the belts
on the highest grooves on the fan sheave. Doing so will reduce the force
on the fan shaft bearings, thus increasing their life.
Belt Tension
Belt Tension
Motor Sheave Used V-Belt New V-Belt
diameter minimum maximum
3.4" - 4.2" 4.9 lb 7.2 lb
4.4" - 5.6" 7.1 lb 10.5 lb
5.8" - 8.6" 8.5 lb 12.6 lb
29
maintenance
ALIGN THE TOP EDGES OF THE FAN

AND MOTOR SHEAVES WHILE
ENSURING THAT BOTH ARE FULLY
ENGAGED ON THEIR SHAFTS. THERE
SHOULD BE FOUR POINTS OF CONTACT
WHEN A STRAIGHT EDGE IS LAID
AROSS THE TOP OF BOTH
SHEAVES.
ALIGN THE BOTTOM EDGES OF THE FAN

AND MOTOR SHEAVES WHILE
ENSURING THAT BOTH ARE FULLY
ENGAGED ON THEIR SHAFTS. THERE
SHOULD BE FOUR POINTS OF CONTACT
WHEN A STRAIGHT EDGE IS LAID
AROSS THE BOTTOM OF BOTH SHEAVES.
Figure 5 SHEAVE ALIGNMENT—MHF7101 THRU MHF 7109 ONLY.
Bushing Fastener Bushing Fastener Torque N·m
Torque Values SH 1
⁄4 - 20 8
SDS 1
⁄4 - 20 8
SD 1
⁄4 - 20 8
SK 5
⁄16 - 18 18
SF 3
⁄8 - 16 30
E 1
⁄2 - 13 47
F 9
⁄16 - 12 88
30
maintenance
Maintenance:
Some maintenance procedures may require maintenance personnel to enter
the fluid cooler. Each cased face of the fluid cooler has a door for access to
the interior of the fluid cooler.
The optional fan deck ladder—models MHF7111 and MHF7113—is designed
and intended solely for personnel to gain access to the fan deck. The fan
deck ladder should not be used to enter or exit the access doors located on
the cased face of the fluid cooler unless the optional access door platform
is provided.
The purchaser or owner is responsible for providing a safe method

Warning for entering or exiting the access door. Use of the fan deck ladder
to enter or exit the access doors may result in a fall.
Included with this instruction packet are separate User Manuals on each major
operating component of the fluid cooler, and it is recommended that you read
them thoroughly. Where discrepancies may exist, the separate User Manuals
will take precedence.
The following is recommended as a minimum routine of scheduled maintenance:
Warning to performing any inspections that may involve physical contact
with the mechanical or electrical equipment in or on the fluid cooler.
Lock out and tag out any electrical switches to prevent others from
turning the power back on. Service personnel must wear proper
personal protective clothing and equipment.
Weekly Visually inspect the fluid cooler to assess general operating condi-
tions and for signs of microbial growth and appearance of debris, scale and
corrosion. Refer to ASHRAE Standard 188 and Guideline 12 for specific
frequency recommendations. Consult a knowledgeable water treatment
professional to maintain fluid cooler hygiene.
If equipped, the damper actuator and assembly should be cycled open and
closed several times. Observe the cycle to assure that the blades and link-
age move freely. Seasonal periods where the damper assembly remains open
or closed for months at a time can allow pivot points to scale up, causing
premature failure.
➠
31
maintenance
Monthly (Weekly at start up) Observe, touch, and listen to the fluid cooler.
Become accustomed to its normal appearance, sound, and level of vibration.
Abnormal aspects relating to the rotating equipment should be considered
reason to shut down the fluid cooler until the problem can be located and cor-
rected. Observe operation of the motor, coupling (or drive shaft), Geareducer,
(if equipped) and fan. Become familiar with the normal operating temperature
of the motor(s), as well as the sight and sound of all components as a whole.
If equipped, check Geareducer oil level. Shut down the unit and allow 5 min-
utes for the oil level to stabilize. Add oil if required. Check for Geareducer oil
leaks. Check the Geareducer as well as any optional oil lines to external oil
dipstick/sight glass.
Inspect louvers, drift eliminators and basin trash screens and remove any
debris or scale which may have accumulated. Replace any damaged or worn
out components. Use of high-pressure water may damage the eliminator and
louver material.
Observe operation of the float valve. Depress the operating lever to make
sure that the valve is operating freely. Inspect the suction screen for plugging.
Remove any debris that may have accumulated.
Check for any buildup of silt on the floor of the collection basin. Mentally make
note of the amount, if any, so future inspections will enable you to determine
the rate at which it is forming.
If equipped with dampers, lubricate the pivot points of the individual blades.
Observe the area where the steel pivot pins penetrate the assembly’s outer
frame. The pin should rotate freely in the frame. In locations with severe hard
water supply or climate, apply grease to the pivot points and linkage. This will
both lubricate and seal out oxygen and moisture from the pivot points and
help prevent hard water scale build-up.
Every 3 months If equipped, lubricate fan shaft bearings. While rotating
equipment by hand, grease the bearings until a bead forms around the seals—
a maximum charge of 1.4 ounces (MHF7111-MHF7113) is recommended
Chevron SRI-2 grease (or equivalent lithium-based grease) is recommended.
Models MHF7101 - MHF7109 have a grease fitting on each bearing housing
with a maximum recommended charge of 0.53 ounces per fitting. Mobile SHC
460 grease (or equivalent lithium-based grease) is recommended.
32
maintenance
Semi-Annually If equipped, check the belt tension and condition.
If equipped with dampers, lubricate jack shaft bearings and tie bar linkage with
silicone lubricant. If dampers are equipped with pneumatic or electric actua-
tors, the manufacturer's recommended maintenance procedures should be
observed. If dampers are exposed to heavy dust-laden air, occasional flushing
of the bearings with water is recommended.
Geareducer models used on doubleflow MH Fluid Coolers (Models

Note MHF7111 and MHF7113) are designed for 5-year oil change inter-
vals. To maintain five-year change intervals, use only oil designed
specifically for these Geareducers. If, after five years, turbine-type
mineral oil is used, the oil must be changed semiannually. Refer to
the “Geareducer User Manual” for oil recommendations and further
instructions.
Annually Lubricate motor(s) according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

See instructions on the next page for fluid coolers with the motor located
outside the plenum option. Fan motors with sealed bearings do not require
lubrication maintenance.
If the motor has sealed bearings, additional lubrication is not re-

Note quired. Refer to the motor nameplate to determine if grease type
and amount are specified.
Check to see that all bolts are tight in the fan and mechanical equipment
region, including the fan cylinder and fan guard. Refer to Component User
Manuals for torque values.
Inspect the fluid cooler thoroughly, making maximum use of instructions given
in the separate User Manuals. Check structural bolted connections and tighten
as required. Make preventive maintenance repairs as necessary.
Check to see that all bolts are tight in the fan and mechanical equipment
region, including the fan cylinder and fan guard. Refer to Component User
Manuals for torque values.
Every 5 Years If equipped (MHF7111-MHF7113), change Geareducer oil.
Refer to the Geareducer User Manual for instructions.
33
maintenance
Motor Lubrication Instructions:

Motor located outside plenum option. Doubleflow models MHF7111 and
MHF7113 only. Not required for motors with sealed bearings.
Open and lock out disconnect switch to make certain motor cannot
Warning be started.
Steel Side Casing
Motor
Grease Fill Plug
Attachment Screw
Guard
Figure 6
Grease Relief Plug
1. Remove guard as shown in Figure 6. Opposite end motor bearing is

accessible from outside the fluid cooler.
2. Remove grease fill and relief plugs at both shaft extension end and
opposite end bearings and remove hardened grease, using clean wire.
3. Insert grease fittings in grease fill openings and add grease until grease
is forced out through relief openings.
4. Replace fill plugs and operate mechanical equipment 30 minutes to one
hour to purge excess grease at grease relief opening.
5. Reinstall grease relief plugs and reinstall guard.
6. Resume normal fluid cooler operation.
34
maintenance
Seasonal Shutdown Instructions

When the system is to be shut down for an extended period of time, it is rec-
ommended that the recirculation water system be drained. Leave the basin
drains open.
Draining the coil is not recommended—draining promotes corro-
Caution sion inside the coil tubes. See protecting coil in Freezing weather
on page 19.
During shutdown, follow recommendations in the Fluid Cooler Inspection and

Maintenance section of this manual before attempting repairs. Eliminators and
louvers are easily removed to gain access to the coil. Pay particular attention
to mechanical equipment supports and sheaves or coupling (or drive shafts).
Following each year’s shutdown and cleaning, inspect the fluid cooler’s metal
surfaces for evidence of the need to apply a protective coating. Do not mis-
interpret grime as a need to have the fluid cooler painted. If relatively bright
metal can be exposed by cleaning, consider that the galvanizing has remained
effective. Unless there is evidence of a generalized failure of the galvanizing,
localized touch-up should be all that is required.
To the extent that the galvanizing (zinc coating) still exists, paint
Note will not adhere to it readily. Contact the manufacturer of the coating
you intend to use for instructions.
Fluid cooler framework Check structural bolted connections and tighten

as required.
Fans Check fan assembly bolting and tighten as required. Use torque values
prescribed in the Fan User Manual.
Fans shaft bearings If equipped, lubricate fan shaft bearings at close of
each operating season—see page 33.
Fan motors Clean and lubricate motor (if required) at close of each operating
season (refer to motor manufacturer’s recommendations). Does not apply to
motors with sealed bearings. Check motor anchor bolts and tighten as required.
See Page 35 for fluid coolers with motor located outside the plenum option.
Do not start motor before determining that there will be no interfer-

Caution ence with free rotation of the fan drive.
35
maintenance
The motor(s) should be operated for three hours at least once a month. This
serves to dry out windings and lubricate bearing surfaces. Refer to Marley
“Fan Motor” User Manual Z0239042 for additional information.
At start of new operating season, make sure bearings are adequately lubricated
before returning motor to service. Does not apply to motors with sealed bearings.
Long-Term Storage Procedures

Instructions for protection of non-operating equipment for more than 3 months.
After installation of the Fluid Cooler and completion of the pre-startup instruc-
tions, the operational availability of equipment will last for a maximum period
of three months. Ensure that the fluid cooler and coil are completely drained
of all water and process fluid.
After this initial period of 3 months, until the unit is employed into continuous
operation, the fan shaft should be turned by hand for a few minutes every
month after: Inject a small amount of grease into ball /roller bearings of fan shaft
and drive components as per the manufacturer’s recommendation attached.
General Protective Requirements for Fluid Coolers:

The fan opening at the top of the fluid cooler should be covered with a tarp.
This will protect the mechanical components from rain as well as keep out
dirt, trash, leaves, etc.
All coils on every fluid cooler model are protected from the environment by
the structure of the fluid cooler as well as the PVC air inlet louvers. No ex-
ternal protection of the coil is required for long-term storage. For those units
equipped with dampers, the blades of the dampers should be kept in closed
position. Damper actuators must be removed and stored in a dry location to
prevent condensation buildup inside the actuator.
Internal Protection of Coil:

All of the coil inlet and outlet connections should be sealed off with blind
flanges. One flange per coil should be fitted with a valve, pressure gage and
blocking plug. The coils should be charged with nitrogen gas to prevent cor-
rosion. Connect a nitrogen supply line to the blind flange with valve. Loosen
the bolts at one of the inlet nozzle blind flanges to let air escape. Inject inert
gas into coil so as to effect nitrogen flushing for about 10 minutes and thus to
36
maintenance
expel all air out of the unit. Finally, re-tighten the inlet nozzle blind flange bolts
and let nitrogen pressure build up to 7 psig inside the tube-bundle. Discon-
nect the nitrogen line and plug the isolation valve to avoid any pressure drop
in case of valve leak.
Mechanical Components:
Electric motors All drive motors should be taken down and stored indoors.
Then, every month, turn motor shafts to evenly distribute lubricant to the
bearing parts.
Recirculation pumps All pumps and pump motors should be taken down
and stored indoors (pumps and motors may be stored fully assembled). Then,
every month, turn pump impeller shaft to evenly distribute lubricant to the
bearing parts.
Belts Properly stored belts will retain their properties unchanged for several
years. Under unfavorable storage conditions and with improper handling, dete-
rioration of their physical properties will result. These changes can be caused,
for example, oxidation, ozone, extreme temperatures, light, damp or solvents.
It should be ensured that belts are stored stress free, which is to say without
tension, pressure or other causes of deformation, as strain causes permanent
deformation and failure due to fatigue, as well as cracking. If, for reasons of
space, they are stored suspended, the diameter of the bar from which they
are suspended must be equal to at least 10 times the height of the belt.
The belts may not be stored for longer than 3 month in an open,
Caution uncontrolled environment.
Storage Area The storage area must be dry and dust-free. Belts may not be
kept together with chemicals, solvents, fuels, lubricants, acids, etc.
Temperature Belts should be shielded from Radiators and their pipes. The
distance between radiators and stored equipment must be at least 10 feet.
Light Belts should be protected from light, particularly from direct sunlight
and strong artificial light with high ultraviolet content (formation of ozone),
such as for example fluorescent tubes installed in open fixtures. Ideally, room
lighting should be normal incandescent bulbs.
Ozone To counteract the damaging effect of ozone, the storage areas may
not contain any form of ozone generating equipment, such as for example
fluorescent light sources, mercury vapor lamps or electrical high voltage
➠
37
maintenance
devices. Combustion gases and vapors, which may lead to ozone formation
due to chemical processes, must be avoided or removed.
Dampness Damp storage areas are quite unsuitable. It should be ensured
that no condensation occurs. The relative humidity should be below 65 %.
Cleaning Cleaning of dirty belts can be carried out with a mixture of glycerin
and spirit in a ratio of 1:10.
Benzene, benzol, turpentine and similar substances may not be used.

Caution Furthermore, sharped objects, wire brushes, emery paper etc., may
not be used, as they will cause mechanical damage to the belts.
Bearings Every month, turn the fan shaft and rotate by hand to distribute
grease evenly over the bearing parts. Then, every three months, inject grease
to prevent any blocking of the lubrication lines possibly due to grease hard-
ening. Whenever the fan shaft has been turned, it is a must to secure them
at a standstill.
Fans See Fan User Manual for instructions.
SPX Cooling Technologies Services

Our interest in your MH Fluid Cooler does not end with the sale. Having con-
ceived, designed, and manufactured the most reliable and longest-lasting fluid
cooler of its class, we want to make sure that you gain the maximum possible
benefit from its purchase.
Therefore, the following services are available which are intended to: assure
the maximum possible service life under your operating conditions; tailor the
operating characteristics to your specific needs—and maintain consistently
optimum thermal performance capability. They are available by contacting
your Marley sales representative.
Replacement parts A complete stock of parts and components is maintained
at one or more of the various Marley plants. In cases of emergency, they can
normally be shipped within 24 hours—by air freight if necessary. However, you
would obviously benefit from anticipating your need in advance, thus avoiding
the cost of special handling.
Be sure to mention your fluid cooler serial number (from the fluid cooler name-
plate) when ordering parts.
Periodic maintenance You may wish to contract with SPX Cooling for
regularly scheduled visits—for the purpose of inspecting and reporting your
38
maintenance
fluid cooler’s condition—to make recommendations intended to prevent emer-
gencies— and to perform maintenance considered outside the norm.
This service is not intended to replace the important function performed by
your maintenance staff. Their attention assures the fluid coolers’s routine
operating performance, and is invaluable. However, we recognize that the
unusual manner in which a fluid cooler performs its function—as well as the
unique forces which act upon it—may be considerations which occasionally
require the services of an expert technician.
Additional Information
Increased load requirements MH Fluid Coolers are designed so that cells
of either equal or unequal capacity can be added in the future. This allows you
to compensate for the load increases that normally occur with the replacement
or addition of production equipment—and still retain continuity with respect
to your fluid cooler system.
Fluid cooler rebuilding SPX routinely rebuilds and upgrades fluid cool-
ers and cooling towers of all materials and manufacture. If your product ever
reaches the limit of its service life, we recommend that you investigate the
cost of rebuilding before you routinely order a new replacement fluid cooler.
Each MH Fluid Cooler includes a document package containing general

orientation drawings, and fluid cooler component manuals. These documents
contain important information relating to safe installation and operation of the
fluid cooler. Field installation is required for fan guards (doubleflow models),
piping inlets and piping outlets. Some optional accessories, such as hand-
rails, ladders and safety cages may also require field installation. A separate
installation drawing or manual for each purchased option is included in the
document package along with bills of material. If you have purchased an option
and can’t find the appropriate installation drawing, contact your local Marley
sales representative before proceeding.
In addition to these specific documents, numerous technical reports are

published by SPX including more detailed information on a variety of cooling
tower and fluid cooler operation and service topics. Your Marley sales rep-
resentative will be happy to give you copies of these reports at no charge or
you can download copies from our website at spxcooling.com.
For complete parts and service assistance, contact the Marley sales repre-
sentative in your area. If you need help locating your representative, please
phone 913 664 7400 or check the internet at spxcooling.com.
39
troubleshooting
Trouble Cause Remedy
Check power at starter. Correct any bad connections between the control
apparatus and the motor.
Check starter contacts and control circuit. Reset overloads, close contacts,
Power not available at motor terminals
reset tripped switches or replace failed control switches.
If power is not on all leads at starter, make sure overload and short circuit
devices are in proper condition
Motor will not start Wrong connections Check motor and control connections against wiring diagrams.
Check nameplate voltage against power supply. Check voltage at motor
Low voltage
terminals.
Open circuit in motor winding Check stator windings for open circuits.
Disconnect motor from load and check motor and fan drive for cause of
Motor or fan drive stuck
problem.
Rotor defective Look for broken bars or rings.
Check motor and attempt to start it. Motor will not start if single-phased.
Motor running single-phase
Check wiring, controls and motor.
Motor leads connected incorrectly Check motor connections against wiring diagram on motor.
Bad bearings Check lubrication. Replace bad bearings.
Unusual motor noise
Electrical unbalance Check voltages and currents of all three lines. Correct if required.
Air gap not uniform Check and correct bracket fits or bearing.
Rotor unbalance Rebalance
Cooling fan hitting end belt guard Reinstall or replace fan.
Wrong voltage or unbalanced voltage Check voltage and current of all three lines against nameplate values.
Check fan blade pitch. See “Fan User Manual.” Check for drag in fan
Overload
drivetrain as from damaged bearings.
Check nameplate against power supply. Check RPM of motor and drive
Wrong motor RPM
ratio.
Remove bearing reliefs. Run motor up to speed to purge excessive
Bearing overgreased
grease. Does not apply to motors with sealed bearings.
Wrong lubricant in bearings Change to proper lubricant. See motor manufacturer's instructions.
Stop motor and attempt to start it. Motor will not stat if single-phased.
One phase open
Check wiring, controls and motor.
Clean motor and check ventilation openings. Allow ample ventilation
Motor runs hot Poor ventilation
around motor.
Winding fault Check with ohmmeter.
Bent motor shaft Straighten or replace shaft.
Remove plugs and regrease bearings. Does not apply to motors with
Insufficient grease
sealed bearings.
Limit cumulative accelerations time to a total of 30 seconds/hour. Set on/
Too frequent starting or speed changes off or speed change set points farther apart. Consider installing a Marley
VFD drive for fine temperature control.
Flush bearings and relubricate. Does not apply to motors with sealed
Deterioration of grease or foreign material in grease
bearings.
Bearings damaged Replace bearings.
40
troubleshooting
Trouble Cause Remedy

Voltage too low at motor terminals because of line Check transformer and setting of taps. Use higher voltage on transformer
Motor does not come up to drop terminals or reduce loads. Increase wire size or reduce inertia.
speed Look for cracks near the rings. A new rotor may be required. Have motor
Broken rotor bars
service person check motor.
Wrong motor rotation Wrong sequence of phases Switch any two of the three motor leads.
If new, see if noise disappears after one week of operation. Drain flush,
Geareducer bearings and refill Geareducer oil. See “Geareducer User Manual.” If still noisy,
Geareducer noise. (If replace.
equipped).
Correct tooth engagement. Replace badly worn gears. Replace gears with
Gears
broken or damaged teeth.
Tighten all bolts and cap screws on all mechanical equipment and
Loose bolts and cap screws
supports.
Make sure motor and Geareducer shafts are in proper alignment and
Unbalanced drive shaft or worn couplings. (If "match marks" properly matched. Repair or replace worn couplings.
equipped) Rebalance drive shaft by adding or removing weights from balancing cap
screws. See “Driveshaft User Manual.”
Unusual fan drive vibration Make certain all blades are as far from center of fan as safety devices
Fan permit. All blades must be pitched the same. See “Fan User Manual.”
Clean off deposit build-up on blades
Worn Geareducer bearings. (If equipped) Check fan and pinion shaft endplay. Replace bearings as necessary.
Worn fan shaft bearings. (Belt drive). Check fan shaft endplay. Replace bearings as necessary.
Unbalanced motor Disconnect load and operate motor. If motor still vibrates, rebalance rotor.
Bent Geareducer shaft. (If equipped). Check fan and pinion shaft with dial indicator. Replace if necessary.
Blade rubbing inside of fan cylinder Adjust cylinder to provide blade tip clearance
Fan noise Loose bolts in blade clamps Check and tighten if necessary.
Fan shaft bearing. (Belt drive). Grease bearings.
Insufficient blowdown See "Water Treatment" section of this manual.
Scale or foreign substance in
circulating water system Consult competent water treating specialist. See "Water Treatment"
Water treatment deficiency
section of this manual
Check to see if local heat sources are affecting fluid cooler. See if
Entering wet bulb temperature is above design surrounding structures are causing recirculation of fluid cooler discharge
air. Discuss remedy with Marley representative.
May have to increase fluid cooler size. Discuss remedy with Marley
Design wet bulb temperature was too low.
representative
Cold water temperature too
May have to increase fluid cooler size. Discuss remedy with Marley
warm. Actual process load greater than design
representative
See "Fluid cooler Operation." Overpumping Reduce water flow rate over fluid cooler to design conditions.
Check motor current and voltage to be sure of correct contract
horsepower. Repitch fan blades if necessary. Clean louvers, fill and
Fluid cooler starved for air eliminators. Check to see if nearby structures or enclosing walls are
obstructing normal airflow to fluid cooler. Discuss remedy with Marley
representative.
Reduce water flow rate over fluid cooler to design conditions. Be sure
Distribution basins overflowing
distribution water basin nozzles are in place and not plugged.
Excessive drift exiting fluid Check to see that integral fill. Louvers and eliminators are clean, free of
cooler debris and installed correctly. If drift eliminators are separate from fill,
Faulty drift elimination
make sure they are correctly installed and in place. Clean if necessary.
Replace damaged or worn out components
41
maintenance schedule
Maintenance Service Monthly Semi-annually Seasonal Startup or Annually
Inspect General Condition and Operation x x
Observe Operation of:
Mechanical–motor, fan and drive mechanism x x
Makeup valve (if equipped) x x
Inspect for unusual noise or vibration x x
Inspect and Clean:
Air inlet x x
PVC drift eliminators x x
Distribution basin, nozzles and collection basin x x
Fan and pump motor exterior x x
Coil surface x
Check:
Collection water basin level x x
Blowdown–adjust as required x x
Geareducer Drive (if equipped):
Check for loose fasteners including oil drain plug x
Check oil level, check for / repair oil leaks x x
Change oil R
Make sure vent is open x x
Check driveshaft or coupling alignment x
Check for loose driveshaft or coupling fasteners x
Check driveshaft or coupling bushings or flex element for unusual wear x x
Lube lines (if equipped):
Check for oil leaks in hoses or fittings x R x
Belt drive (if equipped):
Fan shaft bearing lubrication (every 3 mo.) every 3 months every 3 months
Check and tighten support fasteners x
Check shaft, sheave and belt alignment x
Check belt tension and condition x x
Check sheave bushing fastener torque x
Fan:
Check and tighten blade and hub fasteners x
Check fan blade pitch and tip clearance x
Check fan cylinder for loose fasteners x
Motor:
Lubricate (as required) R
Check mounting bolts for tightness x
Operate at least 3 hours a month 3 hours a month 3 hours a month
Basin Heater (if equipped):
Check for proper operation of temp/low water level sensor x
Inspect/clean buildup of contaminant from sensor x x
Structure:
Inspect/tighten all fasteners x x
Inspect and touch up all metal surfaces x
R — Refer to Component User Manual

Note: It is recommended at least weekly, that the general operation and condition be observed. Pay attention to
any changes in sound or vibration that may signify a need for closer inspection.
42
MH fluid cooler
U S E R M A N UA L
SPX COOLING TECHNOLOGIES, INC

7401 WEST 129 STREET Z0920512_E | ISSUED 04/2019
OVERLAND PARK, KS 66213 USA ©2015-2019 SPX COOLING TECHNOLOGIES, INC. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
user manual
IMI 686B vibration switch

Z 1 070 9 9 0 _ B ISSU E D 1/2020 R EAD AN D U N DE R STAN D TH IS MAN UAL PR IOR TO OPE RATI NG OR SE RVICI NG TH IS PRODUCT.
overview
The IMI 686B vibration switch is designed and applied specifically for cooling
tower applications. The casing is stainless steel, hermetically sealed and the
cable set is molded to the casing to prevent water vapor and contaminants
from entering the switch or its connection points.
The switch is factory programmed by SPX specifically for cooling tower vibra-
tion protection and should not be reprogrammed unless directed by SPX.
Refer to wiring diagrams in this manual for interfacing with VFD and motor
starter equipment. Typically the switch is wired to the shutdown circuit of a
VFD or motor starter. The internal switch contact is rated at 20mA, do not
exceed this value. Most VFDs have a 24 VDC low current safety circuit which
is well under the 20mA value.
The IMI 686B vibration switch has a single contact. If two contacts are required
use a Marley IB1 interface box or one of the output fault contacts on the VFD
to indicate a VFD shutdown.
Applying this switch directly in line with a motor starter operating coil may
Caution damage the switch due to high inrush current when energizing the coil.
When applying the switch to a motor starter consider using the Marley
IB1 interface box.
General Features
• Tested in cooling tower applications by SPX engineers who rated its perfor-
mance superior to mechanical vibration switches.
• Factory-programmed by SPX specifically for cooling tower vibration protection.
•S
witch may be reset remotely without entering the cooling tower.
•
Repeatable trip-point includes built-in delay for startup and momentary
vibration spikes.
• Monitors vibration velocity for consistent results.
•A
ble to sense low frequency vibrations better than a mechanical switch.
• Integral 30' (9m) cable with molded connection at the switch protects the
connection point wiring from humidity and chemical exposure.
•
N EMA4X/IP68 hermetically-sealed stainless steel enclosure withstands
harsh internal environments in a cooling tower.
•F
actory installed at location near primary source of vibration.
• 2-wire combination power and control circuit adaptable to most VFD circuits.
• Wide operation temperature range: -40 to 185°F.
2
installation
Sequence of Operation
In normal operation the switch is in a N.C. (normally closed) position with
or without power applied. Once powered, the switch will remain in a closed
state allowing mechanical equipment to operate. If the switch is subjected to a
continuous high vibration level for 3 seconds or more the switch will open and
remain open in a latched state until reset back to a closed position. The three
second delay allows the tower fan to accelerate through critical frequencies
avoiding nuisance tripping.
When the switch trips, the cooling tower has been subjected to a higher than
normal vibration and should be inspected before being put back into service.
Lockout the VFD or motor starter equipment and inspect the tower's mechanical
equipment for possible vibration issues . An unbalanced driveshaft or coupling
may cause enough vibration to trip the switch.
After the vibration issue is resolved and corrected, reset the vibration switch.
To reset, power must be discharged then reapplied to the switch. When the
switch is used in a VFD or motor starter safety circuit resetting may be ac-
complished by cycling power at the VFD or motor starter line side disconnect.
Refer to the starter equipment wiring diagram or manual before attempting this
operation. When cycling power off at a VFD, keep power off for 30 seconds
allowing the VFD capacitors to totally discharge.
Cooling tower controls are typically two wire circuits so once the switch is
Warning reset the fan motor may start automatically without warning. Make sure
personnel are in a safe location.
Vibration Switch
Torque vibration switch 2-5 ft·lbƒ (3-7 N·m) when installing or reinstalling.
Caution
3
wiring
Two-Wire Control Circuit using an SPST Switch
Typical connection points for the IMI 686B vibration switch used with the
E-Clipse bypass terminal strip of an ABB ACH550 VFD.
Breaking the control circuit between points 1 and 7 will disable VFD and bypass
operation. To reset the vibration switch remove incoming power to the VFD,
wait a minute or two allowing the VFD capacitors to discharge then reapply
power. At this point the switch will be in a closed state allowing VFD operation.
1PCB
RBIO-01
COOLING TOWER N.C. BYPASS CONTROL BOARD
VIBRATION SWITCH X2
COMM. COMM.
1 +24 VDC BYPASS BYPASS
2 +24 VDC KEYPAD DISPLAY
3 DCOM
4 GND
5 DI1 STAR/STOP
6 DI2 NOT SEL
7 DI3 SAFETY INTERLOCK
8 DI4 NOT SEL
9 DI5 NOT SEL
10 DI6 OVERRIDE 1
X2
11
RELAY OUTPUT 1
12
BYP NOT FLT
13
14
RELAY OUTPUT 2
15
SYS RUNNING
16
17
RELAY OUTPUT 3
18
SYS STARTED
19
20
RELAY OUTPUT 4
21
BYPASS SEL
22
23 RELAY OUTPUT 5
24 BYPASS AUTO J3
25 A 26
B 27
RS 485 CONNECTION
X2 COM 28
26 SCR DIP SWITCH
27 B+ SW1 1
ON ON
28 A- 2
29 ANGD CONSULT MANUAL
30 SCR FOR SETTING J5
1-20
SLOT 1
4
wiring
IB1 Interface Box Wiring Diagram
• Contacts shown in normal state and powered.
•D
epress and hold the reset button for 15 seconds to reset the vibration switch.
A Marley IB1 interface box is available to help with connecting the vibration
switch to other equipment such as a motor starter or other VFDs. The interface
box provides a second contact which may be used to complete an alarm circuit
at the BMS, reset push button and tripped indicating light.
Mount the IB1 interface box in a convenient location for easy access by op-
erating personnel. Common locations are the cooling tower handrail or near
the tower access door at grade level.
Do not wire the vibration switch in series with the coil of an electrome-
Caution chanical motor starter. Doing so may cause the internal switch to fail due
to coil inrush current.
5
frequently asked questions
Voltage Ratings
Q What are the available voltage ratings?
A 24 to 240 VDC/AC - 50/60Hz.
Sensor
Q Is the switch solid state?
A Yes — a piezoelectric accelerometer senses the vibration level to activate
a solid state relay when tripped. There are no mechanically moving parts.
Q Is the switch factory programmed?
A Yes — the switch is programmed for the specific use within a cooling tower.
Q Does the switch have two contacts?
A No — the switch has one contact that is factory programmed for N.C.
operation and latches open upon a trip.
Q If two contacts are required can SPX accommodate this requirement?
A Yes — an interface box with two sets of mechanical dry relay contacts is
available.
Q Is a 4-20mA vibration level output signal available?
A No — this device is only a switch.
Q Can the switch be reset remotely?
A Yes — removing the power to the switch will reset it back to normal operation.
Q Does the switch require maintenance?
A No.
Switch Mounting
Q What is the standard mounting stud?
A 1/4-28 UNF threads.
Q What is a typical mounting location?
A On a gearbox.
Q Is an explosion-proof design available?
A Yes — as a special. The explosion-proof model meets Class 1 Division 2
Groups A, B, C, and D.
Wiring
Q Is the switch furnished with a cable?
A Yes — the switch includes an integral 30' (9m) cable with blunt connection
ends.
Q Can the probe leads be extended?
A Yes — using #18 gauge 2-wire stranded copper conductor plus a shield.
SPX recommends using a junction box with terminal points to make
connections for the extension wiring.
6
Q Can the leads be cut to length?

A Yes — excessive cable should be coiled and secured if wires are not cut
to length.
Q Is the vibration switch replaceable without having to replace the cable?
A No — the cable is attached with an integrated molded connection. This
connection helps prevent water entry into the switch.
Q Does the probe lead need to be in conduit?
A The sensor cable is rated for outdoor use. Follow local codes to determine
if cable should be placed in conduit.
Integration
Q Can the switch be interfaced with the VFD in the Marley AIO control panel?
A Yes — the Marley AIO panel provides circuits to shut down the VFD and
a status contact used for a remote BMS.
Q
Can the switch be interfaced with other equipment such as an
electromechanical motor starter?
A Yes — SPX can provide an interface box.
7
IMI vibration switch
U S E R M A N UA L
Specifications
Part SPX Factory

Description Enclosure Rating Cable Standards
Number Programmed
30' (9m) with water-
Standard Vibration NEMA4X/IP68 tight molded connection 0.7 ips peak with
2598732 CE
Switch Stainless Steel at switch and flying 3 second delay
ends at opposite end
Vibration Switch Conduit head with

CSA Class1, Div 2 0.7 ips peak with
2695604 with Explosion-Proof terminal blocks CSA
Groups A, B, C, D 3 second delay
Enclosure No Cable
NEMA 4X/IP56 CSA

2600177 IB1 Interface Box No Cable N/A
Fiberglass UL
Standard Vibration Switch Vibration Switch with

Explosion Proof Enclosure

7401 WEST 129 STREET Z1070990_B | ISSUED 1/2020
OVERLAND PARK, KS 66213 USA ©2018-2020 SPX COOLING TECHNOLOGIES, INC. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
user manual
LLC+u+ bms ultrasonic water level control

Z Z1080817 ISSUED 11/2018 READ AND UNDERSTAND THIS MANUAL PRIOR TO OPERATING OR SERVICING THIS PRODUCT.
contents
This manual contains vital information for the proper installation

Note
and operation of the LLC+u+bms controls. Carefully read the manual
before installation or operation and follow all instructions. Save this
manual for future reference.
Description....................................................................................................................4
Programming.................................................................................................................4
Wiring.............................................................................................................................5
Operation - Parts List..................................................................................................6
Frequently Asked Questions.....................................................................................7
Specifications...............................................................................................................8
The following defined terms are used throughout this manual to

bring attention to the presence of hazards of various risk levels, or
to important information concerning the life of the product.
Indicates presence of a hazard which can cause severe personal

Warning
injury, death or substantial property damage if ignored.
Indicates special instructions on installation, operation or mainte-

Note nance which are important but not related to personal injury hazards.
2
introduction
These instructions are intended to assure that field connections are completed
properly and the control system operates for the maximum time possible. Since
product warranty may depend on your actions, please read these instructions
thoroughly prior to operation.
If you have questions about the operation and/or maintenance of this control
system and you do not find the answers in this manual, please contact your
Marley sales representative.
Hazard of electrical shock or burn. Be sure to turn off power to the

Warning
panel before servicing. If working on equipment out of site of panel
disconnect, lockout using standard lockout procedure.
Safety First
The Marley control system uses UL listed components installed in accordance

with the National Electric Code. The location of the cooling tower and field
installation of the control system can affect the safety of those responsible
for installing, operating or maintaining the tower and controls. However,
since SPX Cooling Technologies does not control the tower location, or field
installation, we cannot be responsible for addressing safety issues that are
affected by these items.
The following safety issues should be addressed by those responsible

Warning
for installation, maintenance or repair of the tower and controls:
• Access to and from the control panel (including the customer supplied
main disconnect/branch circuit protection.)
• Proper grounding of electrical control circuits.
• Sizing and protection of branch circuits feeding the control panel.
• Qualification of persons who will install, maintain and service the electri-
cal equipment.
These are only some of the safety issues that may arise in the design and
installation process. Marley strongly recommends that you consult a safety
engineer to be sure that all safety considerations have been addressed.
Other safety issues are addressed in literature supplied with your tower. You
should closely review the literature prior to installing, maintaining or repairing
your tower.
3
installation
Description
The Marley ultrasonic water level control package is provided with the
following components:
• Ultrasonic sensor
• 30' outdoor rated instrumentation cable
• NEMA 4X fiberglass junction box with terminal strip
Wiring and junction box are hard wired to the sensor and shipped
Note
as a single unit
Programming
The ultrasonic sensor measures the distance between water surface and
the ultrasonic sensor to determine water depth in the cold-water basin of a
cooling tower. The sensor provides a 4-20mA output for a BMS system to
monitor water depth. The sensor requires 24VDC loop power from the BMS.
The ultrasonic sensor is factory programmed with a default distance of
4'-1"(1.25m). The controls contractor will typically scale this range in their
BMS system to represent the actual distance between the sensor and the
basin floor, which is typically less than 4'-1".
4
installation
Wiring
Red and Black wires: Red (Power) and Black (Return) leads are for connection
to a 24 VDC power supply or to a 4-20mA loop power source. The Red and
Black wires can be extended up to 1,000' using a 22-gauge or larger wire.
Terminal point descriptions (terminal strip located inside the Marley provided
junction box).
• Red = 24VDC Power (may be extended)
• Black = Return (may be extended)
• Shield ground
5
operation - parts list
The Marley LLC+u+bms sensor is used to monitor water The BMS provides 24 VDC to power the 2-wire 4-20mA
level in the cold water basin of a cooling tower cell using sensor loop. As water level rises and lowers so does the
a non-contact ultrasonic sensor mounted on a stilling 4-20mA output signal in proportion to water level. The
chamber. The sensor provides a 4-20mA continuous BMS reads the 4-20mA signal from the sensor and scales
signal back to a BMS where alarming and controls are the signal to a water level readout within the BMS. The
provided by the BMS. BMS is responsible for all alarming, cutoffs and makeup
solenoid power and control.
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
LLC+u+bms Components Optional Field Components—by others
30'-0 Lead
Sensor
Marley
junction box 4-20mA level signal Display
with 2 wires and shield
terminal points
BMS
Pump
Stilling
Chamber
Solenoid
Basin Floor
Part Number Description

2588880 DL10 Ultrasonic sensor only with 30 ft cable (no junction box or fittings)
DL10 Ultrasonic sensor with 30 ft cable, junction box and 3" union slip fitting for round PVC stilling
2586100
chamber located external to the cooling tower
DL10 Ultrasonic sensor with 30 ft cable, junction box and 3" threaded fitting for square metal stilling
2599330
chamber located internal to the cooling tower
2586086 100 ft 4-18 AWG PVC cable
2586087 150 ft 4-18 AWG PVC cable
2586088 200 ft 4-18 AWG PVC cable
6
Voltage Ratings Ultrasonic Sensor

Q What are the available voltage ratings? Q Is the sensor furnished with wire?
A BMS to power the 2-wire loop with 24VDC .5 watts. A Yes – 30' is standard.
Q Can sensor leads be extended?
Junction Box Enclosure A Yes – Starting from the terminal points inside the junction
box use #18 gauge 2 wire plus shield stranded copper
Q Where is a typical mounting location?
conductor.
A Anywhere near the tower is fine limited by the length of
Q Are longer sensor leads available from the factory?
the lead for the ultrasonic sensor. The enclosure is NEMA
4X fiberglass suitable for outdoor installation. Always A No – But extra wiring for adding extension leads from
route the conduit into the bottom of the enclosure and junction box to other equipment is available in 100', 150'
provide a drip line. The inside of the conduits entering and 200' lengths.
the junction box should be sealed preventing vapor and
Q Can leads be cut to length?
condensation from entering the junction box enclosure.
A Yes – or coil and secure excessive length.
Q Why does the junction box enclosure have latches?
Q Is just the sensor replaceable?
A The latches secure the lid to the gasket providing a water
tight seal. A No – the lead attaches to the ultrasonic sensor as an
integrated molded connection.
Q Are knock outs provided?
Q Does the sensor require maintenance?
A No.
A No.
Q Are other enclosure options available?
Q Does the sensor lead need to be in conduit?
A Yes as a special – NEMA 3R 304 stainless steel.
A The wire is rated for outdoor use (check local codes).
Q Where should the shield wire be grounded?
Stilling Chamber
A The shield wire should only be grounded to the
Q How is the ultrasonic sensor mounted?
customer’s BMS panel.
A A stilling chamber is required to calm the water and
Programming
provide a support for the ultrasonic sensor above the
water surface. Typical location for the stilling chamber is Q Does the sensor require programming?
inside the cooling tower. The stilling chamber material
is either steel or PVC depending on the cooling tower A The sensor typically does not require programming as
model. long as the distance between sensor and basin floor does
not exceed 49" which is factory programmed into the
sensor. The control contractor will scale their system to
reflect actual height distance between sensor and basin
Controller
floor which is typically less than 49".
Q Is a controller furnished with this system?
A No – The controller would be the customer’s BMS or
Assembly Standards
PLC.
The assembly is built to the following industrial control panel
standards:
UL 508A CUL 508A NFPA 70 (NEC)
7
LLC+u+bms water level control
U S E R M A N UA L
Specifications
ULTRASONIC SENSOR JUNCTION BOX
Non-contact type sensor N EMA 4X (IP56) fiberglass enclosure 6"x 6"x 5"D
0'-0 (9m) cable integrated and molded into the sensor,
3 (15.2 x 15.2 x 13.7cm)
flying leads on opposite end terminated to a junction box Terminal strip
Range: 49" (1.25m) longer ranges available
Accuracy: 0.125" (3mm)
COMMUNICATIONS
Resolution: 0.019" (0.5mm)
4-20mA output for continuous water level reading at BMS
Dead band: 2" (50mm)
BMS to provide 24 VDC loop power for sensor
Beam width: 2" (50mm)
®
Configuration: WebCal™ PC, Windows , USB 2.0
Memory: Non-volatile STILLING CHAMBER
Supply voltage: 24 VDC (loop) A stilling chamber is required for calming the water for an
accurate reading and holding the ultrasonic sensor
Consumption: 0.5W
Material: steel or PVC
Loop resist.: 400Ω max
Signal output: 4-20 mA, two-wire
Signal invert: 4-20 mA or 20-4mA OPTIONS
Loop fail-safe: 4 mA, 20 mA, 21 mA, 22 mA or hold last xtension wiring to extend from junction box to BMS or
E
Process temp.: 20° to 140°F (-7° to 60°C) other equipment
Temp. comp.: Automatic Available lengths: 100', 150' and 200' (30.5, 46 and 61m)
Ambient temperature: -31° to 140°F (-35° to 60°C)

Pressure: MWP = 30 PSI (2 bar)
ensor enclosure rating: Type 6P, encapsulated, corrosion
S
resistant and submersible
Enclosure material: Polycarbonate
Strain relief material: Santoprene
Trans. material: PVDF
Cable jacket material: Polyurethane
Cable type: 2-conductor, shielded
Process mount: 1" NPT (1" G)
®
Mount gasket: Viton
Classification: General purpose
Compliance: CE, RoHS
Approvals: cFMus

7401 WEST 129 STREET Z1080817 | ISSUED 11/2018
OVERLAND PARK, KS 66213 USA ©2018 SPX COOLING TECHNOLOGIES | ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Warranty Registraton
Thank you for your recent purchase from SPX Cooling Technologies.
It’s important to register your SPX product within 90 days of
installation to validate your warranty. Register online at:
spxcooling.com/registration
Benefits of Registering Your SPX Product:

• YOU’RE WARRANTED! Product registration is verified.
• YOU’RE NOTIFIED! We’ll send important product service alerts.
• YOU’RE INCLUDED! You’re invited to exclusive educational events.
• WE HEAR YOU! We’ll ask your opinions in customer surveys
Maintenance and inspection tips plus how-to installation and service

videos available at: spxcooling.com/contractor-resources
For information about extending your new product’s warranty,
contact your SPX sales representative, or call 1-800-4Marley

OVERLAND PARK, KS 66213 USA ©2019 SPX COOLING TECHNOLOGIES, INC. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
storage guidelines
Cooling Tower Component Storage – Prior to Assembly
These storage guidelines are for field-erected cooling towers PVC/RTR Piping
and other “knockdown” (KD) cooling towers to be stored at the
Store piping in an enclosed building to avoid infiltration of
jobsite beyond three weeks before being assembled. Secure
contaminants into bell and spigot groove areas which could
materials in a safe area and label “for cooling tower installation.”
contribute to joint leaks at installation. Keep paper plugs taped
See the handling instructions for specific components below.
over pipe ends intact. Store distribution system branch arms and
PVC Film Fill and Packs nozzles away from direct sunlight.
Handle PVC fill components carefully and protect from heat and UV Fiberglass Framing and Casing Panels
damage (embrittlement) on the jobsite. Avoid tearing or mashing
Elevate framing members off the ground. Store casing panels
while unloading. When storing sheets and pack assemblies beyond
upright or angled to prevent rainwater and condensation ponding
three weeks, store indoors away from direct sunlight. If no shading
and permanent staining. Avoid direct sunlight.
structure exists, cover PVC materials with shade cloth, tarp, plastic
sheeting or plastic-coated paper. To prevent heat accumulation Lumber Framing
and sheet distortion:
Place lumber and plywood stacks on dry, flat ground. Allow space
• Cover the sheet stack with either an insulating material such between the ground and lumber for air circulation. Line up spacers
as plywood or a breathable insulating material such as shade vertically within the stacks so that weight above does not distort
cloth. If neither is available, a gap of approximately 6" (15cm) lumber below. Wrap the top, ends and sides of lumber and plywood
between the cover and the top of the stack is required. with breathable lumber wrap material to minimize exposure to
moisture and direct sunlight. If wrap is not available, place scrap
• Allow hot air inside the stack to escape by venting or using
plywood or other covering over the top and ends of each wood
breathable cloth.
stack to help control damage.
•A
rrange so air flows freely under the bottom of the stack.
Miscellaneous
Geareducer® Gear Drives and Motors
Store all fluids, oil, caulking, thread guard and aerosols indoors to
Store gear drives and motors in an enclosed building to avoid prevent freezing, water and heat damage.
infiltration of contaminants into gears and motor windings. Rotate
motor shaft monthly so that bearing surfaces are adequately
lubricated. Air conditioning is not required.
storage guidelines
Cooling Tower Long Term Downtime Preparations
Protecting a cooling tower prior to startup or during downtime of If the cooling tower will remain idle 6 months or longer,
at least a month requires several critical maintenance steps. consider these additional steps:
If the cooling tower is not installed or connected to power: 6. If equipped with a gearbox, fill it with oil in lieu of turning the
fan shaft by hand. Return oil level to normal operating level
1. A
t least once a month, turn fan and motor shafts by hand for
when resuming service. Reference User Manual: Cooling
ten revolutions or more to lubricate bearings and gears.
Tower Downtime Instructions Z0238848 at spxcooling.com.
2. E
very three months, lubricate motor and fan shaft bearings
7. P
erform insulation tests on motor windings before resuming
(if applicable).
service.
3. C
heck the electrical equipment manufacturers’ user manuals
If the cooling tower is installed and connected to power:
for storage instructions. To prevent condensation, dust, insects
and other foreign material from entering electrical equipment, Operate the motor for at least three hours per month to dry out
store these items inside whenever possible. If outside storage windings and lubricate bearing surfaces. Reference User Manual:
is necessary, position or mount electrical cabinetry so that it is Marley Fan Motor Z0239042 at spxcooling.com.
ventilated and drains as designed.
2. O
perate the motor with belt, coupling or driveshaft connected
4. If supplied with motor space heaters, consider energizing them to turn fan shaft and lubricate bearings and gears.
to prevent condensation.
3. C
heck electrical equipment manufacturers’ user manuals for
5. O
pen all tower drains. Position or mount galvanized steel storage instructions.
components so they drain and dry completely to prevent stains.
4. If supplied with motor space heaters, consider energizing to
prevent condensation.
5. Open all tower drains so water drains and tower dries completely
to prevent stains.

OVERLAND PARK, KS 66213 USA ©2020 SPX COOLING TECHNOLOGIES, INC. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

Instrucciones de Armado Torres Marlyn Eto

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

Instrucciones de Armado Torres Marlyn Eto

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Instrucciones de Armado Torres Marlyn Eto

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SPX Cooling Technologies Literature Package January 18, 2024

Project: Boston Scientific De Costa For: Clima Ideal

Order No: 10243694 Model No: MHF7111SATBNC4SGK PO No: IM0010663

SPX Cooling Technologies

This package contains the following drawings:

Drawing Rev Description

50196546 A 7111-13 COPPER COIL I/O DETAILS

This package contains the following drawings:

Drawing Rev Description

50212853 A MHF7111-13 LFPF Louver face Ldr Ext Fill

This package contains the following user manuals:

Manual Rev Description

This package contains the following user manuals:

Manual Rev Description

Z0238848 C DM-MDT-C DOWNTIME MANUAL

Tornillos rosca de acero inoxidable S410/S431: Generalmente no tienen

Tornillo de acero inoxidable S316: La cabeza generalmente esta marcada como

Galvanized screws provided to pre-tap holes are generally unmarked

Los tornillos galvanizados que se proporcionan para los orificios de

CONFIDENTIAL: The contents of this document DRAWN BY DRAWN DATE

FIND NO. DESCRIPTION

LOUVER FACE PLATFORM LADDER

W22 FIND NO. DESCRIPTION

ALUM LDR V10 W22

V18 L55 L98

X02 V10 ALUM LDR

W03 V18 FIND NO. DESCRIPTION

L40 V18 X02

BOTTOM MODULE WITH

NEMA 3R indoor enclosure

Note: A) Select dimension below based on HP and voltage at site

Marley Drawing # 10000006799

Voltage 3 phase 60 cycle

HP 208/230 460 575

60 225 100 100

75 400 125 100

100 400 225 125

125 225 225

150 225 225

200 400 Call

250 600 Call

ACH580 E-Clipse Bypass

Dimensions: ACH580-BxR UL (NEMA) Type 3R, R1 through R4 Frame Size

Drawing is not for engineering purposes.

Height (H) Width (W) Depth (D) Weight Dimensional

Note: UL (NEMA) Type 3R, Bx3R-1...Bx3R-2 enclosures are designed to be

ABOUT THIS MANUAL

• Ladders: access to sections of tower. GENERAL DECAL INSTRUCTIONS

General application instructions:

SEALER 3/8" (10mm)

TYPE A TYPE C DIAMETER BEAD

540 lbs 135 lbs

TO TOP OF THE FANDECK

3. ADD PLATFORM WEIGHT TO TOWER OPERATING WEIGHT SHOWN ON SUGGESTED

TOP OF 4. MAINTENANCE OPTIONS NOT SHOWN, BUT ALSO AVAILABLE:

WITH SINGLE LADDER OPTION ONLY.

0MM E) SAFETY GATE AT LADDER OPENING.

DETAIL A CONFIDENTIAL AND CONSTITUTE THE EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF SPX

ADDITIONS TO DESIGN OPERATING LOADS